Sony DVS-9000 User Manual Download

Page: 943 / 1228

Appendix (Volume 2)

SpotLighting ..............................................................................................944

Texture Patterns .................................................................................944
Shape Patterns ...................................................................................945

Functional Differences With Models of DME ........................................946
Macro File Editing Rules .........................................................................949

About the Macro Attachment List Display ............................................962

M/E and PGM/PST Banks ................................................................962
Auxiliary Bus Control Block .............................................................966
Other Blocks ......................................................................................968

Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro ...............................970

Summary of Contents for DVS-9000

Page 1: ...DVS 9000 9000SF System With CCP 8000 Series Center Control Panel User s Guide Production Switcher System Volume 1 English 2nd Edition Software Version 8 00 and Later ...

Page 2: ...F MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON TORT CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF Sony Corporation r...

Page 3: ...ration The CCP 6224 2M E or CCP 6324 3M E control panel can be incorporated into the conventional control panel configuration including the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block and the auxiliary bus compatible cross point control block 103 1030 1038 Menu operations A VGA monitor can be used for the menu control block by using an USB mouse 127 Router control The source for each destination can be ...

Page 4: ... P P Software 37 Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations 38 Digital Multi Effects DME 38 External Devices 39 Keyframes 39 Snapshots 40 Utility 41 Shotbox 41 Macros 41 Files 42 Setup 43 Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Names and Functions of Parts of the Control Panel 47 Control Panel Example Configuration 1 With Standard Transition Modules 47 Control Panel Example Config...

Page 5: ...ransition Control Block and Flexi Pad Control Block Simple Type 90 Independent Key Transition Control Block Simple Type 94 Downstream Key Control Block 96 Downstream Key Fade to Black Control Block 98 Transition Control Block Compact Type 100 CCP 6224 2M E Control Panel 103 CCP 6324 3M E Control Panel 104 Cross Point Control Block CCP 6224 6324 in the AUX Operating Mode 105 Multifunction Flexi Pad...

Page 6: ... 167 Transition Indicator Function 167 Setting the Transition Rate 168 Pattern Limit 173 Executing an Auto Transition 176 Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever Manual Transition 177 Combinations of Auto and Manual Transitions 178 Non Sync State 178 Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode 179 Transition Preview 181 Independent Key Transitions 183 Basic Independent Key Transition Operations 18...

Page 7: ...ey Modify Clear 236 Blink Function 236 Video Processing 237 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 238 Operations in the Key Control Block 238 Key Edge Modifications 242 Masks 246 Applying a DME Effect to a Key 247 Other Key Setting Operations 249 Key Adjustment Operations With the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block 252 Key Snapshots 259 Key Snapshot Operations 259 Key Snapshot Opera...

Page 8: ...tern 312 DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers 320 Relation Between DME Wipes and Other Effects 321 Basic Procedure for DME Wipe Settings 323 DME Wipe Settings Menu 323 DME Wipe Pattern Selection 323 Setting DME Wipe Modifiers 326 DME Wipe Modify Clear 333 DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions 334 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings 334 Setting Independe...

Page 9: ...till Images Animation 375 Frame Memory Clip Function 378 Frame Memory Clip Operations 379 Preparations for Operation 379 Recalling Clips 379 Clip Playback 381 Clip Creation 385 Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders 387 Clip Output 388 Clip Transition Operations 389 Image Data Management 392 Pair File Processing 392 Moving Files 393 Deleting Files 394 Renaming Files 395 File Backups 395 Restor...

Page 10: ...ess Adjustments of a Primary Input Signal 418 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular Bus 418 Video Process Memory 419 Video Process Settings 420 Chapter 9 Color Corrector Preparations 422 Overall Color Corrector Operations 424 Enabling Color Corrector 424 Copy and Swap Operations 424 Color Corrector Functions 426 Input Video Processing Operations 426 Primary Color Correction Operations 427 Seco...

Page 11: ...n Two Channel Mode 461 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three Channel Mode 466 Menu Tree 467 Recalling Menus 467 M E 1 to M E 3 Menus 467 PGM PST Menu 470 Frame Memory Menu 472 Color Bkgd Menu 473 AUX MON Menu 473 CCR Menu 474 Copy Swap Menu 475 Misc Menu 475 Status Menu 475 DME Menu 476 Global Effect Menu 477 Device Menu 477 Macro Menu 478 Key Frame Menu 479 Effect Menu 480 Snapshot Menu 481 Shotbo...

Page 12: ...ing Virtual Images 518 DME Special Effect Operations 519 Special Effects 519 Operations Common to All DME Special Effects 533 Border Settings 533 Crop Settings 535 Beveled Edge Settings 537 Key Border Settings 539 Art Edge Settings 540 Flex Shadow Settings 548 Wipe Crop Settings 555 Color Mix Settings 559 Defocus Settings 560 Blur Settings 563 Multi Move Settings 565 Sepia Settings 566 Mono Settin...

Page 13: ...biner Settings 645 Brick Settings 653 Shadow Settings 656 Chapter 12 External Devices Control of External Devices 660 Shared Functions for External Device Control 661 Control of P Bus Devices 663 Creating and Editing the P Bus Timeline 663 P Bus Trigger 666 Control of GPI Devices 668 GPI Timeline Creation and Editing 668 Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders 672 Manual Operation 672 Con...

Page 14: ...e Region in Which Editing Applies 732 Setting the Edit Points 735 Creating and Editing Keyframes 737 Creation 737 Insertion 738 Modification 738 Deletion 742 Movement 743 Copying 744 Pause 744 Keyframe Loop Repeated Execution of a Specified Range 745 Undoing an Edit Operation 748 Duration Mode Setting 748 Transition Mode Settings for User Programmable DME 749 Keyframe Creation and Editing in the M...

Page 15: ...74 Effect Register Editing 774 Displaying a List of Effect Registers for Editing 779 Chapter 14 Snapshots Overview 784 Snapshot Types 784 Snapshot Attributes 785 Snapshot Operations From the Numeric Keypad Control Block 788 Saving and Recalling Snapshots 788 Snapshot Operations in the Flexi Pad Control Block 793 Banks and Registers 793 Saving and Recalling Snapshots 795 Snapshot Operations in the ...

Page 16: ...e Flexi Pad Control Block 832 Shotbox Execution in the Utility Shotbox Control Block 834 Executing a Shot Box Function With the Key 2 Row Cross Point Buttons 835 Shotbox Register Editing 837 Chapter 16 Macros Macros 841 Overview 841 Macro Creation and Editing 844 Macro Execution 847 Macro Operations in the Numeric Keypad Control Block and the Key frame Control Block 848 Recalling a Macro Register ...

Page 17: ...nu Macro Register Editing 908 Macro Timeline 910 Creating and Editing a Macro Timeline 912 Chapter 17 Files Overview of File Operations 916 Operations on Individual Files 920 Displaying the Individual File Operation Menus 920 Viewing Detailed File Information 920 Selecting Regions 922 Selecting a Device for Operations 922 Saving Files 923 Loading Files 924 Copying Files 926 Renaming Files 927 Dele...

Page 18: ...g a File 951 Errors 952 Correspondence Between Events and Symbols 952 Symbols and Parameters 954 Example of File Contents 961 About the Macro Attachment List Display 962 M E and PGM PST Banks 962 Auxiliary Bus Control Block 966 Other Blocks 968 Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro 970 Volume 3 Chapter 18 System Setup System Setup for the Whole System 976 Network Settings Network Config Men...

Page 19: ...ory Card 1004 Carrying Out the Primary Setting 1004 Reloading a USB Driver 1005 Initializing the Hard Disk 1005 Locking the Setup Menu Settings 1006 Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup Panel Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu 1014 Panel Setup 1014 Interchanging the Bank Order or Disabling Operation 1015 Assigning Two M E Banks to One M E Bank 1016 Assigning the Key Delegation in the Downstream ...

Page 20: ...ng Operations to the Switcher Extension Interface Ports 1040 Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu 1042 Creating Cross Point Assign Tables 1042 Copying Cross Point Assign Tables 1048 Selecting Cross Point Assign Tables 1049 Exporting Source Names and Destination Names 1050 Making Settings for Audio Mixer 1051 Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings Aux Assign Menu 1052 Assigning a Bus to an AUX Delega...

Page 21: ...he Touch Panel 1088 Setting the Menu to be Shown When the Menus Are Started 1089 Setting the Mouse Wheel Scrolling Direction for Parameter Setting1089 Selecting the Mouse Button Used for Adjusting the Knob Parameters 1089 Chapter 20 Switcher Setup Switcher Settings for Switcher Configuration Config Menu 1093 Adjusting the Reference Phase 1094 Specifying the Video Switching Timing 1094 Setting the ...

Page 22: ...With External Devices Device Interface Menu 1121 Making 9 Pin Port Device Interface Settings 1121 Making Switcher Processor GPI Input Settings 1122 Making Switcher Processor GPI Output Settings 1125 Enabling or Disabling AUX Bus Control 1126 Setting the Interface Between the DME and the Switcher 1127 Setting the AUX Bus Output and Reentry Input 1128 Selecting the Mode for Turning Off Keys Upon Rec...

Page 23: ...3 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally Router Tally Router Interface Settings Router Menu 1166 Assigning Switcher Inputs and Outputs to S Bus Space 1166 Making an External Box Setting 1167 Tally Group Settings Group Tally Menu 1170 Wiring Settings Wiring Menu 1171 Making New Wiring Settings 1171 Changing the Wiring Settings 1172 Deleting Wiring Settings 1172 Sorting Wiring Settings 1172 Ta...

Page 24: ...f the MKS 8080 8082 in Simple Connection 1186 Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS Checking the Communications Status 1188 Communications Status Display 1188 Appendix Volume 3 Data Saved by Setup Define and Initial Status Define 1192 Data Saved by Setup Define 1192 Data Saved by Initial Status Define 1197 Error Messages 1201 Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status Error Log Menu 1201 Error Messages Appearing...

Page 25: ...30 Keys 34 Wipes 35 DME Wipes 35 Frame Memory 36 Color Backgrounds 36 Copy and Swap 36 Video Process 37 Color Corrector 37 Simple P P Software 37 Creation of Special Effects and Management of Data and Operations 38 Digital Multi Effects DME 38 External Devices 39 Keyframes 39 Snapshots 40 Utility 41 Shotbox 41 Macros 41 Files 42 Setup 43 ...

Page 26: ... abbreviated names characterizing the functions and features are sometimes used When distinctions between system configurations must be drawn the terms in the following table are used Principal components and naming The formal product names of the principal components of the DVS 9000 system and the terms used in this manual are as follows System nomenclature The following terms are used for system...

Page 27: ...l MVE 9000 C DME Processor Pack MVE 9000 C Operation Manual MVE 9000 C Installation Manual CCP 6000 8000 Center Control Panel Pack CCP 6000 8000 Operation Manual CCP 6000 8000 Installation Manual DCU 8000 Device Control Unit Pack DCU 8000 Operation Manual DCU 8000 Installation Manual DCU 2000 Device Control Unit Pack DCU 2000 C Operation Manual DCU 2000 C Installation Manual System configuration a...

Page 28: ...ou to use up to four DME channels Further you can connect an MVE 8000A or MVE 9000 extensible DME processor which provides any number from one to four channels for a maximum of eight channels of DME functionality Powerful external device interfaces By connecting to a Sony routing switcher or similar a large system can be built From the control panel it is also possible to operate other equipment i...

Page 29: ...VE 9000 through the SDI interface without installing the BKDS 9470 Designed for use in a live broadcasting environment Flexible control panel layout Because of its modular design the various sections of the control panel can be laid out as required This allows a flexible layout appropriate to the system operation High performance user interface The menu control block provides a large color LCD pan...

Page 30: ... background and keys 1 to 4 downstream keys 1 to 4 in the PGM PST bank and also vary combinations of these simultaneously The following are examples of transition Changing the background A background transition switches from the video currently selected on the background A bus the current video to the video selected on the background B bus the new video In the default selection of flip flop mode s...

Page 31: ...ur keys downstream keys on the PGM PST bank If you select a key which is already inserted the transition will delete the key A simultaneous combination of deleting and inserting keys is also possible Inserting or deleting key 1 and key 2 Deleting key 1 and inserting key 2 Delete Insert Key 1 Key 2 Key 1 Key 2 Transition ...

Page 32: ... at the same time Changing the background and key 2 simultaneously Changing the background and keys 1 to 4 simultaneously Selecting the transition type determines the way in which the transition occurs The following are the transition type Mix NAM non additive mix Super mix Preset color mix color matte Wipe DME wipe Clip transition Cut Key 1 Key 2 Transition Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Transition ...

Page 33: ...pendent key transitions By carrying out an independent key transition in combination with a common transition different transition types can be used for the background and keys The following description compares the independent key transition with a common transition taking a simultaneous change of the background and key as an example Video used in the transition Effect of a common transition In t...

Page 34: ...xt The signal determining how the background is cut out is termed key source and the signal that replaces the cut out part is termed key fill The system component responsible for processing a key is referred to as a keyer Each switcher bank has four keyers each providing the same functionality On each switcher bank you can use the following key types methods of processing the key source Luminance ...

Page 35: ...e patterns Enhanced wipes Rotary wipes Mosaic wipe pattern Random and diamond dust wipe patterns You can combine two selected patterns referred to as main and sub to create a new pattern pattern mix You can also specify the wipe direction or set the pattern position applying various changes and modifiers to the selected wipe pattern For details see Chapter 5 Wipes page 265 DME Wipes A DME wipe is ...

Page 36: ...Color Backgrounds This function can be used to obtain color background video Two color signals generated from the dedicated generators can be switched or mixed and then output For details see Color Background page 398 Copy and Swap This function can be used to copy and swap the settings among the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks or between keyers The following settings can be copied or swapped Ove...

Page 37: ...video signal color correction black balance white balance adjustment gamma correction knee correction etc The color corrector includes the following adjustments Input video processing Primary color correction Secondary color correction RGB clip Luminance processing Spot color adjustment Output video processing YUV clip For details see Chapter 9 Color Corrector page 421 Simple P P Software By insta...

Page 38: ...s Border Crop Beveled Edge Key Border Art Edge Flex Shadow Effects for entire image Defocus Blur Multi Move Effects for video image Sepia Mono Posterization Solarization Nega Contrast Mosaic Mask Sketch Metal Dim and Fade Glow Freeze effects Nonlinear effects Wave Mosaic Glass Flag Twist Ripple Rings Broken Glass Flying Bar Blind Split Split Slide Mirror Multi Mirror Kaleidoscope Lens Circle Panor...

Page 39: ... A53 protocol For details on the devices that can be connected consult your Sony representative You can control an external device by previously registering timeline keyframes For details see Chapter 12 External Devices Volume 2 Keyframes A keyframe represents an instantaneous state of an image it can be saved in a register see Registers in Chapter 13 Volume 2 and recalled for reuse By arranging a...

Page 40: ...ter 13 Keyframe Effects Volume 2 Snapshots The term snapshot refers to a function whereby the various settings required to apply a particular effect to an image are saved in a register as a set of data for recall as required to recover the original state Snapshots are divided as follows Snapshots applying to a particular region functional block of the switcher or DME Master snapshot Key snapshot W...

Page 41: ...ot or keyframe effect can be recalled simultaneously For details see Shotbox in Chapter 15 Volume 2 Macros The term macro refers to the function whereby a sequence of signal selections and other operations on the control panel is saved as data in memory so that it can be recalled as required to automatically execute the same sequence of operations The individual control panel operations constituti...

Page 42: ...l files or registers or together in a batch Regarding frame memory it is possible to capture image data stored in an external device into frame memory You can also convert the format of image data in frame memory into a different format and save it in an external device The following files can be saved and recalled Operation mode setup data for system as a whole and individual devices Device statu...

Page 43: ... menu are grouped under the following headings System setup System For details see Chapter 18 System Setup Volume 3 Panel setup Panel For details see Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup Panel Volume 3 Switcher setup Switcher For details see Chapter 20 Switcher Setup Switcher Volume 3 DME setup DME For details see Chapter 21 DME Setup DME Volume 3 DCU setup DCU For details see Chapter 22 DCU Setup DCU V...

Page 44: ...44 Setup Chapter 1 DVS 9000 Functions ...

Page 45: ...ckball 68 Device Control Block Joystick 71 Device Control Block Search Dial 72 Keyframe Control Block 75 Numeric Keypad Control Block 78 Fade to Black Control Block 80 Auxiliary Bus Control Block for AUX Buses 81 Auxiliary Bus Control Block for Router Control 83 Menu Control Block 85 Memory Card USB Adaptor Block 86 Memory Stick USB Connections Block 87 Utility Shotbox Control Block 89 Transition ...

Page 46: ...ion Flexi Pad Control Block 107 Basic Menu Operations 109 Menu Organization 109 About the Top Menu List 109 Accessing Menus 110 Displaying a Menu 118 Interpreting the Menu Screen 119 Menu Operations 120 Operation With a Mouse 127 Switching Between the Main Menu Site and Subsidiary Menu Site 133 Shortcut Menu 133 ...

Page 47: ... of Parts of the Control Panel Control Panel Example Configuration 1 With Standard Transition Modules The DVS 9000 system control panel comprises a number of modules The following illustration shows a typical 32 button 4 M E configuration with standard transition modules used in the transition control block ...

Page 48: ...ol Panel Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Control panel configuration 1 left side with standard transition modules Auxiliary bus control block page 81 M E 1 bank M E 2 bank M E 3 bank PGM PST program preset bank Cross point control block page 53 ...

Page 49: ...mory Stick USB connections block page 87 Key control block page 64 Keyframe control block page 75 Device control block page 68 page 71 Menu control block page 85 Transition control block standard type page 57 Fade to black control block page 80 Flexi Pad control block standard type page 62 Downstream key control block page 96 Utility Shotbox control block page 89 Numeric keypad control block page ...

Page 50: ...on 2 With Simple Transition Modules The following illustration shows a typical configuration with simple transition modules used in the transition control block Except for the simple modules this is the same configuration as in example configuration 1 Control panel configuration 2 left side with simple transition modules ...

Page 51: ...l Panel Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel Control panel configuration 2 right side with simple transition modules Transition control block and Flexi Pad control block simple type page 90 Independent key transition control block simple type page 94 ...

Page 52: ...Panel Example Configuration 3 With Compact Transition Modules The following illustration shows a typical configuration with compact transition modules used in the transition control block Control panel configuration 3 with compact transition modules Transition control block compact type page 100 ...

Page 53: ...ignals used for video creation on this M E bank or PGM PST bank Each row of buttons corresponds to one or more signal buses within the switcher Key 1 row The buttons in this row select the key 1 or key 3 signals to be inserted M E 1 M E 1 SHIFT SHIFT XPT HOLD XPT HOLD PRE MCRO KEY3 KEY4 POST MCRO XPT HOLD XPT HOLD UTIL M E 1 M E 1 M E 2 M E 2 M E 2 M E 2 M E 3 M E 3 M E 3 M E 3 SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT M...

Page 54: ...is held down in Hold mode these buttons are assigned to the utility 1 bus and can be used to select the signal on that bus Background B row Press the desired button to select the signal as the background video after the transition on this M E bank or PGM PST bank While the UTIL button on the right hand side is held down in Hold mode these buttons are assigned to the utility 2 bus and can be used t...

Page 55: ... in auto mode While the SHIFT button on the right hand side or the SHIFT button assigned to the column of cross point buttons is enabled the source name of the signal assigned to the column of cross point buttons in shift mode appears You can select green orange or yellow for the background color of the source name display for each source separately You can set the source name display mode and bac...

Page 56: ...combination with a macro only set button assigned to the utility shotbox control block or a user preference button Alternatively without using the button you can make the selection simply by pressing simultaneously with the PRE MCRO button This button is disabled when some operation modes are selected in the Setup menu For details see Setting the Assignment of Macro Operation Buttons in Chapter 19...

Page 57: ...IPE SUPER MIX DME PRIOR SET NORM NORM REV REV TRANS PVW PTN LIMIT LIMIT SET KF KEY1 ON AUTO TRANS CUT AUTO TRANS KEY2 ON AUTO TRANS KEY3 ON AUTO TRANS KEY4 ON AUTO TRANS ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 9 PRIOR SET button 1 Next transition selection buttons 8 Key status display 2 Transition type selection buttons 7 KF button 6 Pattern limit buttons 5 TRANS PVW button 3 Transition execut...

Page 58: ...video fades in as the current video fades out During the transition the overall signal level is maintained at 100 In a key transition the key fades in for insertion or out for removal NAM non additive mix The current and new video signals are compared and the signal with the higher luminance level is given priority in the output The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of t...

Page 59: ...pe Pattern List page 453 or in the direction of the arrow When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button plays the tape REV reverse The wipe proceeds in the opposite direction to that when the NORM button is pressed When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode is enabled in setup pressing this button cues the tape automatically to the star...

Page 60: ...o the front The following controls are used as the independent key transition control block j Key delegation buttons These buttons delegate this independent key transition control block to a desired keyer Press one of the KEY1 to KEY4 buttons DSK1 to DSK4 in the PGM PST bank turning it on You can press more than one button to select two or more keyers While these buttons are held down you can sele...

Page 61: ...he source name selected on the corresponding keyer In key snapshot mode press these buttons corresponding to registers 1 to 4 for the selected keyer to save or recall a key snapshot n Key snapshot setting buttons K SS key snapshot This enables key snapshot mode K SS STORE key snapshot store To save a key snapshot hold down this button and press the key source name display key snapshot button corre...

Page 62: ...ll the pattern number of a DME wipe pattern use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section SNAPSHOT To save or recall a snapshot use this in combination with the buttons of the memory recall section EFF effect To recall the master timeline or run an effect use this in combination with the buttons in the memory recall section SHOTBOX To recall or execute a shotbox use this in...

Page 63: ...ry recall section This consists of 12 buttons with LCDs These display changes according to various operation modes d UNDO button UNDO After recalling a register press this button to return to the state before recalling the register When contents have been saved to a register hold down the STORE STATS button and press this button to return the register to its state before the save operation STORE S...

Page 64: ...the bank an M E bank or the PGM PST bank to which the key control block is delegated DME 1 DME 2 DME 3 DME 4 M E 1 M E 2 RE SIZER M E 3 P P KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 TRANS LUM LIN CRK CVK PTN AUTO SEL SPLIT MATTE FILL KEY DROP SOFT EDGE BDR DROP BDR SHDW EMBOS OUT LINE SHOW KEY MAIN MASK SUB MASK ZABTN MORE MON FM FEED OVER RIDE TRACE PROC KEY AUTO DELEG DME 5 DME 6 DME 7 DME 8 3 Key fill key source sel...

Page 65: ... the key source bus hold down this button and press a button in the key 1 or key 2 row in the cross point control block To use the signal selected on the key fill bus as key source self keying press the AUTO SEL button and SPLIT button at the same time so that both are off MATTE FILL To use a color matte from the internal generator as key fill press this button turning it on You can adjust the col...

Page 66: ...ew and the preview of each M E or PGM PST bank in a Setup menu g Knobs Turn the knobs to adjust the parameter values h Displays Each display shows the initial letters of the parameter name and the parameter value maximum three digits including a minus sign for a negative value i DME channel selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to delegate a DME channel to the keyer The number...

Page 67: ...an be selected as a reentry signal PROC V or PROC K for the M E or PGM PST bank on the auxiliary bus or the like If a DME is selected on the currently selected keyer the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned otherwise the key fill and key source are assigned l OVERRIDE button To select a DME channel already allocated to another keyer or transition to the cur...

Page 68: ...enables pattern position setting used for color backgrounds When the DME1 to DME8 buttons are selected This enables the three dimensional transform operation mode in the device control block Press a button turning it on to select a DME channel You can select multiple buttons simultaneously The number of valid buttons depends on the number of DME processor channels installed When the DEV button is ...

Page 69: ... position setting for key 4 DSK4 MAIN Press this button to enable main wipe pattern position setting for normal transitions SUB Press this button to enable sub wipe pattern position setting for normal transitions Among the K1 CB1 button K2 CB2 button K3 button K4 button MAIN button and SUB button you can select multiple buttons POS Press this button to enable pattern movement in the x axis and y a...

Page 70: ...operation is switched to a finer control fine mode When the effect run control mode is enabled By turning the Z ring you can run the keyframe effect independent of the STOP NEXT KF EFF LOOP and similar settings in the keyframe control block Turn clockwise to run the effect in the normal direction and counterclockwise for the reverse direction When the VTR disk recorder frame memory operation mode ...

Page 71: ... the joystick operation is switched to a finer control fine mode The button on the end of the joystick SRC button TRGT button Depending on the settings made in the Setup menu the operation speed multiple can be changed When the effect run control mode is enabled By moving the joystick sideways you can run the keyframe effect independent of the STOP NEXT KF EFF LOOP and similar settings in the keyf...

Page 72: ...r the current reference device START TC STOP TC When you press a device selection button the button lights selecting the assigned device as the reference device and displaying its setting value In the case of the SBOX buttons the display does not change When the operation applies to a VTR disk recorder the displayed setting value depends on whether the TIMELINE button is on or off as follows When ...

Page 73: ...ntrol Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 19 Volume 3 SBOX buttons can be set as device selection buttons or DELAY button in the Setup menu d DELAY button When pressed this button lights green the numeric keypad control block display changes to DELAY__ and you can set the start delay time for the selected device The setting range is from 00 00 to 59 29 depends on the video format This button goe...

Page 74: ...ues until the reference device is cued up and when the cueing up is finished this button lights green REW When pressed this button lights amber and material of the device selected with the device selection buttons is rewound To stop during the rewind press the STOP button or ALL STOP button PLAY When pressed this button lights amber and the device selected with the device selection buttons plays T...

Page 75: ...olume 2 Keyframe Control Block In the keyframe control block you can carry out effect editing and execution a EDIT ENBL edit enable button Press this button turning it on to enable effect editing operations with the keyframe control block STOP NEXT KF NORM REV NORM REV EFF LOOP EDIT ENBL KF DUR DELAY EFF DUR COPY PASTE DEL SHIFT INS PREV KF NEXT KF MOD UNDO CONST DUR KF LOOP GO TO TC AUTO INS PAUS...

Page 76: ...range of keyframes during macro editing the specified range of events INS insert When this button is pressed a new keyframe is inserted after the current keyframe Pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT button inserts a new keyframe before the current keyframe During macro editing pressing this button registers an event after the current event MOD modify When this button is pressed the s...

Page 77: ... on to include a pause event in the macro The pause length can be set in the numeric keypad control block g Effect execution section RUN When this button is pressed the effect is run from the first keyframe to the last keyframe However if a pause is set on a keyframe the effect stops at that point Press this button again to resume execution and continue to the next pause point or the end of the ef...

Page 78: ... EFF effect Press to save or recall an effect SNAPSHOT Press to save or recall a snapshot SHOTBOX Press to save or recall a shotbox MCRO macro Press to save recall or edit a macro TRANS RATE transition rate Press to set the transition rate Hold down this button and press one of the key delegation buttons KEY1 to KEY4 in the transition control block to set an independent key transition rate EFF M E...

Page 79: ...a to a register hold down this button and press the UNDO button to return the register to the state before the data was saved TC timecode Press this button turning it on to switch transition rate entry to the timecode entry mode STORE Press this button to switch to the mode for saving a snapshot effect shotbox or macro in a register RCALL recall Press this button to switch to the mode for recallin...

Page 80: ... PVW M E 2 PVW M E 3 PVW P P PVW of the M E or PGM PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus M E1 K to M E3 K P P K M E1 to M E 3 P P key preview The key preview signal M E 1 K PVW M E 2 K PVW M E 3 K PVW P P K PVW of the M E or PGM PST bank corresponding to the pressed button is selected on the edit preview bus DME V DME monitor video When this button is pre...

Page 81: ...uttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to select the bus to which to assign the cross point buttons in the auxiliary bus control block For buses that can be selected see Bus Selection page 142 LEVEL 1 DEST SHIFT RTR 2ND KEY XPT HOLD XPT HOLD M E 1 M E 1 LEVEL 2 M E 2 M E 2 LEVEL 3 M E 3 M E 3 LEVEL 4 PGM SHIFT PGM SHIFT DME 3K DME 4V DME 4K FMS 1 FMS 2 EDIT PVW 1 AUX delegation buttons 2 ...

Page 82: ...n a 32 button system the cross point buttons switch to the shifted allocation while the SHIFT button is enabled f XPT HOLD cross point hold buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to enable cross point hold g KEY button While this button is held down you can use the cross point row of buttons to select key signals h 2ND button After selecting a bus with an AUX delegation button hold down ...

Page 83: ...a different destination to a source selection button in the 2nd row it lights green b Selected source name displays These show the source name selected for the destination If the source names and destination names are set in the Setup menu to SW er Local LEVEL 1 DEST SHIFT RTR 2ND KEY XPT HOLD XPT HOLD M E 1 M E 1 LEVEL 2 M E 2 M E 2 LEVEL 3 M E 3 M E 3 LEVEL 4 PGM SHIFT PGM SHIFT DME 3K DME 4V DM...

Page 84: ...itch to the shifted source selection buttons By using the KEY button you can expand the source selection as follows f XPT HOLD cross point hold buttons Not used in router control mode g KEY button When this button is enabled by a setting in the Setup menu by holding it down during a source selection you can expand the function of the SHIFT button See Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter...

Page 85: ...o those S Bus levels Menu Control Block a Top menu selection buttons These select the menu appearing in the menu display It is also possible to change the assignment of these buttons in setup For details see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 19 Volume 3 M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P FRAME MEM COLOR BKGD AUX MON COPY SWAP MISC DME GLB EFF RTR DEV KEY FRAME SHOT BOX SNAP SHOT EFF MCRO FI...

Page 86: ... 8 button When this button is on control of an editor from the Remote1 port on the rear panel of the switcher is possible However even when it is off control of the Edit PVW bus is always possible Memory Card USB Adaptor Block a Memory card slot This slot accepts a PCMCIA Type II compliant memory card You can use it in software installation and for saving and reading in data such as snapshot keyfr...

Page 87: ...t item Memory Sticks for more information about the usable Memory Sticks and their handling c DEVICE connectors There are three USB connectors You can connect a device such as a mouse keyboard USB storage and so on that is equipped with a USB interface to any of these connectors For details on the devices that can be connected consult your Sony representative About Memory Sticks Usable Memory Stic...

Page 88: ... be removed resulting in a serious accident Handling Memory Sticks When using Memory Sticks pay attention to the following points Do not touch the connector of the Memory Stick with anything including your finger or metallic objects Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to the Memory Stick labeling position Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the labeling position ...

Page 89: ...ction name appears Pressing the button executes the allocated function When the function constitutes a switching on off operation the button lights green otherwise it only momentarily lights green When a shotbox register or macro register recall is assigned to a button the button lights orange and the assigned register name appears If the register is empty the button goes off In the case of a shot...

Page 90: ...cks are also referred to as simple transitions in this User s guide KEY1 NORM REV REV KEY2 LIMIT SET PTN LIMIT TAKE WIPE DME SNAP SHOT UNDO MIX NAM WIPE DME ON OVER ON OVER 1 2 3 4 5 6 XPT HOLD A B U1 U2 1 2 3 4 7 8 2 Key transition selection buttons 6 Key status display 1 Transition type selection buttons 3 Transition execution section 5 Pattern limit buttons 4 Wipe direction selection buttons qa...

Page 91: ...e 3 two or more of the following buttons may light You can also assign a function to these buttons to select whether or not the fader levers are used as key frame faders MIX In a background transition the new video fades in as the current video fades out During the transition the overall signal level is maintained at 100 In a key transition the key fades in for insertion or out for removal NAM non...

Page 92: ...rol block goes off c Transition execution section Fader lever Move this vertically to carry out a transition When the KF button or a transition type selection button to which the KF button function has been assigned is lit you can use this as a key frame fader When the split fader function is enabled by pressing the projection on the left side of the grip you can release the lock and separate the ...

Page 93: ...ination with the buttons of the memory recall section h Memory recall section This consists of eight buttons with LCDs whose display changes according to the operation mode Use these in combination with the mode selection buttons to save or recall wipe snapshots DME wipe snapshots or snapshots i UNDO button After recalling a register press this button to return to the state before recalling the re...

Page 94: ...on type selection buttons Press one of the following buttons turning it on to select the independent key transition type MIX Faded in or out WIPE Inserted or deleted with a wipe DME Switches the key with a DME wipe CUT Inserted or deleted instantaneously SHIFT This has the following functions When setting is made in the Setup menu to allow a different transition type for inserting or deleting a ke...

Page 95: ...ton This inserts or deletes key 3 instantaneously When key 3 is present in the final program output from the switcher this lights red and otherwise lights amber TAKE button This carries out an auto transition on key 3 c K SS key snapshot button This enables key snapshot mode In key snapshot mode it is possible to save and recall key snapshots d Key source name display key snapshot buttons These sh...

Page 96: ...ey bus b Independent key transition type selection buttons Press one of these buttons turning it on to select the downstream key transition type MIX Carry out a dissolve with the key selected with the key delegation buttons WIPE Carry out a wipe with the key selected with the key delegation buttons DME This switches the key selected with the key delegation buttons using a DME wipe CUT Instantaneou...

Page 97: ...and 4 from left to right press to execute an auto transition The transition starts immediately and the button lights amber When the transition completes the button goes off Fader lever Move this to carry out a manual downstream key transition Transition indicator This comprises multiple LEDs which show the progress of the downstream key transition d Key snapshot setting buttons K SS key snapshot T...

Page 98: ...4 in the P P cross point control block goes off b Independent key transition execution section DSK1 ON DSK2 ON buttons Press these to cut in the corresponding downstream key 1 or 2 When the key is already inserted pressing the button cuts it out Each button lights red when the corresponding key is inserted in the program output final output from the switcher and lights amber at other times AUTO TR...

Page 99: ...ransition rate in the menu f AUTO button When this button is pressed the M E or PGM PST bank preview signal selected on the edit preview bus is automatically switched to the program signal depending on the on air status g Preview selection buttons Press one of these buttons to select a signal on the edit preview bus Each button can be assigned to any preview output in setup see Overall Control Pan...

Page 100: ... to make the next transition insert or remove the corresponding key keys 1 to 4 If a key is currently inserted it will be removed and if it is not currently inserted it will be inserted In the PGM PST bank this inserts or removes downstream keys 1 to 4 KEY PRIOR priority When this button is lit the setting of the key priority after KEY1 TRANS KEY2 TRANS KEY3 TRANS KEY4 TRANS BKGD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KE...

Page 101: ...ideo is maintained at 100 SUPER MIX The current video is maintained at 100 output for the first half of the transition as the new video is mixed while increasing progressively to 100 The current video is then progressively reduced from 100 to zero in the second half while the new video is maintained at 100 PST preset COLOR MIX In the first transition the current video is replaced by the color matt...

Page 102: ...de every time this button is pressed f Key status display For each of keys 1 to 4 the corresponding ON indicator lights when the key is inserted It also shows the priority 1 to 4 of each key g PRIOR priority SET button While this button is held down you can set the key priority The setting mode when this button is pressed depends on whether or not the KEY PRIOR button is lit as follows When the KE...

Page 103: ... Block page 53 and Cross Point Control Block CCP 6224 6324 in the AUX Operating Mode page 105 For operations in AUX control mode see Auxiliary Bus Control Block for AUX Buses page 81 b Transition control block compact type For details of operations see Transition Control Block Compact Type page 100 c Device control block track ball For details of operations see Device Control Block Trackball page ...

Page 104: ...ock For details of operations see Cross Point Control Block page 53 and CCP 6224 2M E Control Panel page 103 b Transition control block compact type For details of operations see Transition Control Block Compact Type page 100 c Device control block track ball For details of operations see Device Control Block Trackball page 68 d Multifunction Flexi Pad control block For details of operations see M...

Page 105: ...key 1 row used as AUX delegation buttons and the key 2 row used as AUX bus cross point selection buttons with the source name display showing the source names or the bus names AUX panel less function To use this function the function for switching to AUX control mode must first be assigned to the PRE MCRO and POST MCRO buttons For the method of making this assignment see Chapter 19 Control Panel S...

Page 106: ...he reverse side of the video b AUX CTRL AUX control button This switches the cross point control block to the AUX operating mode However using this function requires an assignment to have been made in the Setup menu For details of assigning the function for switching to AUX operating mode see Assigning the AUX Bus Control Mode Switching Function in Chapter 19 Volume 3 c DEST destination button Whe...

Page 107: ...this to carry out macro creation editing execution deletion WIPE wipe snapshot Press this to carry out wipe snapshot creation recall deletion and wipe adjustments DME WIPE DME wipe snapshot Press this to carry out DME wipe snapshot creation recall deletion and DME wipe adjustments TRANS RATE transition rate Press this to set the transition rate KEY ADJ key adjust Press this to carry out key adjust...

Page 108: ...E 1 M E 2 and PGM PST regions respectively USER4 Selects the USER4 region DEV1 Selects the device 1 region MORE Displays buttons in the memory recall section for regions not assigned to a region selection button so that they can be selected By default the following regions are shown on the memory recall section buttons MSTR master snapshot master timeline registers USER1 to 3 USER5 to 8 MCRO macro...

Page 109: ...r wipes are made in menus There are also menus for carrying out general system control managing setting data and initial setup About the Top Menu List When the control panel is powered on the top menu list appears as shown below You can also display this by selecting VF1 Top Menu List after pressing the HOME button at the upper left in the top menu selection button area of the menu control block T...

Page 110: ...Enter button For details of the VF buttons and HF buttons see Interpreting the Menu Screen page 119 Menus accessed from a top menu selection button Buttons Menus Function See HOME Home Recalling menus using the top menu list or shortcut menu Top menu list page 109 Shortcut menu page 133 M E 1 M E 1 Transition keys and wipe settings for the M E 1 bank page 162 transitions page 203 keys page 267 wip...

Page 111: ...pter 13 Volume 2 EFF Effect Keyframe effect register settings Chapter 13 Volume 2 SNAP SHOT Snapshot Snapshot register settings Chapter 14 Volume 2 SHOTBOX Shotbox Shotbox register settings Chapter 15 Volume 2 FILE File File settings Chapter 17 Volume 2 ENG SETUP Engineering Setup Setup functions Chapter 18 to Chapter 24 Volume 3 DIAG Diagnosis Status information display Appendix Volume 3 Buttons ...

Page 112: ...ET M E 1 2 3 PGM PST Misc Key Priority page 159 KEY PRIOR M E 1 2 3 PGM PST Misc Next Key Priority page 160 WIPE Independent key transition type selection button standard type M E 1 2 3 Key1 2 3 4 Transition Wipe Adjust Pattern Select PGM PST DSK1 2 3 4 Transition Wipe Adjust Pattern Select page 293 DME Independent key transition type selection button standard type M E 1 2 3 Key1 2 3 4 Transition ...

Page 113: ...Wipe XX page 323 SNAPSHOT Snapshot Snapshot XX Chapter 14 Volume 2 EFF Effect Effect 1 99 XX Chapter 13 Volume 2 SHOTBOX Shotbox Register Store Recall Chapter 15 Volume 2 MCRO Macro Register XX Chapter 16 Volume 2 Key control block a Buttons Menus See KEY1 M E 1 2 3 Key1 XX PGM PST DSK1 XX page 209 KEY2 M E 1 2 3 Key2 XX PGM PST DSK2 XX KEY3 M E 1 2 3 Key3 XX PGM PST DSK3 XX KEY4 M E 1 2 3 Key4 XX...

Page 114: ...re c Chapter 13 Volume 2 SNAPSHOT Snapshot Snapshot XX b Snapshot Master Snapshot Store c Chapter 14 Volume 2 SHOTBOX Shotbox Register Store Recall Chapter 15 Volume 2 MCRO Macro Register XX Chapter 16 Volume 2 TRANS RATE a Misc Transition page 172 STORE RCALL Key Frame Region Select d Chapter 13 Volume 2 Downstream key control block a Buttons Menus See DSK1 M E 1 2 3 Key1 XX PGM PST DSK1 XX page ...

Page 115: ...lor Bkgd1 page 398 Color Bkgd2 signal assigned button Color Bkgd Color Bkgd2 CCR1 signal assigned button CCR CCR1 XX Chapter 19 Volume 3 CCR2 signal assigned button CCR CCR2 XX Device control block trackball or joystick Buttons Menus See DME1 to DME8 a DME XX Chapter 11 Volume 2 DEV1 to DEV12 assigned buttons Device DDR VTR Cueup Play b Device DDR VTR Timeline c Chapter 12 Volume 2 FM1CLIP to FM8C...

Page 116: ...lume 2 MCRO a Macro Register XX Chapter 16 Volume 2 Multifunction Flexi Pad conrol block Buttons Menus See WIPE M E 1 2 3 PGM PST Wipe Main Pattern page 267 DME WIPE M E 1 2 3 PGM PST DME Wipe xxx a page 323 SNAPSHOT When the MSTR button is On Snapshot Master Snapshot Store Chapter 14 Volume 2 When the MSTR button is Off Snapshot Snapshot xxx a EFF When the MSTR button is On Effect Master Timeline...

Page 117: ...TN M E 1 Key1 2 3 4 Type page 210 M E 1 Key1 2 3 4 Type M E 2 Key1 2 3 4 Type M E 3 Key1 2 3 4 Type PGM PST DSK1 2 3 4 Type CRK M E 1 Key1 2 3 4 Type Chroma Adjust page 212 M E 2 Key1 2 3 4 Type Chroma Adjust M E 3 Key1 2 3 4 Type Chroma Adjust PGM PST DSK1 2 3 4 Type Chroma Adjust KEY SS KEY1 M E1 2 3 Key1 xxx a PGM PST DSK1 xxx a page 209 KEY2 M E1 2 3 Key2 xxx a PGM PST DSK2 xxx a KEY3 M E1 2 3...

Page 118: ...nu screen to display the top menu window then enter the page number of the M E 1 Key1 Type menu which is 1111 and press the Enter button For details of the menu page numbers see Menu Tree page 467 The M E 1 Key1 Type menu appears in the menu display as follows M E 1 Key1 Type menu 2 Menu page number button 1 Menu title button 6 Function button area 7 Parameter group button 8 Knob parameter buttons...

Page 119: ...dications change Depending on the function if any one is on the status is shown by an orange bar as in the following figure e Status area This shows the status of the settings items controlled by the selected menu An orange frame appears around the parameter area relating to the displayed menu For each of the twelve areas pressing the display jumps to the related menu f Function button area This s...

Page 120: ...only appears in those menus for which the default recall function is available See Menus allowing a return to default settings page 122 Press this button turning it on then press a VF button or knob parameter button to return the settings to their default values in the following groupings Function grouping the functions within an HF menu under the VF button Knob parameters parameters currently con...

Page 121: ...nob 1 to 5 corresponding to the parameter to adjust the value Press the knob parameter buttons 1 to 5 corresponding to the parameter This displays the numeric keypad window allowing you to enter the desired value In the description of specific setting procedures the knob adjustment is described as follows Example When wipe pattern key is selected When the MENU button in the device control block is...

Page 122: ...ault state This returns the knob parameter value to the default state and the Default Recall button goes off Notes In the following table Menus allowing a return to default settings the default recall function does not apply to some knob parameters For details see the table Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply on page 124 The default recall function does not return the horizontal...

Page 123: ...0 series DME Wipe a VF7 1370 series Misc a P P VF1 1410 series DSK1 a VF2 1420 series DSK2 a VF3 1430 series DSK3 a VF4 1440 series DSK4 a VF5 1450 series Wipe a VF6 1460 series DME Wipe a VF7 1470 series Misc a COLOR BKGD VF1 2210 Color Bkgd 1 a VF2 2220 Color Bkgd 2 a CCR VF1 2410 series CCR1 a VF2 2420 series CCR2 a FRAME MEM VF1 2510 series Still b VF2 2520 series Clip b VF3 2530 series Reposi...

Page 124: ... Input Output b VF7 4170 series Enhanced Video Modify b GLB EFF VF1 4210 series Ch1 Ch4 b VF2 4220 series Ch5 Ch8 b KEY FRAME HF3 6113 Path b Top menu selection button name VF number HF number Menu number Menu name Knob parameters to which default recall does not apply Menu number a Menu name Button name Knob Parameter 1111 Type Luminance and Linear in Key Type group 4 Filter Color Vector in Key T...

Page 125: ...5 Transition Rate Pattern 1116 1 Transition Wipe Adjust Multi 3 Invert Type H and V in Pairing group 1 Width H V and Fringe in Modulation group 4 Shape 1154 Edge Direction Split in Edge group 1 Split No 1154 1 Edge Direction Matte Adjust Mix Color in Edge Matte group 3 Pattern Multi 3 Invert Type 1155 Main Modify H and V in Pairing group 1 Width H V and Fringe in Modulation group 4 Shape 1164 Edge...

Page 126: ...ple Mark in the Auto group 1 2 Position H Position V 1112 1 a Edge Matte Adjust Position 1113 a Main Mask Position 1116 1 a Transition Wipe Adjust Position 1116 3 a Transition DME Wipe Adjust Position 1 2 H V 1154 1 a Edge Direction Matte Adjust Position 1 2 Position H Position V 1155 a Main Modify Position in the Position group 1155 1 a Main Modify Multi Adjust Position 1156 a Sub Modify Position...

Page 127: ...indow by whick you can input the desired value To scroll a list Position the cursor over the list you want to scroll and turn the mouse wheel In the setup menus you can select the direction of mouse wheel rotation that increases the setting value And you can also switch the functions of the right and left mouse buttons For details see Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup Panel Volume 3 Numeric keypad wi...

Page 128: ...n This clears the input It does not change the parameter setting h Trim button After entering the difference from the current value press this button to confirm the numeric input i Enter button This confirms the entered value If correctly set the numeric keypad window closes If not correctly set the input display changes color Keyboard window Note Except when changing source names the following ch...

Page 129: ...e You can enter items to be displayed on the control panel LCD using lowercase letters but these will be converted to capitals for display MS DOS does not distinguish case in filenames and therefore you are recommended to enter filenames in capital letters f Shift button This selects the characters on the shift side of the keys The shift is released when you enter a character g Space button This e...

Page 130: ...nd closes the keyboard window if the value has been entered correctly If the value has not been entered correctly the display color changes m Line feed button After pressing the Shift button press this button to feed a line The input string shows Function of the top menu window a Top menu selection buttons These are the same as the top menu selection buttons in the menu control block Pressing one ...

Page 131: ... down button Shuts down the menus Note Be sure to shut down the menus before powering off the control panel Shutting down the menus 1 In the menu screen press the menu page number button to open the top menu window Fordetails ofthe topmenu window see Function of the top menu window page 130 2 Press Shut down A confirmation message appears 3 Press Yes This shuts down the menu system after a while a...

Page 132: ...ss a color palette button with this button held down the color is used as the source for copying Next press a different color palette button to copy to that button Swap If you press two color palette buttons in sequence with this button held down the two colors are swapped Default If you press any color palette button with this button held down the color palette button is set to the default color ...

Page 133: ... user preference button To switch to the subsidiary menu site press this button turning it on For details of the assignment operation see Assigning Functions to the Menu Control Block Top Menu and User Preference buttons in Chapter 19 Volume 3 Shortcut Menu Recalling a menu using the shortcut menu 1 In the Home menu select VF2 Favorites and HF1 Shortcut The following menu appears 2 In the Group Se...

Page 134: ...tings To delete menu group settings 1 In the Home Favorites Group Edit menu select the group to be deleted 2 Press Clear A confirmation message appears 3 Press Yes This deletes the settings To register a menu on a button You can register 15 buttons in one group 1 In the Home Favorites Shortcut menu press Button Edit 2 Move the cursor to the position where you want to display the button To change t...

Page 135: ...enu To copy button settings 1 In the Home Favorites Button Edit menu press the copy source button to select it 2 Press Copy 3 Press the copy destination button to select it 4 Press Paste This copies the button settings To delete button settings In the Home Favorites Button Edit menu press Clear This deletes the button settings Note The shortcut menu settings are handled as part of the control pane...

Page 136: ...136 Basic Menu Operations Chapter 2 Menus and Control Panel ...

Page 137: ...u Operation 159 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority 161 Selecting the Transition Type by a Menu Operation 162 Super Mix Settings 163 Color Matte Settings 164 Executing a Transition 167 Transition Indicator Function 167 Setting the Transition Rate 168 Pattern Limit 173 Executing an Auto Transition 176 Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever Manual Transition 177 Combinations of Au...

Page 138: ...e to Black Operation 193 Setting the Fade to Black Transition Rate 194 Simple Transition 195 Basic Operations for Simple Transitions 195 Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority 197 Split Fader 198 Independent Key Transitions With a Simple Transition Module 198 ...

Page 139: ...Processing Flow The switch from the current video stream appearing on the corresponding program monitor to a new video stream is referred to as a transition The following illustration shows the flow of operations for carrying out a transition on an M E bank or the PGM PST bank ...

Page 140: ... 201 Keys 1 to 4 Select new background video page 141 Select transition type page 151 Select current background video page 141 Background Cut Mix Super mix Preset color mix Wipe DME wipe Make wipe settings page 267 Make DME wipe settings page 323 Preview the effect of transition page 181 Execute the transition page 167 NAM ...

Page 141: ... each cross point row may be 16 24 or 32 but here the description is of the 32 button case as an example Cross point control block M E 1 M E 1 SHIFT SHIFT XPT HOLD XPT HOLD MCRO ENBL KEY3 KEY4 MCRO ASGN XPT HOLD XPT HOLD AUTO RUN UTIL M E 1 M E 1 M E 2 M E 2 M E 2 M E 2 M E 3 M E 3 M E 3 M E 3 SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT Source name displays Key 2 row Key 1 row Reentry buttons KEY4 button KEY3 button Cross ...

Page 142: ... M E3 and PGM in the cross point control block of the destination bank For example to feed the output from the M E 1 bank as the background B input to M E 2 in the M E 2 cross point control block press the M E1 button in the background B row Bus Selection Each row of 32 cross point buttons is shared by multiple buses For example in the M E 1 bank the key 1 row of buttons can be assigned either to ...

Page 143: ...gram bus a Program row Preset bus a Preset row DSK 1 bus DSK1 row Turn off the DSK3 button DSK 2 bus DSK2 row Turn off the DSK4 button DSK 3 bus DSK1 row Turn on the DSK3 button DSK 4 bus DSK2 row Turn on the DSK4 button M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST Utility 1 bus Background A row When UTIL button mode is Hold hold down the UTIL button Utility 2 bus Background B row DME external video bus Key 1 row Ho...

Page 144: ...Y 1 and M E 2 UTILITY 2 buses M E 3 UTILITY 1 and M E 3 UTILITY 2 buses P P UTILITY 1 and P P UTILITY 2 buses M E 1 Key 1 fill to M E 1 Key 4 fill buses M E 1 Key 1 source to M E 1 Key 4 source buses M E 2 Key 1 fill to M E 2 Key 4 fill buses M E 2 Key 1 source to M E 2 Key 4 source buses M E 3 Key 1 fill to M E 3 Key 4 fill buses M E 3 Key 1 source to M E 3 Key 4 source buses DSK 1 fill to DSK 4 ...

Page 145: ...e is not available When set to Dual M E Assign When M E Config is set to DSK AUX Panel less Function When using 24 column cross point control blocks for the CCP 6224 CCP 6324 Control Panel you can use the key 1 and key 2 rows as the auxiliary bus control block This is called the panel less function Preparations Assign the function for switching to the AUX control mode to the PRE MCRO and POST MCRO...

Page 146: ...Chapter 19 Volume 3 Cross point button control block button numbers On each M E bank and the PGM PST bank each cross point button and reentry button has two button numbers and you use the shift button to switch between these numbers In the case of a 32 button layout the button numbers are as follows Switching button numbers The rightmost 32nd button functions as a shift button M E 1 M E 1 SHIFT XP...

Page 147: ...an be assigned to the 1st row buttons and 2nd row buttons When the 32nd button is set as a shift button the 1st row buttons and 2nd row buttons both have the following button numbers LEVEL 1 DEST SHIFT RTR 2ND KEY XPT HOLD XPT HOLD M E 1 M E 1 LEVEL 2 MCRO 1 M E 2 M E 2 LEVEL 3 MCRO 2 M E 3 M E 3 LEVEL 4 MCRO 3 P P P P EDIT PVW AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 AUX 9 AUX 10 AUX 11 AU...

Page 148: ...l block when using the CCP 8000 and the cross point buttons in each switcher bank However when using the CCP 6224 6324 buses may be assigned with the cross point button rows for keys 1 and 2 as the auxiliary bus control block For example if you make the setting for one cross point button in a switcher bank this inhibits operation of all cross point buttons with the same number in the following bus...

Page 149: ...rol mode or AUX bus control block of the CCP 8000 and the bank and signal are set to be linked to the audio mixer then the program output of the audio mixer follows the signal selection For details of the setting see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign menu in Chapter 19 Volume 3 Notes For details of audio mixers that can be connected contact your Sony service or sales representative When the signal i...

Page 150: ...he key 1 row as AUX delegation buttons and the key 2 row as AUX bus cross point selection buttons the source name displays show the bus names and source names Colors of lit cross point buttons In a particular row of cross point buttons only the last pressed button is effective and lights amber or red The amber indicates the low tally state and the red indicates the high tally state to indicate whe...

Page 151: ...nsition Operation page 154 The following are the transition types Mix This is a dissolve in which the new video progressively fades in over the current video with the sum of the two video outputs maintained constant At the mid point of the transition when the fader lever is in the center position the output of each is 50 This transition type can also be selected for an independent key transition I...

Page 152: ...sitions the first a dissolve to a color matte and the second from the color matte to the new video In the first transition the current video is replaced by the color matte in a mix dissolve then in the second transition the color matte is replaced by the new video also in a mix dissolve For details on color matte settings see page 164 Note This transition type is not available for an independent k...

Page 153: ...ti Format DME Processor For details see DME Wipes page 35 and Chapter 6 DME Wipes page 311 Clip transitions Linked to a mix dissolve or wipe transition a frame memory clip movie is played back Cut A cut switches instantaneously from the current video to the new video When the next transition is a key transition the key cuts in or out instantaneously ...

Page 154: ...on To insert or delete a key Press one of the KEY1 to KEY4 buttons or DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank turning it on To enable the key priority setting which determines the key overlay order after the transition Press the KEY PRIOR button turning it on You can press more than one button at the same time To change the keys and background presets in Setup menus simultaneously Press the ALL b...

Page 155: ...e MIX NAM SUPER MIX and PST COLOR MIX buttons turning it on To carry out a wipe Press the WIPE or DME button turning it on To carry out a transition while playing back a frame memory clip Press one of the buttons corresponding to the clip to be used FM1 2CLIP FM3 4CLIP FM5 6CLIP and FM7 8CLIP You can also use the Misc Transition menu to select a desired transition type for the M E or PGM PST bank ...

Page 156: ...ecuting a Transition page 167 Transition linked to the audio mixer If the video signal selected in the background B row is linked to the audio mixer in setup then the audio mixer sound changes with the transition That is pressing the AUTO TRANS button gives a cross fade and pressing the CUT button gives an instantaneous sound switch For details of setup see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in ...

Page 157: ...rity in the new video The key priority values go from 1 to 4 with a higher priority key being in front as seen on the screen Priority sequence on the screen There are two ways of setting the priority either using the PRIOR SET button in the transition control block or using the Misc menu to access the Key Priority menu for the M E or PGM PST bank Note When the operating mode is set to multi progra...

Page 158: ...press the one of the next transition selection buttons KEY1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank for the key to appear on top The selected key now appears on top on the program monitor The priority of keys other than the selected one does not change To change the priority of more than one key repeat this operation as required BKGD KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 KEY PRIOR MIX ALL PST COLOR MIX NAM...

Page 159: ...he next transition selection buttons KEY1 to KEY4 DSK1 to DSK4 buttons in the PGM PST bank for the key you want to bring to the front after the transition To set the priority to be the same as before the transition press the BKGD button Note The BKGD button is only effective when in the mode for changing the key priority for after the transition When the next transition selection button KEY PRIOR ...

Page 160: ... monitor Changing the key priority for after the transition 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF4 Next Key Priority The Next Key Priority menu appears 2 For each of Priority1 Priority2 Priority3 and Priority4 select a key to determine the key priority sequence For details of the key priority sequence see the figure shown for step 2 in the previous item see page 160 The keys a...

Page 161: ... The topmost key as seen on the program monitor is priority 1 and the keys underneath are numbered 2 3 4 away from the viewer see page 160 To display the key priority for after the transition press the KEY PRIOR button in the transition control block turning it on For keys for which the priority after the transition is different from the current priority the corresponding numerals 1 to 4 flash For...

Page 162: ...appears 2 Select the required transition type in the Transition Type group The parameter settings can now be adjusted with the knobs according to the selected transition type For details see the following Super Mix Settings page 163 Color Matte Settings page 164 Setting the Transition Rate page 168 Note When multi program mode is selected in the Setup menu see Settings for Switcher Configuration C...

Page 163: ... Note This transition type is not available for an independent key transition 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 Select Super Mix in the Transition Type group 3 Turn the knobs to adjust the output levels Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 A Gain Background A output level 0 00 to 100 00 3 B Gain Background B output level 0 00...

Page 164: ...e mode and one time mode You can make a setting such that a preset color mix is carried out in a single transition This is called one stroke mode When the bus fixed mode is selected with a Setup menu setting a preset color mix is always carried out in the one stroke mode You can also make a setting such that when a preset color mix is completed the next transition switches to the previous transiti...

Page 165: ...e M E or PGM PST menu select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 Select Preset Color Mix in the Transition Type group 3 In the Preset Color Mix Fill group select one of the following Flat Color monochrome color matte Utility 2 Bus signal selected on the utility 2 bus 4 When Flat Color is selected turn the knobs to adjust the color matte Key fades out Key When a key is ...

Page 166: ...166 Color Matte Settings Chapter 3 Signal Selection and Transitions 3 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 4 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values ...

Page 167: ...ng common transitions with independent key transitions different transition types can be applied to the background and keys for example allowing a key wipe combined with a background dissolve When the audio mixer is linked in setup you can carry out an auto transition and also switch the sound with the audio mixer See Transition linked to the audio mixer page 156 Transition Indicator Function In e...

Page 168: ...on type it is not possible to set the transition rate Frame input mode and timecode input mode For numeric input of the transition rate value there are two modes frame input mode and timecode input mode You select one of these modes using either the Flexi Pad control block page 170 Multifunction Flexi Pad control block or the numeric keypad control block page 170 Frame input mode The entered value...

Page 169: ...s the last digit is not shown Example A value of 9 seconds 23 frames appears as 9 23 and a value of 10 seconds 1 frame appears as 10 0 Setting the transition rate in the Flexi Pad control block Note In the PGM PST bank or when using a simple type transition control block you cannot use the Flexi Pad control block to set the transition rate 1 In the M E bank Flexi Pad control block press the TRANS ...

Page 170: ...eypad control block 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the TRANS RATE button 2 Press the region selection button for the M E or PGM PST bank for which you want to set the transition rate turning it on The numeric keypad control block display now shows the selected region name and the current transition rate setting for the region 3 With the numeric keypad enter the transition rate EFF M E...

Page 171: ...M E or PGM PST also shows the setting To enter a difference from the current value After pressing the button enter the difference and press the TRIM button To change the sign or press the button Setting the transition rate in the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block 1 In the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block press the TRANS RATE button The button displays in the memory recall section change a...

Page 172: ...set with the memory recall section button If required press the TC button to switch the input mode frame count input or timecode input Enter a value of up to three digits To cancel the input press any of the mode selection buttons 6 Press the ENTR button Setting the transition rate by a menu operation 1 In the switcher bank select first VF7 Misc then HF1 Transition The Transition menu appears 2 Se...

Page 173: ...fect at the end of the transition is the same as when the fader lever is at the center position in the normal case with the pattern limit function disabled the wipe pattern does not complete When the limit value is set to 0 the wipe effect is completely disabled and carrying out the transition produces no change in the image When the limit value is set to the maximum 100 the image changes in exact...

Page 174: ...nt fader lever position as the pattern limit Setting the pattern limit by a menu operation 1 When a wipe is selected as the transition type in the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF5 Wipe then HF4 Edge Direction When a DME wipe is selected as the transition type in the M E or PGM PST menu select first VF6 DME Wipe then HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears 2 Press the Pattern Limit b...

Page 175: ... pattern limit To cancel the pattern limit after completion of step 3 in the previous procedure press the PTN LIMIT button turning it off If after carrying out step 2 in the previous procedure the pattern limit has been reached carry out the following procedure 1 Press the PTN LIMIT button The button you pressed lights green 2 Carry out the transition The PTN LIMIT button goes off and the pattern ...

Page 176: ...e pattern limit is released 1 In the Pattern Limit Release group of the Edge Direction menu select one of the following Auto Trans Rate Use the transition rate set in the transition rate control block Independ Trans Rate Independent transition rate 2 If you selected Independ Trans Rate in step 1 adjust the following parameter Executing an Auto Transition The following two modes can be used for aut...

Page 177: ... a partially executed transition instantaneously Press the CUT button The AUTO TRANS button goes off Executing a Transition With the Fader Lever Manual Transition Using the fader lever you can manually control the progress of the transition Moving the fader lever from one end of its travel to the other completes the transition To execute a manual transition with the transition control block fader ...

Page 178: ...lete the transition Press the AUTO TRANS button to complete the rest of the transition at the preset transition rate If the transition rate is set to 100 frames and the fader lever has moved through 1 4 of the transition then the remaining 3 4 of the transition is carried out in 100 frames Non Sync State If the fader lever is in an intermediate position when a transition is completed as an auto tr...

Page 179: ...T bank Normally when a background transition is carried out on an M E bank the signals selected on the A and B rows of cross point buttons are interchanged at the end of the transition That is to say except during a transition the background output is always from the background A bus This is called flip flop mode The alternative is known as bus fixed mode in which there is no bus interchange In th...

Page 180: ...he same direction complying with the above table If as a result of an auto transition for example the fader lever position does not agree with the signal output this is a non sync state see page 178 and LEDs light at both end positions of the fader lever travel Moving the fader lever does not carry out a transition but when the fader lever reaches the end position the non sync state is released an...

Page 181: ... or CUT button On the preview monitor you can check the effect of the transition To terminate a transition preview There are three modes for a transition preview To terminate a transition preview carry out the operation which depends on the mode and press the TRANS PVW button turning it off Lock Toggling the TRANS PVW button on and off switches between the transition preview mode and the normal mo...

Page 182: ...tion whether executed with the AUTO TRANS button or the fader lever it is not possible to press the TRANS PVW button In bus fixed mode see page 179 transition previews are not available When using the simple type transition control block see page 195 transition previews are not available ...

Page 183: ...nsitions with independent key transitions When you set a common transition and a key independent transition for the same key you can apply two different effects such as a wipe and mix dissolve see page 151 to the key simultaneously When carrying out such a combination of transitions simultaneously on a key as auto transitions see page 176 the result depends on the timing of pressing the respective...

Page 184: ...with a time offset the following is the result Note that in both cases the common transition is a wipe and the independent key transition is a mix dissolve Time offset execution with the key inserted With the key inserted it is deleted with the two transitions acting with a time offset Whichever button is pressed first when the common transition completes even if the independent key transition is ...

Page 185: ...ter the key is deleted When the key is completely deleted both transitions complete Time offset execution with the key not inserted Common transition wipe start Independent key transition mix start The key is deleted even if the independent key transition has not completed Common transition wipe start Independent key transition mix start The transition completes with the key deleted Example 1 When...

Page 186: ...PE button turning it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern Press the DME button turning it on If in the Setup menus you set insertion and deletion as independent modes make the settings for the next transition in the independent key transition control block Separate settings are required both when inserting a key and when deleting it For example with the key not inserted ...

Page 187: ... the AUTO TRANS button For details of the transition rate see Setting the Independent Key Transition Rate page 189 For details of operation together with a common transition see Combining other transitions with independent key transitions page 183 To cut the key in or out instantaneously Press the KEY ON button on the keyer Notes In an independent key transition the pattern limit function is not a...

Page 188: ...ils of setting the transition rate see Setting the transition rate in the Flexi Pad control block page 169 Setting the Independent Key Transition Type by a Menu Operation You can also select the required independent key transition type by a menu operation 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first the desired one from VF1 Key1 to VF4 Key4 then HF6 Transition The Transition menu for the selected app...

Page 189: ...ate transition rates for inserting or deleting a key you can set both rates independently For example with the system in the state with the key not inserted the transition rate setting applies to key insertion Setting the independent key transition rate in the Flexi Pad control block Note In the PGM PST bank or when using a simple type transition control block you cannot use the Flexi Pad control ...

Page 190: ...n rate set for the region 2 With the numeric keypad enter the transition rate Enter a value of up to three digits To clear the entry value press the CLR button For details of frame input mode and timecode input mode see page 168 3 Press the ENTER button This confirms the entry and the selected region name and the set transition rate appear in the numeric keypad control block display To enter a dif...

Page 191: ...uttons 6 Press the ENTR button Setting the independent key transition rate by a menu operation 1 In the M E or PGM PST menu select first the desired one from VF1 Key1 to VF4 Key4 then HF6 Transition The Transition menu for the selected key appears 2 Select any transition type in the Transition Type group If in the Setup menus you set insertion deletion as independent modes make the settings for in...

Page 192: ...sition rates in a menu and changing the settings For each of the M E and PGM PST banks you can also display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate and change the settings For more details see Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings page 412 ...

Page 193: ...ideo Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 20 Volume 3 Fade to Black Operation Fade to black control block Carrying out a fade to black To carry out a fade to black press the FTB button in the fade to black control block The fade to black is carried out with the transition rate set for the program output of the PGM PST bank During the transition the FTB button lights amber When the transition compl...

Page 194: ...to set the fade to black transition rate Displaying the transition rates in a menu and changing the settings You can also display the transition rate independent key transition rate and fade to black transition rate for each of the M E and PGM PST banks and change the settings For more details see Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings page 412 Knob Parameter Adjustment Se...

Page 195: ...dent key transition control block Basic Operations for Simple Transitions Transition control block simple right hand type Note The simple transition control block cannot be installed in the CCP 6224 6324 Control Panel KEY1 NORM REV REV KEY2 LIMIT SET PTN LIMIT TAKE MIX NAM WIPE DME ON OVER ON OVER Key status display Key transition selection buttons Transition type selection buttons Transition exec...

Page 196: ...insert or delete key 1 Hold down the KEY1 button and press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME buttons To insert or delete key 2 Hold down the KEY2 button and press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME buttons To insert or delete key 1 and key 2 simultaneously Hold down the KEY1 and KEY2 buttons and press one of the MIX NAM WIPE and DME buttons To use a super mix or preset color mix Select Super Mix or Pre...

Page 197: ... transition such as a mix or wipe Press the TAKE button or operate the fader lever See Setting the Transition Rate page 168 and Pattern Limit page 173 as required Display of the Key Output Status and Key Priority You can check the output status of keys 1 and 2 and the key priority setting in the key status display in the transition control block The key status display includes two ON indicators co...

Page 198: ... the buses as follows Right fader lever Background A bus Left fader lever Background B bus The relationship between the positions of the two fader levers and the image output in a mix is as follows When the transition type is NAM the outputs of the A bus and B bus in the above table are the outputs subjected to NAM The transition indicators always show the progress of the background A bus The oper...

Page 199: ...g it on To insert or delete a key using a dedicated DME wipe pattern Press the DME button turning it on For details of wipe settings see Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 293 For details of DME wipe settings see DME Wipe Settings for Independent Key Transitions page 334 To cut the key instantaneously in or out Press the CUT button turning it on K SS WIPE DME SHIFT MIX CUT KEY3 ON ...

Page 200: ... a transition this will be the setting when inserting a key 2 Carry out the transition in the independent key transition execution section To insert or delete the key gradually with a mix or wipe transition Press the TAKE button To set the independent key transition rate using a simple type transition control block use the key 3 and key 4 Transition menus For details see Setting the Independent Ke...

Page 201: ... a DME Effect to a Key 233 Specifying the Key Output Destination 235 Key Modify Clear 236 Blink Function 236 Video Processing 237 Key Setting Operations With the Key Control Block 238 Operations in the Key Control Block 238 Key Edge Modifications 242 Masks 246 Applying a DME Effect to a Key 247 Other Key Setting Operations 249 Key Adjustment Operations With the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Bloc...

Page 202: ... control block or by a setting in the Type menu for the keyer See Key Type Setting page 210 Luminance key The background is cut out according to the luminance Y of the key source signal and at the same time the key fill signal is cut out and then added to the background signal Linear key This is a type of luminance key but there is a reduced variability in gain allowing more precise adjustment Col...

Page 203: ...e key edge is an outline When the key edge is normal with soft edge being on When fine key is on When the key positioner is on Chroma key A key signal based on a particular color is used to cut out the background and the key fill is then inserted The inserted signal is also referred to as the foreground and the composite image is called a chroma key image For details of chroma key composition see ...

Page 204: ...e However modifiers which relate to the wipe direction and edge are not reflected Key Modifiers Edge modifiers You can apply borders and other effects to the edge of the key See Key Edge Modifications pages 222 and 242 Name Effect Image Normal This is the state with no key edge modifiers applied Border This applies a uniform width border to the edge of the key You can adjust the border width and d...

Page 205: ...adow width position and density Outline This uses the outline of the original key as the key You can adjust the width and density of the outline You can also enable the separate edge function and adjust the top bottom left and right outline widths separately Emboss This applies an embossing effect to the outline of the key You can adjust the width and position of the embossing and the density You ...

Page 206: ...e type is normal with soft edge being on When Fine Key is on Edge fill When a border drop border or shadow modifier is selected you can select a signal to fill these edge effects The edge fill may be either the signal from the dedicated color matte generator or the signal currently selected on the utility 1 bus In the case of an outline there is no edge fill signal selection because the key fill s...

Page 207: ...pply modifiers Sub mask This uses the wipe generator signal or the signal selected on the utility 1 bus as the mask source When the wipe generator is selected the patterns and the pattern modifiers are the same as in a wipe transition Key Memory The key memory function allows the keyer settings on each cross point button to be automatically stored so that the next time the same cross point button ...

Page 208: ...e operation you can return the key adjustment values to their defaults The adjustment values which can be returned to their default values are as follows Adjustment values for the particular key type Clip Gain Density Filter etc In the case of chroma keying all adjustment values return to their default values Key position Key inversion Clean mode For details see Returning the key adjustment values...

Page 209: ... the M E 1 Key1 menu carry out any of the following procedures In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 then press VF1 Key1 In the M E 1 bank transition control block press the KEY1 next transition selection button twice in rapid succession In the M E 1 bank independent key transition control block press the key delegation button KEY1 twice in rapid succession In the ke...

Page 210: ...or a luminance key linear key or color vector key Select Clean Mode so that it is set on When clean mode is enabled key fill is added to the background without cutting out with key source When chroma key is selected Select Chroma Adjust to access the Chroma Adjust menu see page 215 and make the required settings When a wipe pattern key is selected In the M E 1 Wipe menu see page 267 select the pat...

Page 211: ... 4 Filter Filter coefficient 1 to 9 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Density Key density 0 00 to 100 00 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Y Clip Reference level for creating luminance signal 109 59 to 7 31 2 Y Gain Luminance signal sensitivity 100 00 to 100 00 3 C Clip Reference level for creating chrominance signal 100 00 to 0 00 4 C Gain Chrominance signa...

Page 212: ...has also been cut out with the key signal Additive mix The background which has been cut out with the key signal is combined with the unshaped foreground This is effective for a natural looking composite when the scene includes glass or other translucent objects Plane function In an additive mix the foreground is not shaped by the key signal and variations in the blue background appear in the comp...

Page 213: ...ically blue background may appear in the composite image To avoid this a particular luminance level can be set for the blue background and regions of lower luminance forcibly cut 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Plane on 2 Adjust the following parameter Chroma Key Adjustments Methods of adjusting the composite obtained from chroma keying include automatic adjustment with the auto chroma key functio...

Page 214: ...ration color space the range for this matching corresponds to a truncated sector This range is specified by two parameters the Angle parameter which determines the range of the hue parameter and the Crop parameter which determines the degree of truncation see the following figure Window adjustment Y balance In normal chroma keying the key signal is based on the chrominance component only and all e...

Page 215: ...ed as shadows there is no effect on cutting out of the foreground Video signal adjustment You can vary the foreground signal gain or change the hue There are separate adjustments for the gain of the overall video signal and Y and C components Making auto chroma key adjustments Auto chroma key is an automatic adjustment function which allows you to specify a part of the foreground video for example...

Page 216: ...ction 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Key Active on 2 Adjust the following parameters Making color cancel adjustments If the background color is leaking into the foreground video turning the color cancel function on allows you to eliminate this leakage 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu turn Key Active off Only the foreground image appears on the monitor 2 In the Color Cancel group set Color Cancel on 3 ...

Page 217: ...ting Key Position on and adjusting the color cancel key edge position When setting Window on and adjusting the detection range of the color cancel key For details of the crop and angle parameters see Chroma key window page 214 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Color cancel key reference level 0 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Color cancel key gain 100 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setti...

Page 218: ...the Y balance Setting the Y balance on allows you to specify that even if the hue is the same only portions of a particular luminance will be replaced by the background For an overview of the Y balance see Y balance page 214 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set Y Balance on 2 Adjust the following parameters Adjusting the chroma key shadow This function allows a shadow falling on the typically blue back...

Page 219: ... 1 In the Chroma Adjust menu set FRGD CCR on 2 Adjust the following parameters Selecting Key Fill and Key Source Selecting key fill and key source To select key fill and key source for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 Key1 menu select HF1 Type Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Reference luminance for shadows 0 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Shadow key gain...

Page 220: ...on color matte Select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination in the Fill Matte group Flat Color Adjust color 1 with the following parameters Mix Color Carry out a color mix Adjust color 1 and color 2 and select a mix pattern see the next section 5 In the Key Source group specify the key source selection mode Self The key fill bus signal is automatically selected as the key ...

Page 221: ... point button it is possible to select the video signal assigned to the cross point button If you press the cross point button with holding down KEY the key signal assigned to the cross point button Note In the above operation the following settings must have been made Assigning the key source bus to an AUX delegation button For details see Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings Aux Assign Menu in C...

Page 222: ... Select menu and make adjustments by pressing Pattern Adjust to open the menu for pattern adjustment Matte Adjust menu For details see Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte page 226 5 In the Type menu adjust color 1 and color 2 To adjust color 1 select Color1 and to adjust color 2 select Color2 then adjust the following parameters 6 To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color...

Page 223: ... it on Separate edge off a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 226 is on the setting value range is 0 00 to 4 00 b When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type Separate edge on The left right top and bottom border or outline widths can be adjusted independently The separate edge function is only valid when a luminance key linear key or chroma key is selected as the...

Page 224: ...y out the settings in step 6 4 Select the edge fill signal in the Edge Fill group Utility 1 Bus signal selected on the utility 1 bus Matte signal from dedicated color matte generator It becomes possible to adjust color 1 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width 0 00 to 8 00 2 Position Position 359 99 to 180 00 3 Density Density 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values ...

Page 225: ...Adjust in the same EDGE menu to display the Matte Adjust menu and adjust a single color or two color combination color matte You can select whether to use a single color matte or a two color combination color matte in the Edge Matte group For the color mix operation see Carrying out a color mix for the key edge fill matte page 226 6 When emboss is selected for the edge type adjust the color in the...

Page 226: ...ou can create a combination of color 1 and color 2 using a wipe pattern generated by the dedicated pattern generator 1 In the Edge Fill group of the Edge menu select Matte then press Matte Adjust The edge fill Matte Adjust menu appears 2 In the Edge Matte group select Mix Color turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Key to...

Page 227: ...ting the pattern position a See page 280 When turning Multi on and replicating the pattern a See page 285 2 Soft Softness of pattern edge 0 00 to 100 00 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Softness of pattern edge 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Lumin...

Page 228: ...he pattern selection described below you select Mask Pattern and Box for the main mask the Size parameter here cannot be adjusted Set Size in the Main Mask menu 3 To adjust the pattern and color press Zabton Adjust The Zabton Adjust menu appears 4 In the Zabton Pattern group select the pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Aspect Aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 a Knob Parameter Adjustme...

Page 229: ... can also press Pattern Select and in the corresponding pattern adjustment menu change the pattern 5 To adjust the color press Zabton Color and adjust the following parameters Masks There are two masks which can be used to mask off unneeded parts of a key or background or to remove defects and these are known as the main mask and subsidiary mask You can either use the main mask and subsidiary mask...

Page 230: ...rd wipe patterns 1 to 24 displayed in the Mask Ptn Select menu you can adjust the following parameters 5 To invert the black and white sense of the mask source press the Mask Invert button turning it on 6 When a pattern is selected as the mask source set the pattern modifiers as required Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top position 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Left position 100 00 to 100...

Page 231: ...e subsidiary mask for key 1 on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 Key1 menu select HF4 Sub Mask Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 a 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern horizontally 1 to 63 2 V Multi Number of repetitions o...

Page 232: ...cted Utility 1 Bus hold down the UTIL button in the M E 1 bank cross point control block and select the signal with the background A bus buttons While the UTIL button is pressed the background A bus switches to the utility 1 bus Note To enable the UTIL button its operation mode must be set to Hold beforehand See Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 19 Volume 3 4 Set the mask source paramet...

Page 233: ...o be used The lit colors of DME1 to DME8 indicate the DME assignment Lit green Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key Lit amber Shows the DME assigned to a key other than the currently selected key Off DME is not assigned To select a DME being used by another keyer Press Override turning it on then select the DME channel The later selection is valid and the button lights green Using ...

Page 234: ...select the signal in the Key1 row DME external video bus 3 To select the video signal for the third channel hold down the UTIL button in the cross point control block and carry out the following operation If the selected DME is channel 3 turn off the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 2 row DME utility 1 bus If the selected DME is channel 7 turn on the KEY4 button in th...

Page 235: ... selected DME output to DME MON V and DME MON K The colors with which DME1 to DME8 are lit show the key assignment status Lit green DME currently being monitored Lit amber DME that can be monitored Off Unassigned DME Specifying the Key Output Destination Using the key processed keyer signals external processed key To select the key processed keyer key fill and key source signals on the AUX bus or ...

Page 236: ...button VF1 to VF4 to return the key settings to their initial status For details of the initial status see Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu in Chapter 18 Volume 3 For the menu operation to return the key state to that set in initial status see Returning to default state in function groupings page 122 Blink Function With the blink function you can obtain the following effects Key...

Page 237: ...2 Press Video Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters To return adjustment values to their defaults Press Unity Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 1 to 100 2 Duty Proportion of cycle for which key inserted 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Blink Rate Length of blink cycle 1 to 100 2 Duty Proportion of cycle for which ...

Page 238: ... be assigned to the knobs the MORE button lights amber At this point press the MORE button which turns green to assign the fifth and subsequent parameters to the knobs so that the parameter settings can be made DME 1 DME 2 DME 3 DME 4 M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 RE SIZER P P KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 TRANS LUM LIN CRK CVK PTN AUTO SEL SPLIT MATTE FILL KEY DROP SOFT EDGE BDR DROP BDR SHDW EMBOS OUT LINE SHOW KEY M...

Page 239: ...type selection buttons in the key control block LUM button luminance key LIN button linear key CRK button chroma key CVK button color vector key PTN button key wipe pattern key When using a wipe pattern key as the key type in the Key Type group of the Type menu for the keyer select Wipe Pattern and make the settings For an overview of the key types see Key Types page 202 The button you pressed lig...

Page 240: ...o 100 2 Gain Key sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 3 Hue Hue 0 to 359 4 Density Key density 0 to 100 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Y Clip Reference level for Y signal 109 to 7 2 Y Gain Y signal sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 3 C Clip Reference level for chrominance signal 100 to 0 4 C Gain Chrominance signal sensitivity 100 shown as 00 to 100 Parameter group 2...

Page 241: ...l bus or key 4 fill bus then press the desired cross point button For the CCP 6224 6324 Control Panel it is necessary to set the AUX CTRL button to Off in order to exit the AUX panel less function see page 145 Selecting key source To use the key source paired with the key fill signal selected on the key fill bus press the AUTO SEL button turning it on The pairing of the cross point buttons for key...

Page 242: ...er DROP BDR button drop border SHDW button shadow OUTLINE button outline EMBOS button emboss For an overview of the edge modifications see Edge modifiers page 204 The pressed button lights green and you can now adjust the parameters with the knobs The display beside each knob shows the first letter of the parameter name and the three digit setting value Setting the border parameters When the BDR b...

Page 243: ...DW button is lit green the parameter settings differ between the key drop OFF and key drop ON modes see page 205 as shown below Switching between these two modes is made by turning the KEY DROP button on or off Key drop OFF mode a In the 4H mode and when Fine Key page 226 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 Key drop ON mode Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top edge width 0 to 8 a...

Page 244: ... 226 is on the setting value range is 0 to 4 b When a wipe pattern key or key wipe pattern key is selected as the key type Separate edge on The outline width settings can be made independently for left right top and bottom sides The separate edge function is only available when luminance key linear key or chroma key is selected as the key type 2 Position Position 359 to 0 4 Density Density 0 to 10...

Page 245: ...SOFT EDGE button turning it on The button lights green and you can now adjust the softness with the knob For a normal edge when SOFT EDGE is enabled Key Drop mode turns on When a luminance key or linear key is selected as the key type and clean mode is enabled enabling SOFT EDGE ends the clean mode Applying the zabton effects When the ZABTN button is lit green adjust the following parameters Press...

Page 246: ...ng When pattern is selected a The pattern is the same as a standard wipe See Wipe Pattern List page 447 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 to 100 2 Saturation Saturation 0 to 100 3 Hue Hue 359 to 0 4 Density Density 0 to 100 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top position 100 shown as 00 to 100 2 Left Left position 100 shown as 00 to 100 3 Right Right posi...

Page 247: ...ME effects to a maximum of three keys Requires a setting in setup Assigning a DME to a key 1 In the key control block press the delegation buttons M E1 and KEY1 2 Using the DME channel selection buttons select the DME channel DME1 to DME8 for applying the effect The lit colors of the DME1 to DME8 buttons indicate the DME assignment Lit green Shows the DME assigned to the currently selected key Lit...

Page 248: ...e selected DME is channel 7 or channel 8 turn on the KEY4 button in the key 2 row then select the signal in the key 4 row DME utility 2 bus Using four DME channels on one keyer When using the DME dedicated interface proceed as follows 1 Select the DME channel 1 or channel 5 for the first channel see Assigning a DME to a key page 247 In the same way select the DME channel 2 channel 6 for the second...

Page 249: ...etting DME SDI Interface menu Note When using a second key in combination with a dedicated interface select the signal to be used on the AUX bus You can check the DME operating status in the Status menu see page 415 Assigning the DME output signal to a monitor signal 1 Holding down the output destination specification button MON in the key control block use the DME channel selection buttons to sel...

Page 250: ...n the currently selected keyer then the key fill and key source signals to which a DME effect is applied are assigned to frame memory sources 1 and 2 Carrying out a frame memory feed causes the PROC KEY button to light amber Using the show key function While the SHOW KEY button is held down the key processed key source signal appears on the specified output Show key mode Even when the SHOW KEY but...

Page 251: ...e button LUM LIN CRK CVK or PTN recalls the key default values page 208 Key modify clear When an M E delegation button is held down holding down a key delegation button together returns the key settings to the initial status settings For details of the initial status see Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu in Chapter 18 Volume 3 ...

Page 252: ... and keyer Before carrying out key adjustment first select the key adjust mode then select the switcher bank and keyer For example to adjust key 1 on M E 1 proceed as follows 1 In the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block mode selection buttons press KEYADJ 2 Press the M E1 region selection button 3 In the memory recall section press the KEY1 button EDIT ENBL button Mode selection buttons Alphanum...

Page 253: ...ck Chapter 4 Keys The button displays in the memory recall section now appear as shown in the following illustration Pressing the PAGE 1 3 PAGE 2 3 buttons further changes the display as follows then pressing PAGE 3 3 returns to the original display shown in the illustration ...

Page 254: ...254 Key Adjustment Operations With the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block Chapter 4 Keys With these buttons in the memory recall section you can carry out the following key adjustment ...

Page 255: ...he selection hold down this button and press the button assigned to the signal you want as key source in the cross point control block You can also use the same signal as the key fill selected on the key fill bus as key source SELF Press the AUTO SEL button and SPLT button simultaneously so that both are off to select the SELF mode Setting auto chroma key SMPL MARK button Toggles the sample mark d...

Page 256: ...elected on the utility bus is selected For parameters that can be adjusted with the adjustment knobs see step 4 in Key Edge Modifications page 224 Selecting the mask source MASK button Selects the mask source box generated by dedicated generator or pattern to be selected in the Main Mask menu for each M E bank The parameters that can be adjusted with the adjustment knobs are different for a box or...

Page 257: ...a DME channel button DME1 to DME8 allows you to forcibly select this channel The button for the selected DME channel lights green Recalling the keyer using the DME channel TRCE button Holding down this button press the selection button for the DME channel already assigned to another keyer or transition to switch the keyer or transition to which the DME channel is assigned to the currently selected...

Page 258: ...ar When the KEY ADJ button is held down holding down the region selection button for the selected region together returns all the key settings of the region to the initial status settings When the KEY ADJ button is held down holding down the button for the selected key together returns the key settings to the initial status settings For details of the initial status see Selecting the State After P...

Page 259: ... block downstream key control block or Multifunction Flexi Pad control block Each keyer is provided with four dedicated key snapshot registers Independent key transition control block standard type Saving a key snapshot For example the following procedure saves the state of the M E 1 key 1 settings 1 In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the key delegation button KEY1 turning...

Page 260: ... of the M E 1 key 1 settings 1 In the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the key delegation button KEY1 turning it on 2 Press the K SS button turning it on 3 Set the following buttons on or off depending on the information you want to recall These buttons are not provided in the downstream key control block K MOD ENBL button When this is on the key settings and key modifiers are ...

Page 261: ...ve a key snapshot for key 1 of M E 1 select M E1 and key1 then use the following procedure 1 Press the K SS button The button displays in the memory recall section change as shown in the following illustration 2 In the memory recall section hold down the STOR button and press the button any of 1 to 4 for the register in which you want to save the key snapshot To recall a key snapshot For example t...

Page 262: ...utton 1 for the register in which is saved the key snapshot you want to delete To carry out an auto transition execution during key snapshot operation Press the AUTO TRNS button Instant key insertion removal Press the KEY ON button To remove the key while the key is inserted press the KEY ON button Key Snapshot Operations Using a Simple Transition Module When using a simple transition module the k...

Page 263: ...ding a snapshot the register name is shown as up to eight characters 2 In the Flexi Pad control block hold down the SNAPSHOT button and press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register in which you want to save the snapshot The key source name display key snapshot button which you pressed lights yellow Note If you save a key snapshot in a register for which the b...

Page 264: ...the M E 1 independent key transition control block press the K SS button in the key 3 control block turning it on 2 Press the key source name display key snapshot button corresponding to the register you want to recall The button you pressed lights yellow and this recalls the key settings excluding the key insertion state on off and key priority ...

Page 265: ...s 293 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition Wipe Settings 293 Setting Independent Key Transition Wipe Modifiers 294 Wipe Snapshots 298 Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad 298 Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus 301 Wipe Pattern Operations in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block 304 Recalling a Wipe Snapshot 304 Selecting the Wipe Pattern 305 Editing the Wipe Pattern 305 S...

Page 266: ...Wipe Pattern The patterns that can be used for a wipe are divided into a number of groups as follows Note that only the standard wipe patterns can be used for an independent key transition For wipe patterns see Wipe Pattern List in Appendix Volume 1 page 447 Standard wipe patterns Patterns consisting of straight lines vertically horizontally or diagonally and circular patterns Enhanced wipes More ...

Page 267: ... block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and press VF5 Wipe In the transition control block of the M E 1 bank press the transition type selection button WIPE twice in rapid succession Any of the above operations displays the M E 1 Wipe menu Wipe Pattern Selection Selecting a wipe pattern by a menu operation 1 In the M E 1 Wipe menu select HF1 Main Pattern The Main Pattern menu appears 2 S...

Page 268: ...layed the next row does not start to appear When a random wipe is selected pattern number 273 When a diamond dust wipe is selected pattern number 274 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Number of points 3 to 64 2 Star Rate Angularity of star 100 00 to 100 00 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Tile No Number of tiles horizontally 2 to 36 2 V Tile No Number of tiles vertically ...

Page 269: ... and sub Note It is not possible to apply a pattern mix to an independent key transition Types of pattern mix There are four ways in which patterns can be combined in a pattern mix as follows Mix The effect of the sub pattern is applied to the main pattern modifying the outline or nature of the main pattern Positive NAM Nam Creates a pattern with an outline which contains all points within the out...

Page 270: ...Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings Chapter 5 Wipes Morphing As the transition progresses the pattern morphs from the main pattern through the mix combination to the sub pattern Mix Positive NAM Negative NAM ...

Page 271: ...ou can also apply the diamond dust wipe effect to the pattern resulting from a pattern mix See Pattern Mix page 269 When the pattern mix function is off turning dust mix on results in the main pattern and the diamond dust pattern being mixed This state is the same as a pattern mix when the diamond dust pattern is selected for the sub pattern 10 00 0 00 10 00 110 00 100 00 0 00 100 00 90 00 Mix end...

Page 272: ...s selected changing the value of a parameter for one pattern changes the value of the parameter for the other pattern to maintain the same difference between the two Note When carrying out a wipe transition using a pattern mix it is recommended that you set the modifier link function to FULL LINK mode If the link function is off or SEMI LINK mode is selected the desired effect may not be obtained ...

Page 273: ...elected When morphing see page 270 is selected 6 In the Main Sub Link group make the main sub modifier link function settings See Main and sub modifier link function page 272 Full fully linked mode Main pattern Sub pattern Standard Enhanced Rotary Mosaic Random diamond dust Standard Yes Yes No Yes Yes Enhanced Yes Yes No Yes Yes Rotary No No No No No Mosaic Yes Yes No No Yes Random diamond dust Ye...

Page 274: ...rs may depend on the pattern you are using For details see Possible combinations of wipe patterns and modifiers page 291 Main pattern and sub pattern modifiers You can make independent settings of the modifiers for the main pattern and sub pattern To set the modifiers for the main pattern in the M E 1 Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify and make the settings in the Main Modify menu To set the modifie...

Page 275: ...ect alternating directions each time the transition is completed normal reverse mode To specify the wipe direction in a menu 1 In the M E 1 Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears 2 In the Direction group specify the wipe direction Normal regular direction Normal Reverse alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse reverse direction to normal To spe...

Page 276: ...ns 1 In the M E 1 Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears 2 Press Split turning it on 3 Set the following parameters Modifying the wipe pattern edge Edge You can apply a border to the pattern soften the edges or soften the applied border Border You can adjust the border width Split on Split off Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Split No Number of splits 1 to 4 ...

Page 277: ...rder 3 Set the parameters according to the selection in step 2 When border is selected When soft edge is selected When soft border is selected 4 When you selected border or soft border select the edge fill signal in the Edge Fill group Utility 2 Bus signal selected on the utility 2 bus Matte signal from the dedicated color matte generator 5 Depending on the operation in step 4 carry out the follow...

Page 278: ... color combination see the next paragraph Carrying out a color mix for the edge fill matte When you selected Matte for the border or soft border edge fill you can combine color 1 and color 2 For the combination you can use not only a normal wipe generator pattern but also the dedicated color mix pattern 1 In the Edge Fill group of the Edge Direction menu select Matte and press Matte Adjust The Mat...

Page 279: ...tion on and setting the pattern position a See page 280 When turning Multi on and using replications of the same pattern a See page 285 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Edge softness 0 00 to 100 00 3 Pattern Pattern number 1 to 24 a Knob ...

Page 280: ...interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Setting the wipe position Positioner When you turn on this function you can move the wipe pattern to any position Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Aspect Aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting ...

Page 281: ...n to the center of the screen In the Position group press Center To move the pattern from its current position to the center through the course of a transition In the Position group press Auto Center turning it on To set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick You can also set the wipe position using the trackball or joystick in the device control block 1 In the device control block pres...

Page 282: ...he wipe pattern Rotation You can rotate the pattern There are three rotation modes as follows Angle This carries out a wipe with the pattern in a fixed angle The parameter Angle determines the angle of pattern rotation A value of 100 00 of the parameter Angle corresponds to one whole turn counterclockwise a value of 100 00 corresponds to one whole turn clockwise With a value of 0 00 there is no ro...

Page 283: ...Angle determines an angle of pattern inclination at the beginning of the transition A value of 100 00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn counterclockwise A value of 100 00 corresponds to the angle rotated one whole turn clockwise With a value of 0 00 the pattern is stationary The parameter Magnitude determines an angle of pattern rotation through the course of the transition A value o...

Page 284: ...of the pattern A negative value of the parameter Aspect stretches the pattern vertically a positive value stretches the pattern horizontally You can set the aspect ratio independently for the main pattern and sub pattern 1 In the M E 1 Wipe menu select HF5 Main Modify The Main Modify menu appears Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation 100 00 to 100 00 Knob Param...

Page 285: ...anner of replication At a value of 100 00 the pattern of the adjacent odd numbered column on the left lines up with the central coordinate horizontally At a value of 100 00 the pattern of the adjacent odd numbered column on the right lines up with the central coordinate horizontally For an independent key transition wipe you can use the Invert Type parameter to select from the following four types...

Page 286: ...this is on alternate tiles are inverted top to bottom Non Mask When this is on even if the positioner function is used to move the pattern position the pattern is always present on the screen Position By adjusting the following parameters move the pattern position within the divisions determined in step 3 a See page 280 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pa...

Page 287: ...0 represents the maximum movement The parameter V Offset determines the spacing in the vertical direction If a negative value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move upward and the odd numbered pairs move downward The value 100 00 represents the maximum movement If a positive value is set the even numbered pairs of strip and slit move downward and the odd numbered pairs move upward T...

Page 288: ...plying waviness in the horizontal direction to edges The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves A value of 100 00 generates the maximum downward speed of waves and a value of 100 00 the maximum upward speed Vertical modulation This modulates the pattern applying waviness in the vertical direction to edges The parameter Speed determines the speed of waves A value of 100 00 generates the maxi...

Page 289: ...tern applying waviness in the horizontal direction to edges V Vertical modulation Modulate the pattern applying waviness in the vertical direction to edges Fringe Radial modulation Modulate the pattern applying waviness in the radial direction to edges 3 Set the following parameters Applying barrel or pincushion distortion to the edge of the wipe pattern Spring As the transition progresses the edg...

Page 290: ...nes the size and direction of the spiral A value of 100 00 represents the maximum movement in the counterclockwise direction and a value of 100 00 represents the maximum movement in the clockwise direction The parameter Wave Speed determines the speed of the lateral waves A value of 100 00 represents the maximum speed to the left and a value of 100 00 represents the maximum speed to the right You ...

Page 291: ...t of the menu display turning it on then press VF5 Wipe to return the wipe settings to their initial status Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Magnitude Size and direction of the spiral 100 00 to 100 00 2 Wave Speed Speed of the lateral waves 100 00 to 100 00 Modifiers Type of wipe Standard Enhanced Rotary Mosaic Random diamond dust Direction Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Split Yes Yes No Yes No Edg...

Page 292: ...92 Basic Procedure for Wipe Settings Chapter 5 Wipes For details of the menu operation to return the wipe state to that set in initial status see Returning to default state in function groupings page 122 ...

Page 293: ...erations In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and select VF1 Key1 and HF6 Transition to display the Transition menu for key 1 then press Wipe Adjust In the independent key transition control block of the M E 1 bank press the key delegation button KEY1 then press the independent key transition type selection button WIPE twice in rapid succession Carrying out the abov...

Page 294: ...r Rotation Aspect ratio Pattern replication Setting the wipe direction Direction In the Direction group of the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu make any of the following selections Normal regular direction Normal Reverse alternate between regular and reverse for each transition Reverse reverse direction to normal Softening the wipe pattern edge Soft edge 1 Press Soft in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu turning it o...

Page 295: ...u can restrict movement to the horizontal direction and by pressing the Y button turning it on you can restrict movement to the vertical direction To set the wipe position by a menu operation 1 Press Position in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Table 1 Buttons and assigned settings Button name Setting K1 CB1 Wipe position for independent key 1 transition K2 CB...

Page 296: ... 2 According to the selection in step 1 set the following parameters When Angle is selected a See page 282 When Speed is selected a See page 283 When Magnitude is selected a See page 283 Setting the wipe pattern aspect ratio Aspect ratio 1 Press Aspect in the Key1 Wipe Adjust menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Angle Angle of pattern rotation...

Page 297: ...menu turning it on 2 Set the following parameters a See page 285 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Aspect Aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern horizontally 1 to 63 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern vertically 1 to 63 3 Invert Type Replication layout 1 to 4 a ...

Page 298: ...unction Flexi Pad block in each switcher bank or the Menu control block to save and recall wipe snapshots For simple transitions see page 195 there are eight wipe snapshot registers on each M E bank and the PGM PST bank Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad Flexi Pad control block standard type 7 WIPE DME SNAP SHOT EFF MCRO SHOT BOX UNDO STORE STATS TRANS RATE BNAK 0 BANK 1 BANK SEL XPT HOLD...

Page 299: ...the M E 1 Flexi Pad control block press the WIPE button This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe snapshot mode 2 In the memory recall section press the PTN NO button This switches the Flexi Pad control block to wipe pattern number recall mode 3 Use the buttons in the memory recall section to enter the pattern number consisting of up to three digits and press the ENTR button WIPE DME SNAP ...

Page 300: ...tern and sub pattern are selected then the memory recall button shows the main pattern The pattern appears on the button you pressed which lights yellow The numeric display shows the number of the corresponding pattern It is also possible to display the register name using a Setup menu see Operation Settings Operation Menu in Chapter 19 Volume 3 Meaning of the state of buttons Off Nothing is saved...

Page 301: ...ipe snapshot To cancel the recall of a wipe snapshot press the UNDO button Deleting a wipe snapshot When the WIPE button is lit in the Flexi Pad control block hold down the STORE STATS button and press the memory recall button for the register in which you want to delete the wipe snapshot The indication of the memory recall button reverts from the wipe pattern or register name to the register numb...

Page 302: ...the register in which you want to save Notes If you press a button which is already lit this overwrites the contents of the register When both the main pattern and sub pattern are selected for a pattern mix the button in the memory recall section shows only the main pattern Recalling a wipe snapshot from the menu In the Wipe Snapshot menu press the memory recall button for the wipe snapshot you wa...

Page 303: ...are linked A setting in setup determines whether register names or pattern numbers appear Deleting a wipe snapshot from the menu 1 In the Wipe Snapshot menu press Delete 2 Press the memory recall button for the wipe snapshot you want to delete This deletes the wipe snapshot ...

Page 304: ...ets the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block to wipe snapshot mode and the button indications appear as follows You can change the indications for buttons 0 to 9 in the memory recall section to pattern images using the Engineering Setup Panel Operation Flexi Pad Mode menu 2 Select the region for the wipe snapshot to be recalled with the region selection buttons 7 4 DEL 1 UNDO 0 8 9 5 6 2 3 SHOT B...

Page 305: ... the PTN NO button in the memory recall section The PTN No button lights green 3 With the buttons in the memory recall section enter the pattern number of up to three digits and press the ENTR button This confirms the input and the pattern number appears in the alphanumeric display The PTN NO button lights orange and the system returns to wipe snapshot mode For pattern numbers see Wipe Pattern Lis...

Page 306: ...the control knobs when the button is lit green When border is selected When soft border is selected EXIT BDR POS NORM SOFT CNTR REV SHOT BOX SNAP SHOT TRANS RATE EDIT ENBL DME WIPE KEY ADJ MCRO EFF WIPE DME 1 DME 2 ALL P P M E 2 DEV 1 USER 4 MORE M E 1 NORM REV SOFT BDR KNOB 1 2 EDGE MAT LIMT SET PTN LIMT H 0 V 0 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 W Border width 0 to 10...

Page 307: ...e wipe direction NORM normal Sets wipe to normal forward direction NORM REV normal reverse Sets the wipe direction to alternate between normal and reverse for each transition REV reverse Sets wipe to reverse direction to normal 3 O Degree of softening of outside of border 0 to100 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting valu...

Page 308: ...witches between parameter group 1 2 and parameter group 2 2 Wipe modify clear Press Default Recall at the lower left of the menu display turning it on then press VF5 Wipe to return the wipe settings to their initial status For details of menu operations see Menu Operations page 120 Saving Canceling and Deleting Edited Wipe Patterns Saving the edited wipe pattern as a snapshot Holding down the WIPE...

Page 309: ... already saved light orange Canceling recall of a wipe snapshot To cancel the operation of recalling a wipe snapshot press the UNDO button Deleting the date of a saved wipe snapshot Holding down the DEL button press the button for the register in which the wipe snapshot you want to delete is saved The register button you pressed goes off ...

Page 310: ...310 Wipe Pattern Operations in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block Chapter 5 Wipes ...

Page 311: ...334 Basic Procedure for Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Settings 334 Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers 335 DME Wipe Snapshots 338 DME Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Flexi Pad 338 DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus 339 Creating User Programmable DME Patterns 340 User Programmable DME Transition Mode 340 DME Wipe Pattern Operations in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Contro...

Page 312: ... wipe execution mode and pattern numbers that can be used There are three DME wipe execution modes depending on the number of DME channels available one channel mode two channel mode and three channel mode The pattern numbers that can be used in these modes are as follows DME wipe pattern groups The patterns used in DME wipes fall into the following groups For each group excluding user programmabl...

Page 313: ...en returns to the original video while unwrapping Pattern number 1365 one channel mode Character trail The new video appears with a trail over the old video Next this gradually returns to the original from the periphery Pattern numbers 1371 1372 one channel mode Wave The new video appears with a wave like effect over the old video Next this returns to the original video as the effect reduces Patte...

Page 314: ... the old video changes to the new video while both undergo expansion three dimensional rotation and translation Pattern numbers 2631 to 2634 2642 2644 two channel mode Sparkle The new video appears over the old video with a nonlinear effect applied such as broken glass explosion or melt Next this returns to the original video as the effect gradually reduces Pattern numbers 1391 1393 1394 1396 1398...

Page 315: ...a type of picture in picture in which the new image is the background and the currently visible image shrinks and then expands to its original size See example in the next item Frame in out Frame I O frame in out transition mode When the first transition completes if you move the position of the image you can move it both horizontally and vertically Frame in out H Frame I O H a type of frame in ou...

Page 316: ...ompress Transition mode frame in out In this mode when the first transition has completed you can move the image with the positioner in both horizontal and vertical directions but the image position at the transition start point and end point does not change The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following Second stroke First stroke First stroke Second stroke Transition...

Page 317: ... vertical directions The image at the transition start point and end point also moves The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following At the first transition completion point if you move the image with the positioner the transition appears as in the following figure State before modification Image created by interpolation Background B Background A Transition start Tran...

Page 318: ...l and vertical directions The image at the transition start point and end point also moves The description is of an example of creating an effect such as the following State before modification Image created by interpolation Background B Background A Transition start Transition end First transition completion point Effect execution Transition start Transition end First transition completion point ...

Page 319: ...with the DME external video signal and the light gray portion with the signal selected as follows For a DME dedicated interface The signal selected on the utility 1 bus For an MVE 8000A or MVE 9000 SDI interface Signal selected on the AUX bus assigned in the Engineering Setup Switcher Device Interface DME Type Setting DME SDI interface menu The AUX bus is determined by which DME channel is being u...

Page 320: ... effect is enabled and that portion can be adjusted page 327 When the DME wipe edge setting is off the edge applied in the effect is enabled as is Positioner You can move the DME wipe pattern or center of the effect to an arbitrary position Using the position select function you can also instantaneously move the pattern 1031 When this pattern number is selected with the progress of the transition ...

Page 321: ...e image It is also possible in 16 9 mode to crop both sides to convert the image to a 4 3 aspect ratio For the execution of a DME wipe crop transition you can select from the following three possibilities Cut Last 5 Linear When Last 5 is selected you can set the Release Transition as follows Last 30 Last 5 Off Note When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected crop cannot be used Relation Betwee...

Page 322: ...els to use on the individual M E banks in Chapter 20 Volume 3 Number of DME wipes that can be used simultaneously on a single M E bank DME wipes can be used in five places including the four independent key transitions When the DME dedicated interface is used a maximum of two DME wipes can be used simultaneously and when the SDI interface is used only one DME wipe can be used at one time Note When...

Page 323: ...wo places on the DME dedicated interface and in only one place on the SDI interface simultaneously DME Wipe Settings Menu Accessing the DME Wipe menu To access the M E 1 DME Wipe menu use either of the following operations In the menu control block select the top menu selection button M E 1 and press VF6 DME Wipe In the transition control block of the M E 1 bank press the transition type selection...

Page 324: ...am Selectable DME wipe pattern groups in three channel mode User Program and Brick For details of DME wipe patterns see Types of DME Wipe Pattern page 312 and DME Wipe Pattern List page 453 The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen 3 Press the button to select the desired pattern Note For a key transition the page turn page roll and picture in picture cannot be used Adjusti...

Page 325: ...een c The vertical center position of the video pasted on Side V At 100 00 the center is at the bottom edge of the screen and at 100 00 the center is at the top edge of the screen Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 5 Delay Timing for video selected on a utility bus to appear on the screen 100 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Rot X Rotation about the Y axis horizontal d...

Page 326: ...ers see DME Wipe Pattern Variation and Modifiers page 320 Specifying the DME wipe direction Direction You can specify the DME wipe direction normal reverse To specify the DME wipe direction in a menu 1 In the M E 1 DME Wipe menu select HF4 Edge Direction The Edge Direction menu appears 2 In the Direction group specify the DME wipe direction Normal regular direction Normal Reverse alternate between...

Page 327: ...l mode press 1st Ch turning it on For a pattern in two channel mode from the Ch Select group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time 3 In the Edge group select the edge type Border border Soft Border soft border 4 Set the parameters according to the selection in step 3 When border is selected When soft border is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Sett...

Page 328: ... mode from the Ch Select group select the corresponding channel You can select more than one channel at the same time 3 In the Position group press Position turning it on 4 Set the following parameters Display indications when multiple channels are selected at the same time The indications on the knobs show the settings of the lowest numbered channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings ...

Page 329: ...s the button where you want to move to turning it on The DME wipe pattern displayed on the screen moves to the position of the specified button Setting relative positions to move the DME wipe pattern In two channel mode use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears 2 In the Ch Select group select the target channels 3 Press Position in the Posit...

Page 330: ... channel When you turn the knobs to adjust the settings this changes the settings on the other channels by the same amount Adjusting the DME wipe pattern cropping Note When pattern numbers 1701 and 1702 are selected crop cannot be used 1 In the M E 1 DME Wipe menu select HF5 Modify The Modify menu appears 2 Depending on whether the selected pattern is in one channel mode or two channel mode procee...

Page 331: ...a pattern in two channel mode from the Ch Select group select the corresponding channels You can select more than one channel at the same time 3 In the Crop Mode group press Crop or 4 3 Crop to crop from 16 9 to 4 3 aspect ratio turning it on 4 In the Crop Mode group press Remove From Begin The Remove From Begin menu appears 5 In the Crop Transition group select the execution mode for the DME wipe...

Page 332: ...ease Transition group select the timing of transition completion Last 30 The transition completes at the end of 70 of the transition execution time The transition has a dead zone from 70 to 95 of the transition time Last 5 The transition completes at the end of 95 of the transition execution time When the transition completes the cropping is removed during the last 5 Off The transition completes a...

Page 333: ...ettings to their initial status For details of the menu operation to return the DME wipe state to that set in initial status see Returning to default state in function groupings page 122 0 100 95 Last 30 y t 100 70 0 100 95 Last 5 y t 100 70 0 100 95 Off y 100 95 t Transition Cropping t transition execution time y change in transition and cropping amount Transition Cropping Transition Cropping Dea...

Page 334: ...ck select the top menu selection button M E 1 and select VF1 Key1 and HF6 Transition to display the Transition menu for key 1 Next press DME Wipe Adjust Press the key delegation button Key1 in the independent key transition control block of the M E 1 bank then press the independent key transition type DME twice in quick succession Carrying out the above operation displays the M E 1 Key1 Transition...

Page 335: ... of DME Wipe Pattern page 312 and DME Wipe Pattern List page 453 The patterns from the selected pattern group appear on the screen 3 Press the button to select the desired pattern Setting Independent Key Transition DME Wipe Modifiers You can add modifiers such as pattern position and size for an independent key transition DME wipe For introductory information see Setting the DME wipe position Posi...

Page 336: ...parameters To crop to 4 3 in 16 9 mode In the Crop Mode group press 4 3 Crop turning it on To set the operation for DME wipe crop transition execution 1 In the Crop Mode group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu press Crop turning it on 2 In the Crop Mode group press Crop or 4 3 Crop to crop to 4 3 in 16 9 mode turning it on 3 In the Crop Mode group press Remove From Begin Knob Parameter Adjustment S...

Page 337: ...on completion 1 In the Crop Mode group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu press Crop turning it on 2 In the Crop Mode group press Remove From Begin For subsequent operations see Setting the timing of transition completion page 332 Applying a border to a key DME wipe In the Edge group of the Key1 DME Wipe Adjust menu press Border turning it on For subsequent operations use the same process as in step...

Page 338: ...similar to the procedures for wipe snapshot operations In DME wipe snapshot operations use the DME button instead of the WIPE button used in wipe snapshot operations Selecting a DME wipe pattern in the Flexi Pad control block In the standard type Flexi Pad control block enter a four digit pattern number using the DME button For details see Flexi Pad Control Block Standard Type page 62 Notes You ca...

Page 339: ...er 6 DME Wipes DME Snapshot Operations With the Menus In the same way as for wipe snapshots you can save recall and delete DME snapshots For details of the operating procedures see Wipe Snapshot Operations With the Menus page 301 ...

Page 340: ...me effects in the global channel When the effect with the same number as the reference channel is present on the DME global GLBL channel executing the user programmable DME will also execute the effect on the global channel simultaneously When executing a user programmable DME take note of whether the effect is present on the global channel User Programmable DME Transition Mode To create a user pr...

Page 341: ...the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen Create the last keyframe to be a full size image In the Transition Mode group of the Key Frame DME User PGM menu select Single Notes on flip tumble one channel mode Create the first keyframe image at full size In the Back group of the DME Input Output Video Key menu depending on the direction of the rotation you want during the tra...

Page 342: ...seen within the screen As the state after completion of the first transition move the image horizontally to make it visible within the screen At this time press the PAUSE button in the keyframe control block turning it on to set a pause for the keyframe For the last keyframe move the image horizontally to place it outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that the image is not visib...

Page 343: ...ansition mode two channel mode Create the first keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 create the image full size Channel 2 either create the image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so that it cannot be seen within the screen Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 either create the image outside the screen area or set the image size to zero so th...

Page 344: ... zone corresponds to the central one third of the range of the transition indicator This also applies to an auto transition Create the last keyframe for each channel as follows Channel 1 since the priority is low it will not be visible on the screen so no particular restrictions apply Channel 2 create the image full size In the Transition Mode group of the Key Frame DME User PGM menu select P In P...

Page 345: ...e indications for buttons 0 to 9 in the memory recall section to pattern images using the Engineering Setup Panel Operation Flexi Pad Mode menu Selecting the DME Wipe Pattern The operation of selecting the DME wipe pattern in the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block is the same as the operation of selecting a wipe pattern except for pressing the DME WIPE button to select DME wipe snapshot mode Se...

Page 346: ...iting a wipe pattern EXIT button PTN LIMT LIMT SET buttons NORM NORM REV REV buttons KNOB 1 2 button For the method of operation of these buttons see Editing the Wipe Pattern page 305 Channel selection buttons 1ST CH channel 1 Selects channel 1 2ND CH channel 2 Selects channel 2 You can also select two channels by pressing the buttons simultaneously DME wipe pattern edge setting buttons BDR border...

Page 347: ...and then the value of the parameter When the POS button is lit green you can adjust the position of the pattern with the control knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 W Border width 0 to 100 2 L Luminance 0 to 100 3 S Saturation 0 to 100 4 H Hue 0 to 359 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 W Border width 0 to 100 2 I Degree of softening of inside of border 0 t...

Page 348: ...ion selection button for the selected region returns the DME wipe settings to their initial status For details of the initial status see Selecting the State After Powering On Start Up Menu in Chapter 18 Volume 3 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Cropping ratio of the image from left and right sides 100 to 100 2 V Cropping ratio of the image from top and bottom sides ...

Page 349: ...ling and Deleting DME Wipe Snapshots The operations of saving canceling and deleting a DME wipe pattern snapshot you have created are the same as the operations of saving canceling and deleting a wipe snapshot For the operations for wipe snapshots see Saving Canceling and Deleting Edited Wipe Patterns page 308 ...

Page 350: ...350 DME Wipe Pattern Operations in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block Chapter 6 DME Wipes ...

Page 351: ...2 Continuously Capturing Still Images Record 373 Recalling a Continuous Sequence of Still Images Animation 375 Frame Memory Clip Function 378 Frame Memory Clip Operations 379 Preparations for Operation 379 Recalling Clips 379 Clip Playback 381 Clip Creation 385 Creating and Handling Frame Memory Folders 387 Clip Output 388 Clip Transition Operations 389 Image Data Management 392 Pair File Processi...

Page 352: ...ppears as a movie on playback In this manual this is also referred to simply as a clip The files still files constituting clips are referred to as a clip file When the above distinctions are not being made an image is simply referred to as an image Use of frame memory There are eight frame memory channels FM1 to FM8 and each channel independently allows a freeze image to be saved or recalled By al...

Page 353: ...nd capturing an image or by using the separation function see page 393 to split a pair file Operation modes The frame memory has the following operation mode V K mode When the pair mode is active the key signal is automatically selected on frame memory source bus 2 This is convenient for handling the video and key signals together in frame memory For example when you select a video signal on frame...

Page 354: ... The following names cannot be used for folders Flash1 Flash2 CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPT0 LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 A folder named Default is provided and this folder cannot be renamed or deleted Still images and clips in different frame memory folders cannot have the same name ...

Page 355: ...emory operations may not be performed properly Carry out frame memory operations after stopping clip playback Preparations Allocating the frame memory outputs FM1 to FM8 to cross point buttons To output a frame memory image to a monitor for example the output signal from the frame memory FM1 to FM8 must be allocated to a cross point button Carry out this allocation in the Setup menu Accessing the ...

Page 356: ...ld Invert File excluding Pair Recombination menu Folder External HDD menus Frame Memory menu a Auto store status display Depending on the setup settings this appears when the auto store function is enabled 2 Display of available image capacity 4 Pair selection button 6 File selection area 3 Target FM selection buttons 5 Pair button 1 Auto store status display Frame memory selection area 7 Frame me...

Page 357: ... Black when a black signal is output Through when the input image is output Freeze when a freeze is output Composite when a composite image is processed Record when continuously capturing images record Still duration display When a still image is selected Still is shown When a clip is selected a duration indication such as 00 00 10 is shown Reposition Lock status display This shows R when the repo...

Page 358: ...file is output Black when a black signal is output Through when the input image is output Freeze when a freeze is output Compos when a composite image is processed Record when continuously capturing images record e Pair button Press this button turning it on to enable pair mode f File selection area You can select from the displayed still image files or clip files The border color shows the status...

Page 359: ...ted each press switches the front and the back File information detail display For the selected file this shows the file name P if a pair file and the duration g Frame memory folder selection area Select the frame memory folder to be displayed h Direct Recall button Toggle on and off the direct recall mode in which pressing a thumbnail immediately recalls the file Selecting an Input Image For the ...

Page 360: ...ails of the switching refer to the Setup menu Auxiliary Bus Control Block Settings Aux Assign Menu in Chapter 19 Volume 3 2 In the auxiliary bus control block cross point buttons select the signal to be used for the input image To select a signal with a key or DME effect applied on the frame memory source bus In the key control block press the FM FEED button turning it on This automatically assign...

Page 361: ...is selected When Pair is Off One of the targets must be selected However in the Clip Play menu you can also select both FM1 and FM2 Selecting a frame memory folder Press a button in the frame memory folder selection area see page 359 By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear Capturing and Saving an I...

Page 362: ...eze image For details of the selection method see page 361 Note The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze image It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following step 5 An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder 5 Press Freeze Enable turning it on The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned ...

Page 363: ...ich has been placed with the freeze function as a file in memory You can save a single image in a single file and apply a name of up to eight characters to the file Note When the system is powered off all the files saved in memory are erased To save a captured still image in a file use the following procedure in the Still Freeze Store menu 1 Press Store The keyboard window see page 128 appears 2 I...

Page 364: ...it on 2 Use the knobs to adjust the following parameters To return the settings to the default values press Unity in the Video Process group Note When a pair setting is active it is coupled to the video process on off setting but the above parameter settings are only valid for frame memory source bus 1 The pair setting cannot be used to set the frame memory source bus 2 If you want to set video pr...

Page 365: ...ning it on Recalling Still Images You can recall an image file saved in memory and allocate to any of the FM1 to FM8 outputs Recalling a still image To recall a still image file saved in memory using the thumbnails and assign it to an FM output use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF1 Still and HF1 Recall The Recall menu appears When Pair is on only pair files pairs of mai...

Page 366: ...ss and turn it off 4 Select the desired folder in the folder selection area By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear 5 Using the arrow keys or turning the knob scroll the file thumbnail display Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Scroll Thumbnail display scrolling 1 and upwards Main file Sub ...

Page 367: ... black signal and the input signal The following types of processing are available Pattern key Using the signal from a dedicated pattern generator you can cut out the background image and insert the signal selected on the frame memory source bus or a color matte signal You can adjust the size and position of the pattern and add modifiers External key When processing an image in FM1 3 5 7 you can u...

Page 368: ...lder for writing the freeze image It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following step 5 An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder 5 Press Edit Enable turning it on The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair of FMs selected in step 2 and the combining of the background signal the signal providing the backgr...

Page 369: ...ry Frame Freeze one frame Field Freeze one field Off Release the freeze and delete the recorded freeze image After carrying out the freeze to return to the state immediately before the freeze press Undo in the Freeze group Notes All freeze images written to temporary memory are lost when the system is powered off If you change the frame memory to use as in step 2 before saving the freeze images wr...

Page 370: ...e menu select one of the following methods of combination Pattern Key pattern key Ext Key external key This can only be selected when the pair mode is enabled The signal selected on the frame memory source 2 bus is used as the key signal Mix mix Nam non additive mix If none of the above is selected image combination is not carried out 2 Depending on the selection in step 1 set the following parame...

Page 371: ...t menu You can change the pattern selected in step 2 here After selecting one of the patterns wipe patterns 1 to 24 displayed in the Pattern Select menu you can adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Rate Mix proportion 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 100 00 to 100 00 a 2 Position V Vertical position 1...

Page 372: ...rying out this repositioning Normal mode Movement in the horizontal direction is in two pixel increments Black and white mode Movement in the horizontal direction is in one pixel increments and for each pixel moved the color is inverted Note It is not possible to save an image moved with the reposition function directly to frame memory 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF3 Reposition Lock and HF1 ...

Page 373: ... image To release the lock set Lock to off Continuously Capturing Still Images Record You can continuously capture freeze a sequence of input video frames and store the sequence of the still images over a specified time interval The name of each image recorded in this way consists of a first character string followed by a second string First character string A common part of name assigned to all t...

Page 374: ...361 Note The folder selected here is the destination folder for writing the freeze image It is not possible to change the selection of this folder after the following step 5 An orange bar appears on the selection button for the destination folder 5 Press Record Enable turning it on The signals of frame memory source buses 1 and 2 are assigned to the pair of FMs selected in step 2 the recording fun...

Page 375: ...ned to a user region To execute the effect you must assign the user region to which FM1 is assigned to a region selection button in the numeric keypad control block and the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block For details of assigning to region selection buttons see Chapter 19 Control Panel Setup Panel Volume 3 In the Frame Memory menu effect creation follows the image file names Of the eight cha...

Page 376: ...the operating procedures see Selecting outputs FM and target frame memory page 360 3 Select the desired folder in the folder selection area By pressing More to switch the display you can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear 4 Turn the knob to select the register number in the user region Note To search for an empty register in the user regio...

Page 377: ...ppropriate condition for creating the effect an error message appears For details of error messages see Error Messages in the Appendix Volume 3 10Press OK This creates the effect in the selected user region register To cancel creating the effect Press Cancel Notes The effect is built with the selected files in increasing order of the last three characters of the file name If you do not want to inc...

Page 378: ...A frame memory clip can be named using up to four characters For details of frame memory clip names see Continuously Capturing Still Images Record page 373 Frame memory clip settings For frame memory clips you can make the following settings using a menu or device control block trackball search dial joystick Start point Stop point Loop On Off The above settings can be saved in a snapshot register ...

Page 379: ...ter stopping clip playback Preparations for Operation The preparations for using a frame memory clip hereafter a clip are the same as for a still image operation See Preparations page 355 and Selecting Outputs and Target Frame Memory page 360 Recalling Clips Recalling a clip You can recall a clip from each of frame memories 1 to 8 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF2 Clip and HF1 Recall The Recal...

Page 380: ...u can select from a maximum of 12 folders Thumbnails of the files within the selected folder appear 5 Using the arrow keys or turning the knob scroll the file thumbnail display 6 Press the thumbnail of the clip you want to recall 7 Press Recall Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Scroll Thumbnail display scrolling 1 and upwards Target selection buttons Pair selection buttons Clip file selec...

Page 381: ...rect Recall 2 Press the thumbnail for the file you want to recall This immediately recalls the file To display the subsidiary file in front With the direct recall mode on press Sub Display turning it on Clip Playback You can play a recalled clip by a menu operation or by using the device control block Note With a pair file recalled it is possible to set Pair to Off and carry out a single file oper...

Page 382: ...playback press Play During playback to stop press Stop To cue up Press Cue To play the image at the beginning of the clip Clip Begin Press Rewind To play the image at the end of the clip Clip End Press FF Playback start point pale blue bar Current position red bar Playback end point yellow bar Status buttons These show the timecode values for the start point current position and end point ...

Page 383: ...ed with a menu operation 1 With the device selection buttons select the frame memory clip to be played FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP If the pair mode is on both main and subsidiary FMs light 2 Press the PLAY button turning it on To stop playback press STOP or any of the SHTL JOG CUE REW FF and ALL STOP buttons For details of the buttons in the device control block search dial see Device Control Block Searc...

Page 384: ...tion buttons and select the frame memory clip for playback FM1 CLIP to FM8 CLIP If the pair mode is on both main and subsidiary FMs light 2 Press the PLAY button turning it on To stop playback press STOP or any of the SHTL JOG CUE REW FF and ALL STOP buttons For details of the buttons in the device control block trackball or device control block joystick see Device Control Block Trackball page 68 ...

Page 385: ...gle of the Z ring or amount of movement of the joystick When you pressed the VAR button Playback is at a speed corresponding to the rotation angle of the Z ring or amount of movement of the joystick in the range 1 to 3 times normal speed Clip Creation You save a movie as a clip Note If the number of frame memory clips exceed 100 single files 50 pair files an error appears Using the menu to record ...

Page 386: ...rded 4 To set the clip name press Name A keyboard window appears 5 Enter the clip name and press Enter 6 To start recording press Record Start 7 To end recording press Record Stop To set the clip duration 1 Press Clip Duration A numeric keypad window appears 2 Enter a timecode value or number of frames and press Enter Frame memory selection area Operation target selection buttons Pair selection bu...

Page 387: ...r name and press Enter This confirms the folder name Changing the folder name 1 In the Frame Memory Folder menu select the folder with the arrow keys or by turning the knobs 2 Press Rename A keyboard window appears 3 Enter the new folder name and press Enter Note The following names cannot be used for folders Default Flash1 Flash2 CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 ...

Page 388: ...onfirmation message appears 3 To carry out the deletion select Yes and to cancel the deletion select No Note It is not possible to delete the default folder named Default Clip Output As for still image operation you can use the reposition and lock functions For details of the operation see Image Output page 372 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 No Folder selection 1 to 12 2 Num Number of ...

Page 389: ...luding a clip transition during executing another clip transition the follow on transition does not operate properly Be sure to complete the transition before recalling a snapshot Note When a clip transition is selected as the transition type if one of the wipe direction selection buttons in the transition control block is lit it indicates the direction of clip playback Setting a clip transition T...

Page 390: ...transition type Note For details of the background transition selected here see the various adjustments in the M E 1 Misc Transition menu 6 In the Select group press BKGD Transition 7 Use either of the following methods to set the background transition start point independently of the clip playback timing Move the fader lever to the desired position and in the BKGD Transition Set Timing group pres...

Page 391: ...ion group select the background transition direction 10In the Select group press FM 1 2 Clip 11Using either of the following methods set the start point of the clip Move the fader lever to the desired start point and in the Clip Transition Set Timing group press Start Turn knob 1 to set the number of frames The left end of the reference axis see previous figure is the position of frame 0 Note It i...

Page 392: ... single files In the reverse direction you can split a pair file into two single files Couple You can create a pair file from two single still image files or clip files Separate You can also separate a pair file into two single still image files or clip files Creating a pair file from two single files Note Carrying out the following operation automatically switches Pair to On The following descrip...

Page 393: ...h the file to be moved is stored 3 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF1 Pair Recombination The Pair Recombination menu appears 4 Press Separate The FM1 and FM2 pair file is split into separate single files Moving Files 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF5 Move The Move menu appears The status area shows files to be moved in the upper area and destination files in the lowe...

Page 394: ... area Turn the knobs To delete all files press Select All turning it on When a clip thumbnail is selected the still image files making up the clip are also selected for deletion 4 If necessary turn the knob to check the contents of the frame memory clip through the thumbnail display 5 Press Delete A message for confirming the deletion appears 6 To confirm the deletion press Yes and to cancel press...

Page 395: ...ugh the thumbnail display 4 Press Rename A keyboard window appears 5 Enter the new name then press Enter in the keyboard window Note The following names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COM9 LPT0 LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 This renames the file File Backups To back up a file saved in memory to hard disk use the following procedure ...

Page 396: ...up the saved file Restoring Files Restoring backed up files To recall files backed up on the hard disk use the following procedure 1 In the Frame Memory menu select VF4 File and HF7 Backup Restore The Backup Restore menu appears 2 Press Restore This recalls the backed up file ...

Page 397: ...ol From an External Device 409 Editing Keyboard Settings 410 Safe Title Settings 411 Displaying a List of Transition Rates and Changing the Settings 412 AUX Menu Operations 414 AUX Bus Settings 414 Status Menu 415 Router Control Menu Operations 416 Checking the List of Inputs for Each Destination 416 Switching the Source for Each Destination 417 Video Process 418 Video Process Adjustments of a Pri...

Page 398: ...d to in the menu system as color mix You can also apply modifiers to the selected pattern When the color mix function is not used the result is a flat color and color 1 is always output You carry out color background settings in the Color Bkgd menu This section describes the settings menu for color background 1 as an example Color Background Settings Menu Accessing the Color Bkgd1 menu Use either ...

Page 399: ... display the Mix Ptn Select menu Select any pattern appearing in the Mix Ptn Select menu standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 and you can then adjust the following parameters 3 To adjust color 1 set Color 1 on and to adjust color 2 set Color 2 on then adjust the parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 9...

Page 400: ...rn a See page 282 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Position H Horizontal position 200 00 to 200 00 a 2 Position V Vertical position 200 00 to 200 00 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Multi Number of repetitions of pattern horizontally 1 to 63 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern vertically 1 to 63 3 Inve...

Page 401: ...tion group and applying waviness to the pattern The modulation is always a sine wave 5 To interchange color 1 and color 2 press the Color Invert button turning it on Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern 100 00 to 100 00 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amplitude Amplitude of modulation 0 00 to 100 00 2 Frequency Frequency of modulation 0 00 to 100 0...

Page 402: ...r settings DME channel settings You can carry out copy operations with a simple button operation Swap operations and copy operations on DME data can only be done with a menu operation M E copy and M E swap You can copy and swap the overall bank settings among the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks Note If a DME is being used on the source M E bank then if for example there are insufficient DME chann...

Page 403: ... wipe copy and DME wipe swap You can copy and swap the DME wipe settings among the banks listed in the following table Target bank Target keyer Target data M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 Keys 1 to 4 Key settings excluding the following data items Setup data Key snapshots Key memory PGM PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 Target bank Target data M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST Wipe settings It is not however possible to carry...

Page 404: ...endent key transition control block PGM PST Downstream keys 1 to 4 Target bank Target keyer and data M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST Keys 1 to 4 Downstream keys 1 to 4 Matte data for key fill Matte data for key edge fill Matte data for wipe border edge Color background Matte data for color background 1 Matte data for color background 2 Target bank Target keyer and data M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 PGM PST Keys 1 t...

Page 405: ...opy and Swap and Other Settings DME channel copy and swap You can copy and swap the channel data among DME channels 1 to 4 or DME channels 5 to 8 It is not possible to copy or swap the channel data between DME channels 1 to 4 and DME channels 5 to 8 ...

Page 406: ...wapping matte data Color Copying and swapping color data DME Copying and swapping data by DME channels For an overview of the concepts involved see Copy and Swap page 402 For details of color corrector copy and swap see Chapter 9 Color Corrector page 421 Note To use DME requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set or the MVE 8000A 9000 Multi Format DME Processor Copying and swapping wipe data As an exampl...

Page 407: ... out the copy or swap To undo a copy or swap Press Undo to return to the state before the copy or swap was carried out Copy by Button Operation You can carry out the following copy operations by a simple button operation M E copy Keyer copy Wipe copy DME wipe copy Note On the CCP 6224 6324 it is not possible to carry out a copy by button operation Basic button operation The basic button operation ...

Page 408: ...rol block To copy from M E 1 key 1 to M E 2 key 2 In the key control block M E delegation buttons press M E1 turning it on then hold down the KEY1 button and in the M E 2 independent key transition control block press the KEY2 button Wipe copy button operation Use the WIPE button in the Flexi Pad control block of each M E bank To copy the M E 1 wipe to the M E 2 wipe In the M E 1 Flexi Pad control...

Page 409: ...utton MISC then select VF1 Enable and HF1 Port Enable The Misc Enable Port Enable menu appears with the status area showing the settings of the following ports Switcher Remote 1 to Remote 4 ports RS 422A D sub 9 pin Switcher GPI port parallel 25 pin DME1 DME2 Editor ports RS 422A D sub 9 pin DME1 DME2 GPI ports parallel 25 pin 2 In the Switcher or DME group press on the name of the port for which ...

Page 410: ...wo or more regions the DME is selected with the order of precedence P P M E1 M E2 M E3 Enabling or disabling control from System Manager By installing the BZPS 8000 System Management Software System Manager you can use a computer connected on a network for management of some switcher data and control operations To enable or disable this function use the following procedure 1 In the menu control bl...

Page 411: ...ings Switching the safe title function on or off 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button MISC and select VF2 Safe Title The Misc Safe Title menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the signal to which the settings apply Directly press the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob to make the setting Notes I...

Page 412: ...splay of the independent key transition rate in the Misc Transition menu depends on the selection in the Key Transition group of the Engineering Setup Switcher Transition menu for each of the M E and PGM PST banks When Same On direction and Off direction settings the same is selected in the Key Transition group Only Key or DSK in the PGM PST bank appears When Independ On direction and Off directio...

Page 413: ... Key Off 2 Turn the knobs to set the number of frames To set the fade to black transition rate in the Transition menu 1 In the Misc Transition menu press FTB 2 Turn the knob to set the number of frames Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Rate Transition rate 0 to 999 frames Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Key1 Trans Rate Key 1 transition rate 0 to 999 frames 2 Key2 Tra...

Page 414: ...s to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob to make the setting 2 Press Video Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters To return adjustment values to their defaults press Unity Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 AUX Bus AUX bus selection 1 to 48 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Video Gain Video signal gain 200 00 to 200 00 2 Y Gain Luminance signal gain 200 ...

Page 415: ... button STATS in the menu control block This selects VF1 DME Status and the Status menu appears For each DME channel you can see how the DME is being used in the corresponding operation block The display background color also indicates the following differences in the way in which a DME is being used Blue The DME is currently being used in other than the final program output Red The DME is current...

Page 416: ... VF1 Router Control and HF1 Router Control The following menu appears and the left side of the status area shows a list for destination assignments If in the Assign RTR Mode Setting menu Inhibit is set to On for a destination the corresponding line appears in gray Also if PROT protect is set to ON for a source using a BKSR3xxx or R1xxx series Router remote control a padlock icon appears The right ...

Page 417: ...ck for Router Control in Chapter 19 Volume 3 1 Press Change Xpt The Router Router Control Router Control Change Xpt menu appears Destination Select buttons appear in groups of 16 Source Select buttons appear by group maximum 24 buttons 2 Press one of the Destination Select buttons to select the destination for which you want to switch the source To change the group Press one of the 1 16 17 32 33 4...

Page 418: ...ry Input Signal For each of primary inputs 1 to 80 you can switch video process adjustments on or off and can adjust the parameters Video Gain Y Gain C Gain Hue Delay and Black Level in the Setup menu The adjustments do not however apply to the output video on the MON monitor bus For details of the settings see Signal Input Settings in Chapter 20 Volume 3 Video Process Adjustments on a Particular ...

Page 419: ...on for each bus you can carry out video process adjustments for each input signal The parameters saved are as follows VIDEO GAIN Y GAIN BLACK LEVEL C GAIN HUE DELAY Switch the video process memory on or off in the Setup menu For details of setting operations see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes Frame Memory and Color Correction Key Wipe FM CCR Menu in Chapter 20 Volume 3 Applicable bus Menu used fo...

Page 420: ... settings for an AUX bus page 414 Overview of video process Video Process page 418 This section describes an example on the background A bus of the M E 1 bank For the background B bus or utility bus 1 or 2 make the adjustment with a similar procedure Making video process settings for each bus 1 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button M E1 and select VF7 Misc and HF2 Video Pro...

Page 421: ...d Swap Operations 424 Color Corrector Functions 426 Input Video Processing Operations 426 Primary Color Correction Operations 427 Secondary Color Correction Operations 431 RGB Clip Operations 432 Luminance Processing Operations 432 Spot Color Adjustment 435 Output Video Processing Operations 438 YUV Clip Operations 438 ...

Page 422: ...ility 2 bus it is not possible to select M E 2 on the M E 3 key bus or utility 1 bus Example 2 When M E 2 is selected on the M E 3 background A bus or background B bus key bus utility 1 bus or utility 2 bus it is not possible to select M E 3 on the PGM PST key bus or utility 1 bus Assigning the color corrector input buses to AUX delegation buttons There are two inputs for capturing material to the...

Page 423: ...e color corrector to a cross point button you can make that signal available on that button For details of the assignment process see Cross Point Settings Xpt Assign Menu in Chapter 19 Volume 3 Accessing the CCR menu For color correction operations use the CCR menu To access the CCR menu in the menu control block press the top menu selection button CCR The following description uses CCR1 as an exa...

Page 424: ...ir defaults 1 In the CCR group press Unity A confirmation message appears 2 Press Yes This returns all color corrector settings to their defaults whether CCR is on or off Copy and Swap Operations Copying color corrector data 1 In the CCR menu press VF3 Copy Swap The Copy Swap menu appears The status area shows a copy source list on the left and a copy destination list on the right 2 Using any of t...

Page 425: ...procedure described in the previous item Copying color corrector data In step 3 press Swap instead of Copy To undo copy or swap In the Copy Swap menu press Undo The state before carrying out the copy or swap is restored Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Left No Select copy source data 1 or 2 2 Right No Select copy destination data 1 or 2 ...

Page 426: ...ustment of the C signal Hue delay Black level adjustment To apply input video processing effects use the following procedure 1 In the CCR menu press VF1 CCR1 and HF1 Input Process The Input Process menu appears 2 In the Input Process group press Input Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters To return the parameters to their default settings Press Unity in the Input Process group Kn...

Page 427: ...tion of the maximum point of the gamma curve It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected Applying primary color correction 1 In the CCR menu press VF1 CCR1 and HF2 Primary CCR The Primary CCR menu appears 2 In the Primary CCR group press Primary CCR turning it on 3 In the Primary CCR Adjust group select the setting item Black black balance adjustment White white balance adjustme...

Page 428: ... Source group select the mask source Box signal from dedicated box generator Pattern signal from dedicated pattern generator Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Red Red signal adjustment 100 00 to 100 00 2 Green Green signal adjustment 100 00 to 100 00 3 Blue Blue signal adjustment 100 00 to 100 00 4 All Simultaneous RGB adjustment Red value is shown Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values...

Page 429: ...ti on and replicating the same pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Top position 100 00 to 100 00 2 Left Left position 100 00 to 100 00 3 Right Right position 100 00 to 100 00 4 Bottom Bottom position 100 00 to 100 00 5 Soft Degree of softness of box 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size Pattern size 0 00 to 100 00 2 Soft Degree of softness of pattern edg...

Page 430: ...mask function is common to the primary color correction secondary color correction luminance processing and spot color adjustment functions For example if in primary color correction you set mask 1 to a box then in secondary color correction set mask 1 to a pattern this also changes the setting in primary color correction to the pattern 2 V Multi Number of repetitions of pattern vertically 1 to 63...

Page 431: ...he CCR menu select VF1 CCR1 and HF3 Secondary CCR The Secondary CCR menu appears 2 In the Secondary CCR group press Secondary CCR turning it on 3 In the Secondary CCR Adjust group select the color for which you want to make the setting 4 Adjust the following parameters To return the parameter settings to their default values In the Secondary CCR group press Unity Masking a part of the secondary co...

Page 432: ...n Dark is selected b When White is selected To return the parameters to their default settings In the RGB Clip group press Unity Luminance Processing Operations After converting a signal to which RGB color correction has been applied to a YUV signal divide the luminance levels into three regions referred to as Dark Middle and Bright and apply video signal adjustments to these regions Knob Paramete...

Page 433: ...n input luminance signal at the 0 level Y lift correction adjusting the curvature of the curve Y dark correction adjusting the position of the maximum point of the curve It is also possible to mask part of the region to be corrected Applying luminance processing 1 In the CCR menu press VF1 CCR1 and HF5 Luminance Process Under Dark point Middle Dark point Bright Middle point Over Bright point Dark ...

Page 434: ...gree of boundary softness of the three regions Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 White White balance adjustment 0 00 to 200 00 2 Black Black balance adjustment 100 00 to 100 00 3 Y Lift Curvature of curve 100 00 to 100 00 4 Y Dark Position of maximum point of curve 7 31 to 109 59 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Over B Level Luminance level of the Over Bright point 50 00 to 150 ...

Page 435: ...or region to a different color without affecting other regions You can also mask part of such a region Then for the region other than the region whose color you have changed you can make the following corrections Video signal overall gain adjustment Y signal gain adjustment Y signal offset adjustment C signal gain adjustment C signal hue adjustment 4 Under D Soft Degree of softness at Under Dark p...

Page 436: ...or adjustment see page 437 and output video processing see page 438 are temporarily disabled Turning Sample Mark off restores the former state 4 Adjust the parameters so that the color you want to change is included within the sample mark 5 In the Auto group press Auto Start to adjust the key automatically Note This automatic adjustment does not carry out key gain adjustment If required adjust the...

Page 437: ...the spot color adjustment region 1 In the Spot CCR Output menu press Outer Out Proc in the Outer Out Proc group turning it on 2 Adjust the following parameters 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 4 Gain Key gain 100 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 0 00 to 100 00...

Page 438: ...put The Spot CCR Output menu appears 2 In the Output Process group press Output Process turning it on 3 Adjust the following parameters To return the parameters to their default settings In the Output Process group press Unity YUV Clip Operations For each of the luminance and color difference signals the following processing is available 5 Black Level Black level 116 90 to 116 90 Knob Parameter Ad...

Page 439: ...e target for adjustment Luminance settings for the luminance signal Chroma settings for the color difference signal 4 Depending on the selection in step 3 adjust the following parameters When Luminance is selected When Chroma is selected To return the parameters to their default settings In the YUV Clip group press Unity Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 White Clip White clip adjustment 6...

Page 440: ...Chapter 9 Color Corrector 440 Color Corrector Functions ...

Page 441: ...Chapter 10 Special Functions Simple P P Software 442 Overview 442 Restrictions on Use 442 ...

Page 442: ...switcher For details of operating procedures see Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu in Chapter 18 Volume 3 Restrictions on Use Since this software is a simple version of the program preset function there are some restrictions on use The following lists the points at which operation is different from a normal program preset function For details of the normal operations set the r...

Page 443: ...signal to be inserted in the edge edge fill is restricted as follows The utility 2 bus cannot be selected When using a matte a mix color cannot be used Even if the wipe border width is set to the same numeric value for M E and Simple P P the same image is not obtained The following wipe modifiers cannot be used Replication Shift and Multi Adjust menu adjustments Pairing Modulation Spring Spiral Ch...

Page 444: ...ese buses to the two connectors is recommended Logical assignment of the physical PGM PST In the Engineering Setup Switcher Config Logical M E Assign menu it is not possible to assign the physical PGM PST as a logical PGM PST In the Logical M E to Physical P P group you can select from M E 1 M E 2 and M E 3 Configuration of the switcher bank outputs If Multi Program mode is selected in setup M E C...

Page 445: ...s Available in Two Channel Mode 461 DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three Channel Mode 466 Menu Tree 467 Recalling Menus 467 M E 1 to M E 3 Menus 467 PGM PST Menu 470 Frame Memory Menu 472 Color Bkgd Menu 473 AUX MON Menu 473 CCR Menu 474 Copy Swap Menu 475 Misc Menu 475 Status Menu 475 DME Menu 476 Global Effect Menu 477 Device Menu 477 Macro Menu 478 Key Frame Menu 479 Effect Menu 480 Snapshot Me...

Page 446: ...Engineering Setup Menu 484 Diagnostic Menu 488 ...

Page 447: ...447 Wipe Pattern List Appendix Volume 1 Wipe Pattern List Standard Wipes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ...

Page 448: ...Appendix Volume 1 448 Wipe Pattern List Enhanced Wipes 26 27 29 49 300 301 302 303 304 ...

Page 449: ...449 Wipe Pattern List Appendix Volume 1 Rotary Wipes 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 150 151 156 158 160 162 516 518 604 606 624 661 ...

Page 450: ...Appendix Volume 1 450 Wipe Pattern List Mosaic Wipes 200 201 202 203 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 ...

Page 451: ...451 Wipe Pattern List Appendix Volume 1 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 260 261 262 263 264 265 268 269 266 267 ...

Page 452: ...Appendix Volume 1 452 Wipe Pattern List Random Diamond Dust Wipes 270 271 272 273 274 ...

Page 453: ...453 DME Wipe Pattern List Appendix Volume 1 DME Wipe Pattern List DME Wipe Patterns Available in One Channel Mode Slide Split 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1011 1012 1013 ...

Page 454: ...Appendix Volume 1 454 DME Wipe Pattern List Squeeze Door 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 ...

Page 455: ...455 DME Wipe Pattern List Appendix Volume 1 2D trans 3D trans 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1061 1062 1063 1064 1068 1071 1072 1074 1076 1077 1088 1091 1092 1093 1094 ...

Page 456: ...Appendix Volume 1 456 DME Wipe Pattern List Flip tumble Frame in out 1101 1102 1103 1104 1124 1131 1132 1133 1135 1109 1110 1121 1122 1201 1202 1203 1204 1221 1222 1223 1224 1205 1206 1207 1208 ...

Page 457: ...457 DME Wipe Pattern List Appendix Volume 1 Picture in picture Page turn 1251 1301 1302 1303 1304 1318 1341 1342 1343 1313 1315 1316 1317 1344 1345 1309 1310 1311 1312 1305 1306 1307 1308 ...

Page 458: ...Appendix Volume 1 458 DME Wipe Pattern List Page roll Mirror 1338 1346 1347 1348 1335 1336 1337 1349 1350 1321 1322 1323 1324 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1325 1326 1327 1328 1355 1356 1357 1358 ...

Page 459: ...459 DME Wipe Pattern List Appendix Volume 1 Sphere Character trail Wave Ripple 1365 1371 1372 1378 1379 1381 ...

Page 460: ...Appendix Volume 1 460 DME Wipe Pattern List Split slide Sparkle Mosaic Defocus 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1391 1393 1394 1396 1398 1399 1701 1702 ...

Page 461: ...ammable DME The illustrations for patterns 1901 to 1999 show an effect register number or register name DME Wipe Patterns Available in Two Channel Mode Slide Squeeze 1901 1999 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 ...

Page 462: ...Appendix Volume 1 462 DME Wipe Pattern List 3D trans Picture in picture 2631 2632 2633 2634 2642 2644 2651 2652 ...

Page 463: ...463 DME Wipe Pattern List Appendix Volume 1 Page turn 2713 2715 2716 2717 2718 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2701 2702 2703 2704 ...

Page 464: ...Appendix Volume 1 464 DME Wipe Pattern List Page roll 2733 2735 2736 2737 2738 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 2721 2722 2723 2724 ...

Page 465: ...ix Volume 1 Brick Frame in out User programmable DME The illustrations for patterns 2901 to 2999 show an effect register number or register name 2801 2802 2803 2804 2811 2812 2813 2814 2851 2852 2853 2854 2861 2862 2863 2864 2901 2999 ...

Page 466: ...me 1 466 DME Wipe Pattern List DME Wipe Patterns Available in Three Channel Mode Brick User programmable DME The illustrations for patterns 3901 to 3999 show an effect register number or register name 3601 3901 3999 ...

Page 467: ...u Organization page 109 Note Some menus may not appear depending on the model M E 1 to M E 3 Menus The functions in the M E 1 M E 2 and M E 3 menus are the same but the menu page numbers are distinguished as follows M E 1 menus 11xx M E 2 menus 12xx M E 3 menus 13xx EXT DISPL M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P MENU COPY FRAME MEM COLOR BKGD AUX MON COPY SWAP MISC DME GLB EFF RTR DEV KEY FRAME SNAP SHOT SHOT BO...

Page 468: ...1115 2 Wipe Adjust 1116 1 DME Wipe Adjust 1116 3 Mix Ptn Select 1112 2 Pattern Select 1116 2 Matte Adjust 1112 1 Wipe Adjust 1116 1 Mix Ptn Select 1112 2 Pattern Select 1116 2 Mix Ptn Select 1112 2 Main Mask 1113 Matte Adjust 1112 1 Wipe Adjust 1116 1 Pattern Select 1116 2 1ch Pattern Select 1116 4 2ch Pattern Select 1116 5 Remove From Begin 1116 7 VF1 Key1 VF2 Key2 VF3 Key3 VF4 Key4 VF5 Wipe VF6 ...

Page 469: ...4 1 Multi Adjust 1155 1 Multi Adjust 1156 1 Mix Pattern Select 1154 2 HF1 1ch 1161 HF2 2ch 1162 HF3 3ch 1163 HF4 Edge Direction 1164 HF5 Modify 1165 HF7 DME Wipe Snapshot 1167 Remove From Begin 1165 1 Clip 1176 1 Transition 1171 Snapshot 1177 HF1 Transition 1171 HF2 Video Process 1172 HF3 Key Priority 1173 HF4 Next Key Priority 1174 HF5 Key Assign 1175 HF6 Clip Transition 1176 HF7 Snapshot 1177 M ...

Page 470: ...just 1416 3 Pattern Select 1416 2 Mix Ptn Select 1412 2 Matte Adjust 1412 1 Wipe Adjust 1416 1 Mix Ptn Select 1412 2 Pattern Select 1416 2 Mix Ptn Select 1412 2 Main Mask 1413 Matte Adjust 1412 1 Wipe Adjust 1416 1 Pattern Select 1416 2 1ch Pattern Select 1416 4 2ch Pattern Select 1416 5 Remove From Begin 1416 7 PGM PST P P VF1 DSK1 VF2 DSK2 VF3 DSK3 VF4 DSK4 VF5 Wipe VF6 DME Wipe VF7 Misc P P but...

Page 471: ...Modify 1465 HF7 DME Wipe Snapshot 1467 HF1 Transition 1471 HF2 Video Process 1472 HF3 Key Priority 1473 HF4 Next Key Priority 1474 HF5 Key Assign 1475 HF6 Clip Transition 1476 HF7 Snapshot 1477 Matte Adjust 1454 1 Multi Adjust 1455 1 Multi Adjust 1456 1 Remove From Begin 1465 1 Clip 1476 1 Transition 1471 Snapshot 1477 Mix Pattern Select 1454 2 PGM PST VF1 DSK1 VF2 DSK2 VF3 DSK3 VF4 DSK4 VF5 Wipe ...

Page 472: ...e 2513 HF4 Animation Record 2514 HF5 Create Key Frame 2515 HF7 Field Invert 2517 HF1 Recall 2521 HF2 Play 2522 HF3 Record 2523 HF4 Ancillary Enable 2525 HF1 Reposition 2531 HF2 Lock 2532 HF1 Pair Recombination 2541 HF4 Move 2544 HF5 Delete 2545 HF6 Rename 2546 HF7 Backup Restore 2547 HF1 Format 2561 HF2 Backup Restore 2562 Input Adjust 2513 1 Pattern Adjust 2513 2 Pattern Select 2513 3 FRAME MEM b...

Page 473: ...ix Volume 1 Color Bkgd Menu AUX MON Menu Color Bkgd VF1 Color Bkgd1 2210 VF2 Color Bkgd2 2220 Mix Pattern Select 2210 1 Mix Pattern Select 2220 1 COLOR BKGD COLOR BKGD button AUX MON Aux Mon VF1 Aux Bus 2311 AUX MON button ...

Page 474: ...1 Mask 2 Adjust 2412 3 Mask 1 Adjust 2412 1 Mask 2 Adjust 2412 3 Mask 1 Adjust 2422 1 Mask 2 Adjust 2422 3 Mask 1 Adjust 2422 1 Mask 2 Adjust 2422 3 Mask 1 Adjust 2422 1 Mask 2 Adjust 2422 3 Mask 1 Adjust 2422 1 Mask 2 Adjust 2422 3 Mask Ptn Select 2412 2 Mask Ptn Select 2412 4 Mask Ptn Select 2412 2 Mask Ptn Select 2412 4 Mask Ptn Select 2412 2 Mask Ptn Select 2412 4 Mask Ptn Select 2412 2 Mask P...

Page 475: ...HF5 Matte 3115 HF6 Color 3116 HF7 DME 3117 VF1 Copy Swap COPY SWAP Copy Swap COPY SWAP button VF1 Enable VF2 Safe Title 3221 VF3 Transition 3231 MISC Misc HF1 Port Enable 3211 HF2 Plug In Editor 3212 HF3 Side Flags 3213 Side Flags 7331 7 Side Flags Button Assign 7322 10 MISC button VF1 DME Status 3311 STATS Status STATS button ...

Page 476: ...62 HF3 Process 4163 HF4 Graphic 4164 HF1 Sketch 4171 HF2 Metal 4172 HF3 Dim Fade 4173 HF4 Glow 4174 Mask 4127 Mask 4127 Mask 4127 HF1 Type 4141 DME Wave 4141 1 Mosaic Glass 4141 2 Flag 4141 3 Twist 4141 4 Ripple 4141 5 Rings 4141 7 Broken Glass 4141 8 Flying Bars 4141 9 Blind 4141 10 Split 4141 11 Split Slide 4141 12 Mirror 4141 13 Multi Mirror 4141 14 Texture Ptn Select 4156 1 Copy Swap 4156 2 Li...

Page 477: ...rity 4221 HF2 Brick 4222 HF3 Shadow 4223 HF7 Combine Gp Select 4227 GLB EFF GLB EFF button a When using the MKS 6470 DME Board Set the button is indicated as VF1 Ch1 Ch2 VF1 GPI Timeline VF2 P Bus Timeline VF3 DDR VTR HF1 GPI Timeline 5311 HF1 P Bus Timeline 5321 HF1 Cueup Play 5331 HF2 Timeline 5332 HF3 File List 5333 Device DEV Rewind Action 5311 1 Rewind Action 5321 1 Rewind Action 5332 1 DEV b...

Page 478: ...F3 Menu Macro Register VF4 Timeline HF2 Lock 5412 HF3 Copy 5413 HF6 Delete 5416 HF7 Rename 5417 HF1 Recall Run 5431 HF2 Lock 5432 HF3 Copy 5433 HF6 Delete 5436 HF7 Rename 5437 HF1 Timeline 5441 On Line Edit 7142 2 Off Line Edit 7143 2 Menu Macro Edit 7144 2 Rewind Action 5441 1 MCRO button ...

Page 479: ...5 HF7 Region Select 6117 KEY FRAME M E 1 6113 1 M E 2 6113 2 M E 3 6113 3 P P 6113 4 User1 6113 5 User2 6113 6 User3 6113 7 User4 6113 8 User5 6113 9 User6 6113 10 User7 6113 11 User8 6113 12 DME 3D Trans Local 6113 13 DME 3D Trans Global 6113 14 DME Effect 6113 15 DME Global Effect 6113 16 10 Key Region Assign 7321 7 KEY FRAME button ...

Page 480: ...7 HF1 Attribute 6241 HF2 Lock 6242 HF3 Copy Merge 6243 HF4 Move 6244 HF5 Swap 6245 HF6 Delete 6246 HF7 Rename 6247 HF1 Attribute 6251 HF2 Lock 6252 HF3 Copy Merge 6253 HF4 Move 6254 HF5 Swap 6255 HF6 Delete 6256 HF7 Rename 6257 EFF HF1 Store 6211 HF2 Lock 6212 HF3 Copy 6213 HF4 Move 6214 HF5 Swap 6215 HF6 Delete 6216 HF7 Rename 6217 Edit 6211 1 VF1 Master Timeline VF2 Effect 1 99 VF3 Effect 101 19...

Page 481: ...t VF4 DME Snapshot VF5 Key Snapshot SNAP SHOT Edit 6311 1 HF2 Lock 6332 HF3 Copy 6333 HF4 Move 6334 HF5 Swap 6335 HF6 Delete 6336 HF7 Rename 6337 HF1 Store 6311 HF2 Lock 6312 HF3 Copy 6313 HF4 Move 6314 HF5 Swap 6315 HF6 Delete 6316 HF7 Rename 6317 HF2 Lock 6342 HF3 Copy 6343 HF4 Move 6344 HF5 Swap 6345 HF6 Delete 6346 HF7 Rename 6347 HF1 Attribute 6351 HF2 Lock 6352 HF3 Copy 6353 HF4 Move 6354 HF...

Page 482: ...enu Tree Shotbox Menu Shotbox VF1 Register VF2 Module Like Control HF1 Store Recall 6411 HF2 Lock 6412 HF3 Copy 6413 HF4 Move 6414 HF5 Swap 6415 HF6 Delete 6416 HF7 Rename 6417 HF2 Bank1 4 SHOT BOX Edit 6411 1 SHOTBOX button ...

Page 483: ...rame Memory Folder 7152 HF1 All 7161 HF2 Import Export 7162 HF1 Directory 7171 HF2 Unit ID Copy 7172 HF3 Group ID Copy 7173 File VF1 Setup Init VK Mem VF2 Effect VF3 Snapshot VF4 Shotbox Macro VF5 Frame Mem VF6 All External File VF7 Configure FILE File Edit 7111 1 File Edit 7112 1 File Edit 7113 1 File Edit 7114 1 File Edit 7121 1 File Edit 7122 1 File Edit 7123 1 File Edit 7124 1 File Edit 7131 1...

Page 484: ...tenance 7317 Panel Assign 7312 1 Switcher Assign 7312 2 Aspect 7313 1 Detail Information 7316 1 License 7316 6 Unit Config 7316 8 Texture Package 7316 9 Install 7316 10 Setup Operation Lock 7317 1 Switcher Aspect 7313 2 DME Aspect 7313 3 License Management 7316 7 Engineering Setup VF1 System VF2 Panel VF3 Switcher VF4 DME VF5 DCU VF6 Router Tally ENG SETUP ENG SETUP button to following pages ...

Page 485: ...le Copy 7322 8 Name Export 7322 9 Side Flags Button Assign 7322 10 Mixer Xpt Assign 7322 11 RTR Mode Setting 7323 1 Utility Module Assign 7324 1 Key 2 4 Bus Button Assign 7324 2 GPI Input 7325 1 GPI Output 7325 3 DCU Serial Port Assign 7325 4 Effect Mode 7326 2 Flexi Pad Mode 7326 3 Custom Button 7326 4 Sensitivity 7326 5 Macro 7326 6 Button Tally 7326 9 Key Trans Link 7321 2 External Bus Link 732...

Page 486: ...ugh 7333 3 Safe Titile 7333 4 4 3 Crop 7333 5 Preset Color Mix 7334 1 Transition Curve 7334 2 Show Key 7335 1 Key Auto Drop 7335 2 Internal Bus Link 7336 1 GPI Link 7336 4 M E Link 7336 6 Key Transition Link 7336 7 Remote Assign 7337 1 GPI Input 7337 2 GPI Output 7337 4 Aux Control 7337 5 DME Type Setting 7337 6 Side Flags 3213 Side Flags Button Assign 7322 10 Link Bus Select 7336 2 Link Table Sel...

Page 487: ...7 TBC Center 7341 1 Monitor Output 7343 1 DME1 GPI Input 7344 1 DME1 GPI Output 7344 3 DME2 GPI Input 7344 4 DME2 GPI Output 7344 6 H L Set 7352 1 P Bus Setting 7355 1 VTR Setting 7355 2 DDR SD9P Setting 7355 3 DDR VDCP Setting 7355 4 Extended VTR Setting 7355 5 External Box Assign 7361 1 New 7363 1 Modify 7363 2 New 7364 1 Modify 7364 2 New 7365 1 Modify 7365 2 Set 7366 1 Source Assign 7367 1 H L...

Page 488: ...Appendix Volume 1 488 Menu Tree Diagnostic Menu Diagnostic VF1 Error Info VF3 System Info HF1 Error Status 7411 HF2 Error Log 7412 LAN Status 7431 DIAG DIAG button ...

Page 489: ...for use by the purchasers of the equip ment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur pose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation ...

Page 490: ...DVS 9000 9000SF System SY 3 704 906 11 1 2002 Sony Corporation ...

Page 491: ...DVS 9000 9000SF System With CCP 8000 Series Center Control Panel User s Guide Production Switcher System Volume 2 English 2nd Edition Software Version 8 00 and Later ...

Page 492: ...F MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON TORT CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF Sony Corporation r...

Page 493: ...Graphics Display Operation 516 Canceling Virtual Images 518 DME Special Effect Operations 519 Special Effects 519 Operations Common to All DME Special Effects 533 Border Settings 533 Crop Settings 535 Beveled Edge Settings 537 Key Border Settings 539 Art Edge Settings 540 Flex Shadow Settings 548 Wipe Crop Settings 555 Color Mix Settings 559 Defocus Settings 560 Blur Settings 563 Multi Move Settin...

Page 494: ...s 606 Trail Settings 611 Motion Decay Settings 615 Keyframe Strobe Settings 617 Wind Settings 619 Spotlighting Settings 621 Background Settings 636 Separate Sides Settings 637 Shaped Video Settings 638 Invert Settings 640 Key Density Settings 640 Key Source Selection 641 Interpolation Settings 642 Global Effect Operations 644 Combiner Settings 645 Brick Settings 653 Shadow Settings 656 ...

Page 495: ...Processor The MVE 8000A is a Digital Multi Effects with multi format support To connect the DME to a DVS 9000 series switcher install an optional MKE 8021A Input Output Board in the MVE 8000A and use an SDI interface Note When using the SDI interface the following operations are required You must set the input signals from the switcher to the MVE 8000A AUX bus outputs and signals returned to the s...

Page 496: ...Images are placed in one of two types of coordinate space source coordinate space and target coordinate space The source coordinate space is a three dimensional coordinate space with reference to the image itself The x and y axes are defined parallel to the plane of the image and the z axis is defined perpendicular to the plane of the image When you move the image the coordinate axes also move The...

Page 497: ...l channels are called the global coordinate space By switching from local to global coordinate space you can add new movement to the movement of images in individual channels and also apply transformation effects to multiple channels that have been combined by Global effects page 644 Local coordinate space and global coordinate space Three dimensional parameters Three dimensional parameters are x ...

Page 498: ...itor x 4 00 y 3 00 z 0 00 Lower left corner of image or monitor x 4 00 y 3 00 z 0 00 Values for x y and z axes 4 3 mode Values for 16 9 mode Origin at center of image source coordinate space or center of monitor target coordinate space x 0 00 y 0 00 z 0 00 Upper right corner of image or monitor x 4 00 y 2 25 z 0 00 Lower left corner of image or monitor x 4 00 y 2 25 z 0 00 4 00 4 00 3 00 3 00 x ax...

Page 499: ...mensional space Pressing the CTR button in the device control block sets the current three dimensional parameter values to the closest detent points Operation mode Limits of three dimensional transformation parameters Location XYZ 4 3 333 3333 to 333 3333 16 9 250 0000 to 250 0000 Rotation Spin 999 9999 to 999 9999 Axis Location 4 3 333 3333 to 333 3333 16 9 250 0000 to 250 0000 Location Size 0 00...

Page 500: ...e transformation operation modes if you switch to the target coordinate space after setting up a three dimensional transformation in the source coordinate space the setting values in the source coordinate space three dimensional parameter values are converted to values in the target coordinate space source target conversion Once a conversion has taken place the original source coordinate space par...

Page 501: ...image on the x axis y axis or z axis The direction of movement differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space Image movement in the source coordinate space Image movement in the target coordinate space Rotation Rotates the image on the x axis y axis or z axis The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipul...

Page 502: ...d axis The type of rotation differs depending on whether you are manipulating the image in the source coordinate space or the target coordinate space The way the image rotates around an axis is the same as in Rotation mode Axis Location Moves an axis of rotation in the source coordinate space Axis movement Rotation around the y axis Rotation around the x axis Rotation around the z axis Rotation ar...

Page 503: ...ion of the two dimensional image displayed on the monitor shrinking and magnification does not change the shape of the image Magnification and shrinking in the source coordinate space Magnification and shrinking in the target coordinate space Aspect In the source coordinate space changes the aspect ratio in the x axis direction and y axis direction either independently or simultaneously Change of ...

Page 504: ...aphics Display Graphics display is a function that allows you to display wire frames coordinate axes and a grid over the current DME image to make it easier to create effects in three dimensional coordinate space Graphics displayed by this function can also be output to the monitor output connector To make graphics display settings use the DME menu For details see Graphics Display Operation page 5...

Page 505: ... which channel you are using a useful feature when you are working with multiple channels Channel IDs are displayed differently in local and global coordinate space In local coordinate space the channel number is displayed along with F or B to indicate whether you are looking at the front F or back B of the current wire frame For example 1F means the front of the wire frame on channel 1 in local c...

Page 506: ... of images in a larger space The range displayed on a normal monitor screen is indicated by a frame To automatically erase the graphic display Turn Auto Erase on The graphic display is erased automatically whenever a keyframe is executed It is displayed again after the keyframe ends after the time set in Recovery Time Flex Shadow center axis When using the Flex Shadow function see page 548 turn Fl...

Page 507: ...l Parameter Display You can display a three dimensional parameter list for the currently controlled image When more than one DME channel is selected the status of the reference channel is displayed For the method of displaying a parameter list and an example display see Viewing the three dimensional parameter details page 514 ...

Page 508: ...ansformations page 496 Basic Operations This section explains how to use the device control block trackball to carry out three dimensional transformations Function assignment buttons Operating buttons Z ring DEV USER M E1 DME1 DME5 MENU SHIFT M E2 DME2 DME6 ASP PERS SUB AXIS LOC MAIN LOCAL K1 CB1 GLB K2 CB2 CLR WORK BUFR M E3 DME3 DME7 X P P DME4 DME8 Y Z CTR RUN CTRL LOC SIZE ASP LOC XYZ LOC ROT ...

Page 509: ...TRGT button is lit pressing this button enables the trackball to control the perspective of the image in the x axis and y axis directions The Z ring controls the distance to the viewpoint LOC location SIZE When this button is lit the Z ring controls the image size The trackball moves the image in the x axis and y axis directions LOC location XYZ When this button is lit the trackball moves the imag...

Page 510: ...oordinate space TRGT button Selects the target coordinate space SRC and TRGT cannot be selected at the same time 3 Press the button for the operation you want to do turning it on to select the transformation mode The trackball and Z ring are assigned to the selected three dimensional coordinate space transformation mode For details of the three dimensional transformation operation modes see Transf...

Page 511: ...ring To change the perspective on the image With the TRGT button selected in step 2 press the ASP PERS button turning it on You can change the perspective of the image on the x and y axes with the trackball and change the distance to the view point with the Z ring To change the skew of the image With the SRC button selected in step 2 press the ASP PERS button turning it on while holding down the S...

Page 512: ...sformation to a specific axis press the X Y or Z button tuning it on This enables the trackball and Z ring operations on the selected axis only Functions assignable to trackball and Z ring operations Button Usable coordinate space Trackball x direction Trackball y direction Z ring LOC XYZ Source target Move image on x axis Move image on y axis Move image on z axis ROT Source target Rotate image on...

Page 513: ...shows the parameters for the reference channel When both Global and Local are selected the three dimensional parameters are shown for the channel the reference channel for which the button is lit green ASP PERS Source Change aspect ratio on x axis Change aspect ratio on y axis Change aspect ratio on x and y axes simultaneously Target Shift view point on x axis Shift view point on y axis Change dis...

Page 514: ...left part of the screen The Status menu appears This menu shows the three dimensional parameters for the DME reference channel currently selected in the device control block Type of three dimensional space a Operation mode for three dimensional transforms b Value of X Value of Y Value of Z a This shows one of Local Target Local Source Global Target and Global Source b This shows one of Loc XYZ Loc...

Page 515: ...nter them directly from the numeric keypad control block Entering three dimensional parameter values 1 In the device control block press the X Y or Z button turning it on The numeric keypad control block enters a mode in which you can enter parameters for the selected axis 2 Enter a parameter value with the numeric keypad The number of significant digits after a decimal point is 4 3 Press the ENTE...

Page 516: ... the three dimensional transform parameters in the working buffer press the CLR WORK BUFR button in the device control block To clear all of the parameters in the working buffer and initialize the DME system press the CLR WORK BUFR button twice in rapid succession It is necessary to do this for both the local coordinate space and global coordinate space As the initial DME state you can specify whe...

Page 517: ...show the range not displayed on a normal monitor turn Scale on and set the following parameters As the value of the setting grows the monitor shrinks further toward the center point 6 To automatically erase the graphic display while the keyframes are executing press Auto Erase turning it on and then set the following parameter Outputting graphics to the monitor output connector In the Graphic menu...

Page 518: ...s executed with an extreme degree of perspective the part of the image which is beyond the imaginary view point can wrap around and show on the other side The wrapped around portion is referred to as a virtual image Using the DME menu you can make a setting not to show the virtual images Canceling virtual images 1 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF2 Video Key The Video Key menu appears...

Page 519: ...ional Differences With Models of DME page 946 Special Effects Edge effects Name Effect Image Border See page 533 Adds a border to the image frame You can adjust the width or thickness of the border its color and the softness of the border edges Crop See page 535 Crops away the edges of the image You can crop the top bottom left and right sides individually or all together You can also soften the c...

Page 520: ...dge See page 537 Gives an image a beveled edge You can set the edge width and color The inner edge softness and edge boundary softness can also be set Key Border See page 539 Adds borders to keys or gives a key consisting of an outline only Name Effect Image Color Lights ...

Page 521: ...uter side of the input image The following items can be set Art edge width and position Separate softening of the art edge inner and outer sides Color of art edges Examples of Art Edge source Name Effect Image Gradation Matte Radial Gradation Rainbow Matte Radial Rainbow Examples of Art Edge source Rainbow Matte ...

Page 522: ...rated full size DME key signal Shadow shrinking and magnification Shadow position Shadow color and density Center axis of deformation Shadow slant and perspective Drop Shadow Allows a shadow to be added to the image using only one DME channel The following settings can be made for the shadow Shadow position Shadow density Shadow color Edge soft function Wipe Crop See page 555 Crops the video image...

Page 523: ...a rounded blurring to the whole image Multi Move See page 565 Shrinks the image and lines up a number of copies vertically and horizontally You can specify the center point of the shrinking the shrinking ratio and the aspect ratio of the image screen Name Effect Image Sepia See page 566 Overlays a specified color onto the image You can adjust the sepia color that is overlaid and specify the degree...

Page 524: ...chroma of the image Mosaic See page 569 Divides the image into small tiles so that it looks like a mosaic You can specify the size and aspect ratio of the tiles Mask See page 575 Masks part of the picture so that special effects are applied only inside a selected pattern Name Effect Image MASK NORMAL MASK INVERT Video image Effect video image Mosaic Video image Effect video image Mosaic ...

Page 525: ...a metallic gloss like that from gold silver or a rainbow colored surface A metallic gloss can also be given to a freely selected color Dim and Fade See page 573 The Dim effect makes the image darker as it recedes into the distance The Fade effect makes the image fade into the background as it recedes into the distance Glow See page 574 Softens the edges of highlights giving an effect like being st...

Page 526: ...e 578 Nonlinear effects Name Effect Image Wave See page 580 Produces a wave like effect in the image Mosaic Glass See page 585 Makes the image rougher and finer at a specified interval Flag See page 585 Applies an effect like a flag waving in the wind Twist See page 585 Twists the image Ripple See page 586 Applies an effect like ripples moving across the image ...

Page 527: ...ass with shards flying outward Flying Bar See page 592 Divides the image into bars which peel off in two blocks as they move Blind See page 593 Divides the image into bars or wedges with blocks rotating like the slats of venetian blinds Split See page 594 Splits the image upper and lower left and right Split Slide See page 594 Divides the image into bars which slide alternately in reverse directio...

Page 528: ... Divides the image into originals and reflections lining them up vertically and horizontally Kaleidoscope See page 597 Creates an image like a view into a kaleidoscope Lens See page 597 Creates an image like a view through a lens Circle See page 599 Makes a circle with the image Panorama See page 599 Curves the upper and lower edges of the image to emphasize the sense of perspective Name Effect Im...

Page 529: ...a turning page Roll See page 601 Rolls the image up Cylinder See page 601 Winds the whole image onto a cylinder Sphere See page 602 Winds the whole image onto a sphere Explosion See page 602 Divides the image into fragments which expand as they fly out Swirl See page 603 Swirls the image Name Effect Image ...

Page 530: ...y from a specified part Character Trail See page 606 Extends the edge of the image like a trail Name Effect Image Lighting See page 606 Provides the effect of light striking the image Spotlighting See page 621 Creates the effect of a spotlight striking the surface of the image Name Effect Image Normal Mat Specular ...

Page 531: ...e 611 Recursively freezes the input video at regular intervals so that a trail of afterimages is created You can make the afterimages stardust trails Motion Decay See page 615 Blurs the motion of a moving video by creating afterimages of the moving video You can make the afterimages stardust trails Keyframe Strobe See page 617 Freezes the video each time the effect passes a keyframe You can make t...

Page 532: ...ustment Adjusts the key density for the key signal input to the DME see page 640 Key source selection Selects either the key signals received from the switcher or the key signals generated in the DME for application to the front and back of the image see page 641 Color mix setting This is a combination of two colors with a pattern generator This color mix signal can be used to fill parts such as a...

Page 533: ...In the device control block select the target DME channel 2 In the menu control block select the top menu selection button DME The DME menu appears Border Settings Adding a border 1 In the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF1 Border Crop The Border Crop menu appears 2 Press Border turning it on The Border effect is enabled You can adjust the border width parameters with the knobs 3 Set the parameters ...

Page 534: ... to 6 00 2 Left Border width on left side 8 00 to 8 00 3 Right Border width on right side 8 00 to 8 00 4 Bottom Border width on bottom side 6 00 to 6 00 5 Density Border density 0 00 to 100 00 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Border width on left and right sides Left value shown 2 V Border width on top and bottom sides Top value shown 3 All Border width on all sides...

Page 535: ...s according to the mix color signal or external video signal Softening the border edges Press Border Soft turning it on and set the following parameters Crop Settings Cropping the image 1 In the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF1 Border Crop The Border Crop menu appears 2 Press Crop turning it on The Crop effect is enabled You can adjust degree of cropping with the knobs Knob Parameter Adjustment Se...

Page 536: ... 2 V Crop positions on top and bottom sides Top value shown 3 All Crop positions on all sides Left value shown Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Crop position on top side 3 00 to 3 00 2 Left Crop position on left side 4 00 to 4 00 3 Right Crop position on right side 4 00 to 4 00 4 Bottom Crop position on bottom side 3 00 to 3 00 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter A...

Page 537: ...r of effect application is Crop Invert Invert Crop Set an axis of symmetry at the center of the input video and invert only the desired area of video horizontally and vertically around that axis of symmetry The order of effect application is Invert Crop Beveled Edge Settings Applying a beveled edge 1 In the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF2 Beveled Edge The Beveled Edge menu appears 2 Press Beveled...

Page 538: ...s 0 00 to 3 00 3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all four edges Value of H shown Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left and right edges 0 00 to 4 00 2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top and bottom edges 0 00 to 2 25 3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all four edges Value of H shown Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Adjust luminance of t...

Page 539: ...e MVE 8000A Applying key borders 1 In the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF3 Key Border The Key Border menu appears 2 Press Key Border turning it on This enables key borders and you can now use the knobs to adjust the parameters 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 a 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Inner Soft Softness o...

Page 540: ...supported on the MVE 8000A Applying art edges 1 In the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF4 Art Edge The Art Edge menu appears 2 Press Art Edge turning it on Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Simultaneously adjust width of left and right key borders 0 00 to 100 00 2 V Simultaneously adjust width of top and bottom key borders 0 00 to 100 00 3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all four key b...

Page 541: ...dth of top and bottom edges Value of Top shown 3 All Simultaneously adjust width of all four edges Value of Left shown 5 Density Density of edges 0 00 to 100 00 Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Width of top edge 0 00 to 6 00 2 Left Width of left edge 0 00 to 8 00 3 Right Width of right edge 0 00 to 8 00 4 Bottom Width of bottom edge 0 00 to 6 00 5 Density Density ...

Page 542: ...idth of right edge 0 00 to 8 00 4 Bottom Width of bottom edge 0 00 to 4 50 5 Density Density of edges 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Position of top edge 3 00 to 3 00 2 Left Position of left edge 4 00 to 4 00 3 Right Position of right edge 4 00 to 4 00 4 Bottom Position of bottom edge 3 00 to 3 00 5 All Adjust the position of all four edges Value of H shown Knob Para...

Page 543: ...2 on the outer side according to the shape of the art edge Radial Rainbow The hue of Color 1 on the inner side changes into Color 2 on the outer side according to the shape of the art edge Top Left Right Bottom Example Moving the right edge position in the minus direction Art edge portion Position before moving Position after moving Moving in the minus direction Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting v...

Page 544: ...the system as follows 4 3 mode 16 9 mode Flat Color Gradation Matte Rainbow Matte Radial Gradation Radial Rainbow Rainbow Gradation Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Position of gradation border in horizontal direction 8 00 to 8 00 2 V Position of gradation border in vertical direction 6 00 to 6 00 3 Soft Softness of gradation border region 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setti...

Page 545: ...ng values 3 Soft Softness of gradation border region 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Position of gradation border in horizontal direction 8 00 to 8 00 2 V Position of gradation border in vertical direction 6 00 to 6 00 3 RBW Soft Softness of rainbow border region 0 00 to 100 00 4 GRD Soft Softness of gradation border region 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setti...

Page 546: ...owing parameters Color 1 settings Color 2 settings Note Color 2 cannot be set when Flat Color is selected in the Art Edge Source group V V H H Color 1 Color 1 Color 2 Color 2 Position determined by H and V values When Angle see step 3 is 0 Determined by the value of Angle see step 3 Border Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to...

Page 547: ...nship is as shown below with the hue changing within the Hue Offset range of Color 1 and Color 2 Rounding art edge corners Press Round Corner turning it on The art edge corners on the inner and outer sides are rounded Note This function is available only when Soft is on Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Offset...

Page 548: ...ects cannot be selected Applying a flex shadow 1 In the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF5 Flex Drop Shadow The Flex Shadow menu appears 2 Press Flex Shadow turning it on This enables flex shadows and you can now use the knobs to adjust the parameters Note The Flex shadow function cannot be enabled when the following functions are enabled Any nonlinear effect Brick Shadow 3 Adjust the following para...

Page 549: ...ee page 559 Ext Video an external video signal input to the Ext IN connector 6 Only if Flat Color is selected in step 5 adjust the following parameters Adjusting the size of the flex shadow 1 In the Flex Drop Shadow menu press Size turning it on 2 Set the following parameters 5 Density Density of shadow 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting value...

Page 550: ...djustment Setting values 1 Size H Enlarge or shrink horizontally 0 00 to 2 00 2 Size V Enlarge or shrink vertically 0 00 to 2 00 3 Size All Enlarge or shrink horizontally and vertically Value of Size H shown 4 Soft a Softness of shadow 0 00 to 100 00 5 Density Density of shadow 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Axis Loc H Move the shadow center axis horizontally 8 00 to 8 0...

Page 551: ...just the following parameters When the default Axis Loc setting is used Picture Flex shadow Axis Loc position Shadow skewed with Axis Loc set at the lower left corner of the picture Shadow size and perspective adjusted with default Axis Loc setting Shadow skewed with Axis Loc set at the midpoint on the left edge of the picture Axis Loc H Axis Loc V Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Skew H...

Page 552: ...is Loc V set with Axis Loc V Invert the shadow in the vertical direction The inversion is applied around the axis of the knob 1 parameter Axis Loc H set with Axis Loc Setting a combine shadow When there are several images adds a flex shadow in the depth of an image or overlays multiple flex shadows Perspective H 100 Perspective H 100 Perspective V 100 Perspective V 100 Picture When H is enabled Wh...

Page 553: ...Over Over Under Under Over Under Combine shadow is enabled Density is set to 100 00 Combine shadow is enabled Density is set to 0 00 Shadow Shadow No combine shadow is set Over Over Under Under Over Under Video Video Example 2 Flex Shadow is enabled on one channel only Over Over Under Under Over Under Over Over Under Under Over Under Combine shadow is enabled Density is set to 100 00 Combine shado...

Page 554: ...e The flow of flex pattern creation will be explained using the following pattern as an example 1 Press Flex Shadow turning it on 2 In the Flex Shadow group select External 3 Turn Axis Loc on and use knob 2 to set the Axis Loc V parameter so that the center of the flex shadow deformation is at the bottom of the picture The following steps will be easier if you display the flex shadow axis graphic ...

Page 555: ...ess you set Bkgd in the HF1 Bkgd menu to on the wipe crop effect will not function Applying the wipe crop effect To select the pattern 1 In the DME menu select VF1 Edge and HF6 Wipe Crop The Wipe Crop menu appears 2 Press Wipe Crop turning it on 3 Press Pattern Select The Pattern Select menu appears 4 From the displayed patterns standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 and 304 press any pattern to select it...

Page 556: ...ive value the image is stretched horizontally to become wider Rotating the wipe crop pattern Rotation 1 In the Rotation group of the Wipe Crop menu select one of the following Angle Incline the pattern through a fixed angle Speed Rotate the pattern at a fixed speed 2 Depending on the selection in step 1 set the following parameter When Angle is selected Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H...

Page 557: ...horizontal direction V vertical modulation Modulate the pattern to apply waving in the vertical direction 2 Set the following parameters Replicating the wipe crop pattern Multiplication 1 In the Wipe Crop menu press Multi turning it on 2 Set the following parameters a See the following figure Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Speed Rotation rate of pattern 100 00 to 100 00 a Knob Paramete...

Page 558: ... Selecting the signal or color to be inserted in the wipe crop border When you are applying a border or soft border to the wipe crop you can select the signal or color to be inserted in the border 1 In the Border Fill group of the Wipe Crop menu select one of the following Flat Color flat color 1 2 3 4 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Border width 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adju...

Page 559: ...Edge and HF7 Color Mix The Color Mix menu appears 2 Press Mix Pattern Select The Mix Pattern Select menu appears 3 Press any of the displayed patterns standard wipe patterns 1 to 24 to select it In this state you can adjust the pattern size and border softness with the knobs For details of the parameters see the next item To set the pattern size and position 1 In the Color Mix menu press Position ...

Page 560: ...age 556 Replicating the wipe crop pattern Multi page 557 Rotating the wipe crop pattern Rotation page 556 Applying modulation to the wipe crop pattern Modulation page 557 Defocus Settings Applying the Defocus effect 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF1 Defocus Blur Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal position 8 00 to 8 00 2 V Vertical position 6 00 to 6 00 a 4 50 t...

Page 561: ...when the MVE 8000A MVE 9000 is connected through an SDI interface 4 Set the parameters When Video Key is selected with DME dedicated interface When Video Key is selected with SDI interfaced MVE 8000A MVE 9000 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal defocusing of video and key signals 0 00 to 100 00 2 V Vertical defocusing of video and key signals 0 00 to 100 00 3 All Horizontal and...

Page 562: ...wn Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values 1 Video H Horizontal defocusing of video signal 0 00 to 100 00 2 Video V Vertical defocusing of video signal 0 00 to 100 00 3 Key H Horizontal defocusing of key signal 0 00 to 100 00 4 Key V Vertical defocusing of key signal 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting ...

Page 563: ...de group select the signal to which you want apply the Blur effect Video Key Video signal and key signal Video Video signal only Key Key signal only 4 Set the parameters When the DME dedicated interface is used When Video Key is selected with SDI interfaced MVE 8000A MVE 9000 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal defocusing of video and key signals 0 00 to 100 00 2 V Vertical def...

Page 564: ...eter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values 1 Video H Horizontal defocusing of video signal 0 00 to 100 00 2 Video V Vertical defocusing of video signal 0 00 to 100 00 3 Key H Horizontal defocusing of key signal 0 00 to 100 00 4 Key V Vertical defocusing of key signal 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Settings values...

Page 565: ...tretch the image in the vertical direction and plus values to stretch the image in the horizontal direction 16 9 mode a Specify minus values to stretch the image in the vertical direction and plus values to stretch the image in the horizontal direction Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Center X x value of shrinking center point 4 00 to 4 00 2 Center Y y value of shrinking center point 3 0...

Page 566: ...djust the parameters Masking the Sepia effect with a selected pattern Press Mask to display the Mask menu and set the pattern type and modifiers For details see Mask Settings page 575 Mono Settings Applying the Mono effect 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF3 Color Modify The Color Modify menu appears Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Y Y signal mix amount 0 00 to 100 00 ...

Page 567: ...n or Solarization effect 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF3 Color Modify The Color Modify menu appears 2 Press Poster Solar turning it on The Posterization and Solarization effects are enabled You can adjust the coarseness of the gradations with the knobs 3 Set the parameters Masking the Posterization or Solarization effect with a selected pattern Press Mask to display the Mask menu...

Page 568: ... set the pattern type and modifiers For details see Mask Settings page 575 Contrast Settings Applying the Contrast effect 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF3 Color Modify The Color Modify menu appears 2 Press Contrast turning it on The Contrast effect is enabled You can adjust the luminance and chroma contrast with the knobs 3 Set the parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting valu...

Page 569: ...d You can adjust the size and aspect ratio of the mosaic tiles with the knobs 3 Set the following parameters a Specify minus values to stretch the tiles in the vertical direction and plus values to stretch the tiles in the horizontal direction Masking the Mosaic effect with a selected pattern Press Mask to display the Mask menu and set the pattern type and modifiers For details see Mask Settings p...

Page 570: ... 00 gives an image completely transformed by the Sketch effect 0 00 is the original input image b The larger the Clip value the narrower the outline width When Edge Color is selected a 100 00 gives an image completely transformed by the Sketch effect 0 00 is the original input image b The larger the Clip value the narrower the outline width Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Mix amount...

Page 571: ... input video 0 00 to 100 00 a 2 Clip Reference level for outline extraction 100 00 to 100 00 b 3 Gain Image gain for outline extraction 100 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Mix amount for Relief video and input video 0 00 to 100 00 a 2 Offset Relief luminance level 100 00 to 100 00 3 Gain Image gain for outline extraction 100 00 to 100 00 4 Angle Direction of relief imag...

Page 572: ...racted video or to invert the outlines and the sections other than the outlines press Nega turning it on Masking the Sketch effect with a selected pattern Press Mask to display the Mask menu and set the type of pattern and modifiers For details see Mask Settings page 575 Metal Settings Applying the Metal effect 1 In the DME menu select VF7 Enhanced Video Modify and HF2 Metal The Metal menu appears...

Page 573: ...Settings page 575 Dim and Fade Settings Note The Dim and Fade function are not supported on the MVE 8000A Applying the Dim effect 1 In the DME menu select VF7 Enhanced Video Modify and HF3 Dim Fade The Dim Fade menu appears 2 Press Dim turning it on This enables the Dim effect Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Ratio Mix amount for Metal video and input video 0 00 to 100 00 2 Y Clip Cl...

Page 574: ...tings Applying the Glow effect 1 In the DME menu select VF7 Enhanced Video Modify and HF4 Glow The Glow menu appears 2 Press Glow turning it on Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Start Point where dimming starts dim start point 100 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Degree of dimming 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 ...

Page 575: ...s are inverted Masking the Glow effect with a selected pattern Press Mask to display the Mask menu and set the type of pattern and modifiers For details see Mask Settings page 575 Mask Settings Applying masks 1 In the DME menu select VF2 Video Modify and HF7 Mask The Mask menu appears Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Clip Reference level for highlight detection 0 00 to 100 00 2 Gain Amou...

Page 576: ...cted in the system as follows 4 3 mode a This setting value is not supported on the MVE 8000A 16 9 mode a This setting value is not supported on the MVE 8000A 5 To invert the mask source press Invert turning it on 6 As required set the modifiers for the mask pattern Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal position 8 00 to 8 00 2 V Vertical position 6 00 to 6 00 3 Size Size of mask ...

Page 577: ...in counterclockwise direction 100 00 is four rotations per second in clockwise direction 0 00 is no rotation Notes on applying a mask effect with a DME only when using the BKDS 9470 or MVE 9000 SDI I F In the Mask group of the DME Video Modify Mask menu if Effect Gp1 and Effect Gp2 are simultaneously set to On then the border or beveled edge is also masked The following explains this with the exam...

Page 578: ... at specified intervals for a specified length Film Slows the apparent frame rate for an effect like film You can specify the ratio of advancement For Hard Freeze and Time Strobe you can select the first field or the frame as the freeze timing To apply a Freeze effect start by displaying the Freeze menu In the DME menu select VF3 Freeze and HF1 Freeze 1 2 Image 2 State with Effect Gp1 only set to ...

Page 579: ...signal Field 1 Freeze the first field of signal 2 In the Freeze group press Time Strobe turning it on The Time Strobe freeze is enabled You can adjust the freeze interval and the ratio of live video inserted between freeze images 3 Set the parameters Applying the Film effect 1 In the Freeze group press Film turning it on The Film freeze is enabled You can adjust the ratio of frame advance 2 Set th...

Page 580: ...urn Roll Cylinder and Sphere is enabled However the Flex Shadow function is not supported on the MVE 8000A To turn an effect off In the setting menu press the button for the effect name turning it off or in the Type menu press OFF in the lower right part of the window Wave settings There are two modes H V and Size You can set the size and frequency of the waves the wave form the amount of wave mov...

Page 581: ...s 1 Amp H Amplitude of waves in horizontal direction 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq H Frequency of waves in horizontal direction 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset H a Horizontal direction in which to offset wave phase and amount of movement 16 00 to 16 00 4 Speed H b Horizontal direction and speed of waves 100 00 to 100 00 5 Slant Slant of waves 8 000 to 8 000 Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting va...

Page 582: ...al direction in which to offset wave phase and amount of movement 16 00 to 16 00 4 Speed V b Vertical direction and speed of waves 100 00 to 100 00 5 Slant Slant of waves 8 000 to 8 000 Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amp H Amplitude of waves 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq H Frequency of waves 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset H a Direction in w...

Page 583: ... on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Form H Waveform in horizontal direction 1 to 6 a 2 Form V Waveform in vertical direction 1 to 6 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Form H Waveform 1 to 6 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Random H Degree of randomness in horizontal waveform modulation 0 00 to 100 00 2 Random V Degree of randomness in...

Page 584: ...100 00 2 Offset H Center point of horizontal modulation range 8 000 to 8 000 3 Size V Amount of vertical wave modulation 0 00 to 100 00 4 Offset V Center point of vertical modulation range 8 000 to 8 000 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size H Amount of wave modulation 0 00 to 100 00 2 Offset H Center point of modulation range 8 000 to 8 000 Envelope Size Offset Knob Parameter Adjustment...

Page 585: ...re information about how to make settings see Wave settings page 580 Flag settings There are two modes H V and Size You can set the size and frequency of waves in the image the wave form the amount of wave movement and the range In H V mode you can also set the wave angle To apply the Flag effect Display the Flag menu The items displayed in the Flag menu and the functions of the knobs are the same...

Page 586: ...hape mode you can select ripple shapes other than circles stars etc Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amp V Amplitude of twist in vertical direction 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq V Frequency of twist in vertical direction 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset V a Amount of movement in twist phase in the vertical direction 16 00 to 16 00 4 Speed V b Speed and direction of twist movement in v...

Page 587: ...irections 2 Set the following parameters depending on the selected modulation mode When Radial mode is selected a Set when Lock is on b Set when Lock is off When Angular mode is selected Modulation along radii Radial mode Modulation along periphery Angular mode Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amp R Ripple amplitude along radius 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq R Ripple frequency along radius 0 00 ...

Page 588: ...pple frequency along radius 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset R a Direction along radius in which to offset ripple phase and amount of movement 8 000 to 8 000 4 Speed R b Ripple direction along radius and speed 100 00 to 100 00 Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amp A Ripple amplitude along periphery 0 00 to 100 00 2 Freq A Ripple frequency along periphery 0 00 to 100 00 3 Offset...

Page 589: ...selected modulation mode When Shape is selected When other than Shape is selected To limit the ripple range 1 Press Range turning it on 5 Shape Ripple shape 1 to 4 c Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Aspect Ripple aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 2 Angle Ripple angle 8 000 to 8 000 Parameter group 1 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Adjustment Sett...

Page 590: ...range is limited For Lock Form Random and Range Envelope functions see Wave settings page 580 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size R Amount of ripple modulation along radius 0 00 to 100 00 2 Offset R Center of modulation range along radius 8 000 to 8 000 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Size A Amount of ripple modulation along periphery 0 00 to 100 00 2 Offset A Center of modu...

Page 591: ...ers 4 To partition into pixels press Pixel turning it on and set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Degree of transition 0 000 to 100 000 2 Random Degree of randomness in distance moved by each block 0 000 to 100 000 3 Spiral Amount of movement toward periphery accompanying transition 1 000 to 1 000 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Width Width ...

Page 592: ... Bar settings You can set the degree of transition the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the direction of movement the width of the partitions the degree of randomness in partition width the partition angle and other parameters To apply the Flying Bar effect With the Flying Bars menu displayed use the following procedure 1 To make transition settings press Transition and set...

Page 593: ... Wedge was selected in step 1 To set the wedge center position When Wedge is selected in the Mode group you can set the wedge center position 1 Press Position 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Rotation Number of rotations of the blocks 8 000 to 8 000 2 Perspective Degree of randomness in distance moved by each block 0 000 to 100 000 Knob Parameter Adjustment...

Page 594: ...t Slide settings You can set the degree of transition the degree of randomness in the distance moved by each block the degree of sliding block width block angle and other parameters To apply the Split Slide effect With the Split Slide menu displayed set the following parameters 2 V Vertical center position 6 000 to 6 000 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting va...

Page 595: ... Setting values 1 Transition H Degree of transition in horizontal direction 0 000 to 100 000 2 Random H Degree of randomness in distance moved by blocks in horizontal direction 0 00 to 100 00 3 Skew H Degree of skew in horizontal direction 0 00 to 100 00 4 Width H Horizontal width of partition 0 00 to 100 00 5 Angle Angle of partition line 8 000 to 8 000 Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustme...

Page 596: ...u displayed set the following parameters To set the center position of original image 1 Press Position turning it on SONY DME SO DM S O D SO S O SOSO Left to Right Top to Bottom Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal border position 8 000 to 8 000 2 V Vertical border position 6 000 to 6 000 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Interval H Horizontal distance between mirrors o...

Page 597: ...e following parameters To cyclically repeat part of the original and its reflection Press Cyclic turning it on Lens settings You can set the shape and aspect ratio of the lens the angle the magnification ratio the curve ratio the size the center position and other parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Horizontal original image center position 4 000 to 4 000 2 V Vertical original ...

Page 598: ... 1 Magnify H Magnification ratio 100 00 to 100 00 2 Curve H Curve ratio 100 00 to 100 00 3 Size H Size 0 00 to 100 00 4 Angle Slant angle 8 000 to 8 000 5 Aspect Aspect ratio 100 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Magnify H Magnification ratio 100 00 to 100 00 2 Curve H Curve ratio 100 00 to 100 00 3 Size H Size 0 00 to 100 00 4 Angle Slant angle 8 000 to 8 000 Parameter group...

Page 599: ...en converting to the circle becomes vertical Panorama settings You can set the horizontal and vertical curve ratio and the curve center position To apply the Panorama effect With the Panorama menu displayed set the following parameters 2 Curve V Vertical curve ratio 100 00 to 100 00 3 Size V Vertical size 0 00 to 100 00 Parameter group 2 2 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Ad...

Page 600: ...per lower When nothing is selected Off There are no splits and the image turns from the edge 2 Press Page Turn then set the following parameters a When split mode is H V b When split mode is H c When split mode is V d When split mode is off To set the input signal of the back page 1 In the Back Video group select the signal input into the back page Self Use the same signal as the front page Flat U...

Page 601: ...bout operation see Page Turn settings page 600 Cylinder settings You can set the degree of winding onto the cylinder the radius the horizontal position of the wound image and front and back side output for the image To apply the Cylinder effect With the Cylinder menu displayed set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Sa...

Page 602: ...the Sphere menu The knobs in the Sphere menu have the same functions as those in the Cylinder menu For details about operation see Cylinder settings page 601 Explosion settings You can set the pattern shape and aspect ratio the center position the amount of movement by fragments the curvature of the transition path and other parameters To apply the Explosion effect With the Explosion menu displaye...

Page 603: ...ure of transition path 100 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Degree of transition 0 00 to 100 00 2 Curve Degree to which image periphery expands 0 00 to 100 00 3 Aspect Aspect ratio of waveform 100 00 to 100 00 4 Angle Slant of waveform 8 000 to 8 000 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Density Degree to which image d...

Page 604: ...he Melt effect With the Melt menu displayed use the following procedure 1 In the Direction group select the direction in which the image melts away Up Melting occurs upward Down Melting occurs downward 2 To make transition settings press Transition and set the following parameters 2 Center Amount of rotation in center of swirl 8 000 to 8 000 3 Outer Amount of rotation outside of Area 8 000 to 8 00...

Page 605: ...ting wave 1 8 MELT2 Melting wave 2 To make the melting part stardust 1 Press Pixel turning it on 2 Set the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Transition Degree of transition 0 00 to 100 00 2 Curve Degree to which image stretches 0 00 to 100 00 3 Random Degree of jaggies at melted part 0 00 to 100 00 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Amp Amplitude of waves 0 00...

Page 606: ...tire screen Bar Bar illumination You can specify the width and angle of the bar and its softness Preset Lighting pattern suitable for nonlinear effects When Bar is selected the following modes can be selected Normal Emphasizes the bar highlight area Specular An effect like light striking a surface with metallic reflections 2 Random Degree to which pixel positions become more randomized further fro...

Page 607: ... Set the parameters The parameters differ as follows depending on the selected lighting pattern When Plane is selected a You can make the Lighting effect more effective by adjusting Total Ambient to lower the brightness of the entire image This setting is used both by this effect and by the Spotlighting effect Note The Total Ambient parameter is not supported on the MVE 8000A When Bar is selected ...

Page 608: ...ge This setting is used both by this effect and by the Spotlighting effect Note The Total Ambient parameter is not supported on the MVE 8000A The three regions for which the light intensity can be set Setting the bar shape of the highlight area When you select Bar or Preset in step 3 of Applying the Lighting effect page 607 use the following procedure to set the shape of the bar 1 Turn Light Modif...

Page 609: ...ct see page 607 use the following procedure to set the bar shape of the shade area 1 Turn Shade Modify on 2 Adjust the following parameters Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 X X value of bar center point 8 00 to 8 00 2 Y Y value of bar center point 6 00 to 6 00 a 4 50 to 4 50 b 3 Angle c Angle of bar 8 00 to 8 00 4 Width Width of bar 0 00 to 100 00 5 Soft Softness of edges 0 00 to 100 00 ...

Page 610: ...iking paper cloth or another diffusively reflective surface 2 Set the following parameters 3 When you select Normal or Mat in step 1 press Bar Diffuse Color turning it on and adjust the following parameters to set the color of the diffuse light area Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 X X value of bar center point 8 00 to 8 00 4 Width Width of bar 0 00 to 100 00 5 Soft Softness of edges 0 0...

Page 611: ...ns off the one that has been on Turning Trail on when Drop Shadow Motion Decay Keyframe Strobe or Wind is on turns it off automatically Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 With no selection made in the Bar Light Mode group Width Bar Light With a selection made in the Bar Light Mode group Diffu...

Page 612: ...urce group select the source to create a trail Notes Rainbow Mix Color and Ext Video are not supported on the MVE 8000A Mix Color or Ext Video can only be applied to one of the background see page 636 flex shadow see page 548 trail and wind see page 619 effects If you select Mix Color or Ext Video in one of these settings a selection of Mix Color or Ext Video in any of the other effects is disable...

Page 613: ...very frame in the afterimage portion The difference from Hue Rotate is that many colors appear simultaneously For details of the Rainbow parameters see the Hue Rotate item above Erasing the afterimages that remain in memory whenever a keyframe is passed Press Trail Eraser turning it on When the effect passes a keyframe the afterimage is erased before writing a new afterimage Selecting the freeze t...

Page 614: ...he Trail effect before or after the combine Notes The combine process function is not supported on the MVE 8000A When you change the selection in the Combine Process group the afterimages which had been added up to then disappear When you do not combine images the Trail effect only is applied regardless of the selection in the Combine Process group Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Defocu...

Page 615: ... set independently for each channel Motion Decay Settings Note When you turn on motion decay if the Trail Keyframe Strobe or Wind effect is on it automatically goes off Blurring image motion 1 In the DME menu select VF5 Light Trail and HF3 Motion Decay The Motion Decay menu appears 2 Press Motion Decay turning it on This enables motion decay and you can now use the knobs to adjust the parameters 3...

Page 616: ... a new afterimage Selecting the freeze timing In the Decay Freeze Timing group select the timing for motion decay freezing Frame freeze in frame units Field freeze in field units Applying stardust to the afterimage portion The afterimage portion becomes stardust and gradually disappears 1 Press the DUST button turning it on 2 Set the following parameters a The way in which the afterimage disappear...

Page 617: ...erase the afterimage press KF Strobe Eraser turning it on Selecting the overlay priority for movie and still images video freeze image In the Priority group select the way in which the images are overlaid Over the movie is on top and the still image is underneath Under the movie is underneath and the still image is on top Mix the movie and still images are mixed adjust the following parameter with...

Page 618: ...fterimage Press KF Strobe Disable turning it on If you turn this function on when creating a keyframe even as the effect passes a keyframe no afterimage remains Setting a combine process Select whether to add the Keyframe Strobe effect before or after the combine Notes The combine process function is not supported on the MVE 8000A When you change the selection in the Combine Process group the afte...

Page 619: ...rned on any of the following effects that are on are turned off Trail Motion decay Keyframe strobe Applying the wind effect 1 In the DME menu select VF5 Light Trail and HF5 Wind The Wind menu appears 2 Press Wind turning it on This enables the wind and you can now adjust the parameters with the knobs 3 Set the following parameters a 0 00 represents no afterimage and 100 00 represents no decay in t...

Page 620: ...se a single color matte with the hue changing for each frame as the afterimage you can set the following parameters with the knobs Mix Color Insert a mix color signal see page 559 in the afterimage portion Ext Video Insert the external video signal input to the Ext IN connector in the afterimage portion Rainbow Use a freeze image with the hue changing every frame in the afterimage portion The diff...

Page 621: ...e following adjustments can be made to the image surface struck by the light Adjusting the brightness of the whole image Selecting the image surface effect Test sphere function Adjusting the bumpiness of the image surface Coordinate axis on surface of image Texture deformations Selecting the image surface effect Flat The image surface is unchanged causing the selected light source to appear as the...

Page 622: ...r direction of a light source the side of the sphere closest to the light source grows brighter You can easily check the position and direction of the light source by viewing the test sphere For more information about test sphere see Relation between test spheres and parallel rays page 625 Coordinate axis on surface of image Specify where to apply the texture or test sphere on the image surface Mo...

Page 623: ... types The following type of light sources are available see figure Parallel Parallel light source Point Point light source As the light source is placed further away the illuminated range becomes wider and the light become weaker Line Line light source Whole Non directional light source which illuminates the whole image Original image Repetition in X direction Repetition in Y direction Repetition...

Page 624: ...a lit by the spotlight FRGD The light strikes the image foreground BKGD The light strikes the image background Both The light strikes both foreground and background Surface Flat For the currently selected light source only you can forcibly make the image surface effect flat This is effective when you have selected texture as image surface effect and want a flat effect for one light source only Spo...

Page 625: ...on set when selecting the light source in the Spot Mode group Radius Inner side radius of the ring Angle When an Offset is set the rotation angle of the ring around the initial center position Fill blending modes Specifies the way in which the light is blended with the image Mix Light as if reflected from a mirror The light can be given a color Multiply Light as if reflected from a dull surface di...

Page 626: ...unit of these direction parameters is the number of rotations with 360 1 rotation expressed as 1 00 in the same way as 3D rotation parameters The following relationships apply in the example shown in the figure The fractional part of the setting after the decimal point corresponds to an angle 0 to 360 If the fractional parts of two setting values are the same the effect is the same even if the int...

Page 627: ... be set to 1 12 360 45 Keyframe trajectory Setting the surface where light strikes the image 1 In the DME menu select VF5 Light Trail and HF6 Spot Lighting The Spot Lighting menu appears 2 Press Spot Lighting turning it on This enables Spotlighting and you can now use the knobs to adjust the parameters 3 Set the following parameter Lowering the brightness of the image makes Spotlighting more effec...

Page 628: ...n Linear setting is the same as selecting Flat Wave Mosaic Glass Flag Ripple Lens Panarama Page Turn Roll 5 If you selected Texture or Non Linear in step 4 set the following parameters Parameters when you selected Texture a Minus moves left plus moves right b Minus moves down plus moves up c Plus emphasizes bumps in texture minus emphasizes depressions 0 00 is a flat surface Parameters when you se...

Page 629: ...er and name of the currently selected texture The list on the right is for selecting a texture 2 In the Texture Pattern group press User or Factory to select the texture pattern list User List of texture patterns created by the user See Adding User Texture Patterns in Chapter 18 Volume 3 Factory List of texture patterns stored in the system when shipped from the factory 3 Do one of the following t...

Page 630: ...re available Note The BZS 9471 Texture Lighting Software for BKDS 9470 or BZDM 9050 Texture Lighting Software for MVE 9000 is required to enable Light 2 and Light 3 An install key must be entered to use the software For details see Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu in Chapter 18 Volume 3 To set light source data The following example shows how to set light source data with the...

Page 631: ...mation about light source types see Light source types page 623 5 According to the selected light source type set the following parameters When you selected Parallel a Minus moves counterclockwise plus moves clockwise When you selected Point a Minus moves left plus moves right b Minus moves down plus moves up c Minus moves forward plus moves deeper Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Total ...

Page 632: ... test sphere 1 In the Light 1 menu press Test Sphere turning it on A test sphere effect appears on the surface of the image 2 Adjust the following parameter a Light appears from Z direction At 100 00 the light goes deepest at 100 00 the whole image is lit like a flat effect To select the lighted area In the Area Select group select one of the following FRGD The light strikes the image foreground B...

Page 633: ...nding only to the surface being struck by the currently set light from the light source is shown in the same way as if Flat had been selected To set the shape of the light 1 Press Shape turning it on 2 Set the following parameters a For more information about the shape patterns see Shape Patterns page 945 in the Appendix b 0 is a round shape and 100 is the shape itself Smaller values make the patt...

Page 634: ...cted in the Spot Mode group To rotate the ring 1 Press Ring Speed turning it on The display on knob 3 that was visible when Ring was selected changes 2 Set the following parameter a 100 00 is four rotations per second in the counterclockwise direction and 100 00 is four rotations per second in the clockwise direction 0 00 stops the rotation To invert the lighted area Press Light Invert turning it ...

Page 635: ...lected Hue Rotation a 12 00 is a 360 degree rotation every second in the counterclockwise direction 12 00 is a 360 degree rotation every second in the clockwise direction b 100 00 The image beneath the light shines through Copying or swapping light source settings You can copy or swap the setting from one light source Light 1 to Light 3 to another light source 1 In the Spot Lighting menu press Cop...

Page 636: ...wap Background Settings Adds a color or inputs an external signal to the background of the image Note Signal selection for this purpose is not supported on the MVE 8000A Applying the Background effect 1 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF1 Bkgd The Bkgd menu appears 2 Press Bkgd turning it on The Background effect is enabled Only if Flat Color is selected in the Bkgd Fill group you can ...

Page 637: ...e settings a selection of Mix Color or Ext Video in any of the other effects is disabled and Flat Color is selected in its place When executing combining four channels of DME images Mix Color and Ext Video cannot be selected 2 Only if Flat Color is selected in step 1 adjust the following parameters Separate Sides Settings Applies separate video signals and key signals to the front and back of the ...

Page 638: ...put Output and HF2 Video Key The Video Key menu appears 2 In the Shaped Video group press each of the following buttons to switch it on or off Front Input When this is on the front image of the input video signal is treated as shaped video Back Input When this is on the back image of the input video signal is treated as shaped video Output When this is on the output video signal is treated as shap...

Page 639: ... to Int Key or choose an appropriate input key signal Page Turn Roll Cylinder Sphere Spotlighting global effects Combiner Brick Shadow b When key processing is done a different image may appear in the parts which are removed The following states result depending on the selected effect Removal with the key can be checked by turning the background on Border Beveled Edge Added also to the outer side ...

Page 640: ...ate settings for the front and back Applying the Invert effect 1 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF2 Video Key The Video Key menu appears 2 In the Front group to invert front signals or the Back to invert back signals press the following buttons turning them on H Invert Invert video and key signals horizontally V Invert Invert video and key signals vertically Key Density Settings You c...

Page 641: ... following turning it on Ext Key Use the key signal sent from the switcher as the key source Int Key Use the full size DME internal key signal as the key source Lum Key Use the input video luminance signal as the key source 3 When Ext Key or Lum Key is selected in step 2 set the following parameters Notes The Ext Key and Lum Key in the Front Key group share clip and gain settings Similarly Ext Key...

Page 642: ...elect the degree of change detection Do interpolation in field units Do interpolation in frame units You can also select the number of pixels used in interpolation processing and select the method used to show the picture reduced or expanded Selecting an interpolation method for input video signals 1 In the DME menu select VF6 Input Output and HF3 Process 2 In the Video Field Frame Mode group sele...

Page 643: ...6 In the Interpolation Mode group set the number of pixels to use in interpolation Multi Use multi point interpolation This gives higher picture quality Linear Use two point interpolation Note When using the BKDS 9470 Multi is always selected 7 In the Filter Mode group select the method used to show the picture reduced or expanded Mode1 standard Even when the picture is reduced add compensation so...

Page 644: ... begin with selections from VF1 Ch1 Ch4 in the Global Effect menu The following are common operations that you must do prior to selecting from this menu 1 In the device control block select the target DME channel 2 In the menu control block press the top menu selection button GLB EFF then select VF1 Ch1 Ch4 The Global Effect Ch1 Ch4 menu appears Name Effect Image Combiner Automatically combines th...

Page 645: ...can be combined You can also control the way in which the combination is carried out as a mix or an overlap with priority set automatically For a mix you can control the relative amounts of each channel Images can also be crossed in three dimensions Note Three dimensional image crossing is not supported on the MVE 8000A Combination of channel 1 Ch1 and channel 2 Ch2 Ch1 Ch2 Ch1 Ch3 Ch4 Ch3 Ch4 1 2...

Page 646: ...s 646 Global Effect Operations Combination of Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 Combination of Ch1 and Ch2 combination of Ch3 and Ch4 Ch1 Ch2 Ch1 Ch4 Ch4 1 2 Ch3 3 2 3 1 4 4 Combiner Ch1 Ch2 Ch1 Ch3 Ch4 1 2 1 1 2 Ch3 2 4 3 3 4 Combiner Combiner ...

Page 647: ... setting is 70 the proportion of the channels in the mixed portion in the previous illustration is as shown in the following table Mixing Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 Combination Indication in figure Ch1 Ch2 Ch1 and Ch2 30 70 Ch1 Ch1 1 Ch4 4 Ch2 2 Ch3 3 2 3 1 4 Combiner Ch1 Ch2 1 2 Mix1 Ch1 Ch2 Ch1 Ch2 1 2 Mix1 Ch3 3 Mix2 Ch2 Ch1 Ch3 ...

Page 648: ...h4 If the Mix1 setting is 70 and the Mix2 setting is 40 the proportions of the channels in the mixed portions in the previous illustration are as shown in the following table Ch1 crossed with Ch2 Combination Indication in figure Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch1 and Ch2 30 70 Ch2 and Ch3 60 40 Ch1 and Ch3 30 70 Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 30 42 28 Combination Indication in figure Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch1 and Ch2 30 70 Ch3 and Ch4 6...

Page 649: ...n turn it off 3 Set the overlap priority for Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 as follows For case Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Under Priority1 to Priority3 press Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 respectively to set the overlap priority Priority1 Select the channel with the highest priority Priority2 Select the channel with the second highest priority Priority3 Select the channel with the lowest priority For case Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Unde...

Page 650: ...lect The Combine Gp Select menu appears 2 In the Combine Gp Select group select the channel combination To combine channels 2 and 3 press Ch2 Ch3 turning it on To combine the previously combined combinations of channels 1 and 2 and channels 3 and 4 press Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 Ch4 turning them on Note The only two buttons that can be selected simultaneously are the combination of Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 Ch4 The ...

Page 651: ...setting value range as with knobs 1 and 2 Mixing pairwise the images of channels 1 and 2 and channels 3 and 4 1 In the Combiner Priority menu press Combiner1 Mix turning it on 2 Adjust the following parameter a See Pairwise mixing of Ch1 and Ch2 and Ch3 and Ch4 page 648 3 Press Combiner2 Mix turning it on 4 Adjust the following parameter Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Mix Mix degree 0 ...

Page 652: ...ossing function is not supported on the MVE 8000A 1 In the Combiner Priority menu press Depth turning it on 2 Set the following parameters For case Ch1 Ch2 For case Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 For case Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Knobs 1 and 2 set the same parameters as For case Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 respectively Knob 3 is additionally effective which sets the parameter Soft3 in the same setting value range as with knobs 1 and 2 Knob ...

Page 653: ...on 4 Set the following parameter Brick Settings The Brick effect can combine Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 or combine Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 The three images are displayed as shown in the following figure Combinations of Ch1 Ch2 and Ch3 Upper side Ch1 image Side V Ch2 image Side H Ch3 image Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Soft1 Softness of edges of channel 1 and channel 2 crossed section 0 00 to 100 00 Knob...

Page 654: ...t image in the source coordinate frame is shifted by the amount of half the height Therefore the image is somewhat magnified The flex shadow function cannot be enabled when Brick is enabled However the flex shadow function is not supported on the MVE 8000A 3 Set the parameters 4 Specify the way to insert the side images when the height is changed by pressing one of the following buttons in the Sid...

Page 655: ...90 180 270 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 H Position of left crop 4 00 to 4 00 2 V Position of top crop 2 25 to 2 25 3 Rotation Angle of rotation when rotated around the Z axis of the source space 0 90 180 270 Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Position of top crop 2 83 to 3 00 2 Left Position of left crop 4 00 to 3 83 3 Right Position of right crop 3 83 to 4 00 4 Bottom Po...

Page 656: ...e a similar operation in the following groups Back image of Side H Side H Back group Front image of Side V Side V Front group Back image of Side V Side V Back group Shadow Settings The effect uses two successive channels You can adjust the position and density of the shadow with respect to the image and the color of the shadow The channel with the largest number for example Ch2 in the case of Ch1 ...

Page 657: ...s Note The flex shadow function cannot be enabled when Drop Shadow is enabled However the flex shadow function is not supported on the MVE 8000A 2 Set the parameters 3 In the Ch1 Shadow Source group select the shadow source signal Video Select Ch2 video input as the shadow Flat Color Select a matte color as the shadow 4 When you select Flat Color in step 3 adjust the parameters Combiner channel se...

Page 658: ...hannel 4 then turn Ch 1 Shadow and Ch 3 Shadow on To apply a shadow after combining the video images Use the Combiner function to select channel 1 channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 then turn Ch 1 Ch 2 Shadow on Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Luminance Luminance 0 00 to 100 00 2 Saturation Saturation 0 00 to 100 00 3 Hue Hue 359 99 to 0 00 Ch4 Ch3 Ch2 Ch1 Ch4 Ch3 Ch2 Ch1 ...

Page 659: ...Timeline 663 P Bus Trigger 666 Control of GPI Devices 668 GPI Timeline Creation and Editing 668 Control of VTRs Extended VTRs and Disk Recorders 672 Manual Operation 672 Controlling the Tape Disk Transport 673 Checking VTR Disk Recorder Extended VTR Information 679 Cueup Play 680 VTR Disk Recorder Extended VTR Timeline 688 Disk Recorder Extended VTR File Operations 695 ...

Page 660: ...rations for controlling above external devices To access the Device menu In the menu control block press the top menu selection button DEV For VTRs Extended VTRs and disk recorders you can also carry out operations using the device control block Notes To operate P Bus devices VTRs Extended VTRs and disk recorders in the this system the following settings are required on the DCU 9 pin serial port D...

Page 661: ...executed only when the keyframe effect is executed in the normal direction Take care when executing simultaneously with a switcher or DME keyframe effect since the actions are not executed in the reverse direction The following keyframe functions cannot be used KF LOOP EFFECT LOOP REVERSE NORMAL REVERSE PATH Saving to registers Set the data for controlling external devices in the Device menu You c...

Page 662: ...662 Control of External Devices Chapter 12 External Devices File related functions As effect data you can save and recall using the File menu ...

Page 663: ...the P Bus Timeline At a keyframe point on the P Bus timeline you can set an action At any single keyframe point you can set actions for a maximum of 24 devices For details of keyframe creation and editing operations see Creating and Editing Keyframes page 737 For the action setting or P Bus timeline editing use the Device menu You can save the data set in the Device menu in keyframe effect registe...

Page 664: ...methods select the action Press directly on the list on the right of the status area Turn the knob a 1 Off no specification 2 Store 3 Recall 4 Trigger 4 If in step 3 you selected 2 Store 3 Recall or 4 Trigger turn knob 3 to select the register number or trigger number The indication for knob 3 changes to reflect the selection of Store Recall or Trigger The setting is reflected in the list on the r...

Page 665: ...d the action set for the first keyframe is not executed when the RUN button is pressed then the first keyframe action is executed To execute an action when the REWIND button is pressed it is necessary to set this action Rewind Action To carry out this setting in the Device P Bus Timeline menu press Rewind Action to recall the Rewind Action menu In this setting screen use the same setting method as...

Page 666: ... the numeric keypad control block or keyframe control block outputs an action command to a P Bus device Note To use the P Bus trigger function the P Bus control mode must be set to Trigger Make this setting in the Engineering Setup Panel Device Interface menu For details see Setting the Control Mode for P Bus Devices in Chapter 19 Volume 3 The relation between the operation in each of the control ...

Page 667: ...n example to output a Recall use the following procedure 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the EFF button turning it on The RCALL button in the numeric keypad control block lights 2 Press the P BUS button in the numeric keypad control block turning it on to select the P Bus region 3 Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons 4 Press the ENTER button i...

Page 668: ... effect register When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect and advance the effect to the keyframe point for which the GPI output is set a trigger pulse is output to the external device from the specified GPI output port GPI Timeline Creation and Editing This section describes how to set GPI output ports to be registered at a keyframe point and how to carry out creati...

Page 669: ... GPI port 4 If in step 3 you selected 2 SCU or 3 DCU then use the knob to select the port number The indication for knob 3 depends on whether SCU or DCU is selected a The number of DCU GPI ports depends on the settings in Engineering Setup The setting is reflected in the list on the right of the status area Note For the output port you have set here be sure to set the trigger type to Rising Edge F...

Page 670: ...ut ports in a single operation Press All Off Setting the action for a rewind operation On the GPI timeline when the REWIND button in the keyframe control block or Flexi Pad control block or Multifunction Flexi Pad control block is pressed the action set for the first keyframe is not executed when the RUN button is pressed then the first keyframe action is executed To execute an action when the REW...

Page 671: ...671 Control of GPI Devices Chapter 12 External Devices For details of the setting see Setting the First Keyframe When a Rewind Is Executed in Chapter 19 Volume 3 ...

Page 672: ...wing VTR disk recorder and Extended VTR information Device name Register number VTR disk recorder Extended VTR status Current time Start point Stop point Variable speed Start delay time Loop setting Recue setting To control a VTR Extended VTR or disk recorder in this system the following settings are required Button assignment For a VTR Extended VTR or disk recorder connected to the DCU 9 pin seri...

Page 673: ...ting a stop point For each selected VTR disk recorder Extended VTR you can set the stop point timecode value as keyframe data Setting a start delay time For each selected VTR disk recorder Extended VTR you can set the start delay as key frame data Recording to VTR or disk recorder Record video to the selected VTR disk recorder Loop recue a setting You can select loop or recue as the playback mode ...

Page 674: ...tape disk or frame memory clip START TC start timecode Press this button to set the timecode of the start point at that time The timecode of the start point is updated to the current time each time this button is pressed When the device the operation applies to is a VTR disk recorder the start point updated by the setting of the MENU button is as follows When the MENU button is On start point of t...

Page 675: ...ry clip FF Press this button to fast forward the tape disk or frame memory clip ALL STOP Press this button to stop all tape transport disk drive frame memory operations Selecting a VTR Extended VTR disk recorder To select the VTR Extended VTR disk recorder to be controlled in the device selection buttons of the device control block press a selection of those buttons turning them on For details on ...

Page 676: ...ion modes jog shuttle and variable To prevent overheating if the search dial is on continuously for 10 seconds it is automatically turned off However in this state if a movement of the dial is detected it switches on again Jog mode Press the JOG button lighting the button amber to switch the dial to jog mode In this mode you can advance material frame by frame at a speed proportional to the rotati...

Page 677: ...on where it stops with a clicking sound 1 1 times normal speed 3 3 times normal speed 1 1 times normal speed To disable the search dial and end variable mode press the STOP button Additionally pressing any of the REW PLAY FF STB OFF and ALL STOP editing buttons ends the variable mode For shuttle mode and variable mode you can set the valid range of the operating angle in the Engineering Setup Pane...

Page 678: ... files page 698 for more information about how to specify file names 1 Using the buttons of the device control block select the VTR or disk recorder to which you want to record You can select more than one button The first button pressed lights green to indicate the reference device and the subsequent buttons light amber 2 While holding down the REC button in the device control block press the PLA...

Page 679: ...n DEV device name DEV1 to DEV12 represent respectively device 1 to device 12 Reg register Number of the register to which settings apply Status Status of each device The meaning of the indications is as follows Operating status display When VTR Extended VTR or Sony disk 9 pin protocol is used When video disk communications protocol is used XXXX Communications with the device are being carried out ...

Page 680: ...ton Play With this function you can also stop the VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR used for playback at the stop point timecode recalled from the same register Disk recorder video disk communications protocol operation when loop recue is set When loop is set playback repeatedly between the start point and stop point When recue is set when playback reaches the stop point automatically cue up to th...

Page 681: ... Making and saving settings relating to Cueup Play 1 Press the EFF button in the numeric keypad control block turning it on This assigns the numeric keypad control block to keyframe operations and the RCALL button lights 2 Press the region selection button for the region for which you want to make the setting turning it on You can select more than one button 3 Enter the number of the register to b...

Page 682: ...rol block search dial The display in the numeric keypad control block shows START TC Enter the desired timecode from the numeric keypad control block and press ENTER For details of timecode entry see Setting the start point and stop point with the SET XX buttons page 684 Setting with the Cueup Play menu For details of settings in the Cueup Play menu see Setting the start point stop point and start...

Page 683: ...To set a start delay time press the DELAY button in the device control block and enter a value in the numeric keypad control block Alternatively make the setting in the Device DDR VTR Cueup Play menu If no setting is required continue to step 10 For details of settings in the Cueup Play menu see Setting the start point stop point and start delay time in a menu page 685 10Press the STORE button tur...

Page 684: ...block the CUE button also flashes and lights in the same way as the ALL STOP button Also when the start point is reached the STOP button lights amber 5 Press the RUN button in the keyframe control block The VTR Extended VTR disk recorder is now controlled according to the keyframe data Setting the start point and stop point with the SET XX buttons When you enter a timecode and make a setting with ...

Page 685: ... setting of the DUR does not change a If after pressing the SET XX button you press the button in the numeric keypad control block you can enter offsets from the existing setting values Each time you press this button the sign of the offset cycles through the settings absolute value t t and the sign appears in the numeric keypad control block display If there is no existing setting value then it i...

Page 686: ...roup To set the start delay time press Set in the Delay group A timecode window appears 4 Set the timecode value for the start point stop point or start delay time Note You can enter a start delay time in the range that depends on the signal format as follows 00 00 to 59 nn where nn number of frames per second 1 frame 5 Press Enter The set start point stop point or start delay time is reflected in...

Page 687: ...ck from the start point of a file to the stop point then return to the start point and stop Note Loop and recue functions are only available when the EVS XT server is operated with the video disk communications protocol In the Device menu use the following procedure 1 Press VF3 DDR VTR and HF1 Cueup Play The Device DDR VTR Cueup Play menu appears The status area shows the device number register nu...

Page 688: ...vice menu The data set in the Device menu are saved in a keyframe effect register When you recall this register and start execution of the keyframe effect and advance the effect to the keyframe point for which the action is set an action command is output to the external device through the 9 pin serial port assigned to the VTR disk recorder or Extended VTR Note When executing a timeline using a di...

Page 689: ...therwise the setting for the Rewind Action is carried out 2 If the setting when the REWIND button is pressed is for the first keyframe to be executed then the second keyframe is executed and otherwise the first keyframe is executed To execute an effect be sure to carry out a Rewind For example when the start command only is set for a keyframe playback starts from the current position in the same w...

Page 690: ...tton Some operating limitations apply when the video disk communications protocol is used These are explained with reference to the following figure which illustrates creation of a timeline that plays from the video of file A to the video of file B Operation with no problems Black video or still image appears momentarily when play switches from file A to file B KF1 action setting Operating status ...

Page 691: ...meline The Device DDR VTR Timeline menu appears The status area shows two lists The upper list shows the device number register number keyframe number and action type start point stop point and variable speed set for the keyframe The lower list is used for setting the action for the device selected above and shows the port name current file current time status information start point stop point va...

Page 692: ...ended VTR skip to step 4 4 In the Action group select the action Cueup Output a command to cue up to the currently displayed start point Start Output a Play command Note When the stop point and variable speed are both set the variable speed setting takes priority Stop Output a Stop command Note Before executing the Stop command if the timecode for the set stop point has been reached or on an Exten...

Page 693: ...frame duration to fit the set start point and stop point Press the Set button and adjust the parameter with the knob a The setting range of the variable speed depends on the type of connected device The new variable speed setting is reflected in the status area Repeat steps 2 to 11 as required for other devices To carry out start point and stop point settings and cueing up operations in the device...

Page 694: ...r list in the status area and press Test Fire An action command is output from the DCU 9 pin serial port according to the settings in the list To clear the start point stop point and variable speed settings 1 In the upper list in the status area select the device for which you want to clear the settings 2 Carry out any of the following operations as required To clear the start point setting press ...

Page 695: ...g the file list Before playback and suchlike operations on a disk recorder Extended VTR it is first necessary to display a list of the disk recorder files on the DCU The file list includes the following information File name Date of last update 1 Duration of recorded material 1 To recall the file list use the Device menu 1 Not displayed in the case of an Extended VTR Recalling a file In the recall...

Page 696: ...ended VTR the length of file data and file update information are not shown and the register number is shown in place of the file name 2 Select the device for which you want to recall the file list using the knob 3 Press the File List Update button This starts the process of recalling the file list and a message box appears When the file list recall is completed the message box disappears To cance...

Page 697: ...e following procedure Note Files cannot be recalled when the disk recorder is set to Recorder 1 In the Device menu press VF3 DDR VTR and HF3 File List The Device DDR VTR File List menu appears 2 Select the device from which you want to recall a file using the knob 3 Using any of the following methods select the file you want to recall Press directly on the lower list in the status area Press the a...

Page 698: ...n using the Sony disk recorder 9 pin protocol Up to 23 characters When using the video disk communications protocol Up to 8 characters in Fixed 8 Character mode or 23 characters in Variable Length mode For details of how to select the file name character count mode in the video disk communications protocol see Making Detailed Settings on the External Device Connected to the Serial Port in Chapter ...

Page 699: ...e Timeline Menu 719 Interpreting the Timeline Menu 719 Settings in the Timeline Menu 721 Recalling a Register 723 Specifying the Region and Edit Points 732 Selecting the Region in Which Editing Applies 732 Setting the Edit Points 735 Creating and Editing Keyframes 737 Creation 737 Insertion 738 Modification 738 Deletion 742 Movement 743 Copying 744 Pause 744 Keyframe Loop Repeated Execution of a S...

Page 700: ...an Effect in the Flexi Pad Control Block 762 Executing an Effect in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block 762 Saving Effects 764 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline 766 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the Buttons in the Numeric Keypad Control Block 766 Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the Buttons in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block 768 Creating and Saving a Ma...

Page 701: ...lock or Multifunction Flexi Pad control block can be used simultaneously For details of the region assignment to the region selection buttons see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 19 Volume 3 Regions applicable to keyframe operations All the regions less the Router region Regions applicable to snapshot operations Twenty one regions that is the above regions less the external de...

Page 702: ...ry you must also save the images to a storage media such as the hard disk Reference region When multiple regions are selected only one region appears in the displays for menu and numeric keypad operations This is called the reference region The reference region is determined according to the following precedence M E1 M E2 M E3 P P User1 User2 User3 User4 User5 User6 User7 User8 DME ch1 DME ch2 DME...

Page 703: ...epending on the number of channels When recalling registers in the 200 range select two consecutive channels for the regions as for example DME1 and DME2 Similarly for registers in the 300 range select three consecutive registers Work register This is a temporary register used when editing keyframes When you recall an effect it is read from the effect register into the work register and when you s...

Page 704: ...These are registers for snapshots and there are 99 numbered 1 to 99 for each region Master snapshot registers There are 99 master snapshot registers numbered 1 to 99 for each control panel They store snapshot regions and the register numbers saved in the regions ...

Page 705: ...ers page 703 Saving and Recalling Effects To create a new effect first recall an empty register then create the keyframes one at a time in this register To run an effect it is also necessary to set the time and the path To edit an existing effect recall the register holding the effect then make the changes When you have finished creating or editing the effect save it in the recalled register or an...

Page 706: ... keyframes Insert Insert the current image as a keyframe Inserting a keyframe in an existing effect may change the duration of the effect see page 708 Modify Modify a keyframe You can modify a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Delete Delete a keyframe You can delete a single keyframe or a range of keyframes in the effect together Deleting keyframes from an effect reduc...

Page 707: ...the effect position Difference in the effect of a paste operation Variable duration mode The copied keyframe is inserted at the specified position Constant duration mode The copied keyframe is written over the specified position Transition mode You can use an effect created with keyframes as a DME wipe pattern on the switcher In this case it is necessary to set the transition mode the way in which...

Page 708: ... Setting the Effect Duration page 753 When you change the effect duration the keyframe duration for each keyframe in the effect is automatically recalculated proportionally Schematic view of keyframe duration and effect duration The effect duration may also be changed by inserting or deleting keyframes Changes in the effect duration caused by inserting a keyframe When the effect is stopped on a ke...

Page 709: ...eyframe When the effect is stopped on a keyframe a delete operation deletes the keyframe and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted keyframe When the effect is stopped between two keyframes a delete operation deletes the preceding keyframe and reduces the effect duration by the duration of the deleted keyframe Insertion position Change in effect duration Insertion before the fi...

Page 710: ... You can set the delay from the time of executing an operation to run the effect and the effect actually starting that is the delay until the first keyframe You can make this setting in the keyframe control block Note that changing the delay does not alter the duration of the effect Deletion position Change in effect duration Deletion of the first keyframe Deletion of an intermediate keyframe Dele...

Page 711: ...multaneously Key1 to Key4 Overall path settings for items relating to keys 1 to 4 are made simultaneously Key 1 All to Key 4 All Source Key source path for keys 1 to 4 Fill Key fill path for keys 1 to 4 Proc Proc path for keys 1 to 4 Trans Transition path for keys 1 to 4 Bkgd Util Overall path settings for items relating to the background and utility buses are made simultaneously Bkgd Util All Bkg...

Page 712: ...er than frame memory source and frame memory freeze outputs are made simultaneously FM Proc All FM Proc1 Path for frame memory signal processing 1 FM Proc2 Path for frame memory signal processing 2 FM Still Store Overall path settings for frame memory freeze image output are made simultaneously FM Still Store All FM Still Store 1 to 8 Paths for frame memory freeze image outputs 1 to 8 Aux Overall ...

Page 713: ...re made simultaneously Loc XYZ All Loc X Loc Y Loc Z Paths for the x y and z axes Rot Overall path settings for items relating to image rotation are made simultaneously Rot All Rot X Rot Y Rot Z Paths for the x y and z axes Spin Overall path settings for items relating to spin are made simultaneously Spin All Spin Src X Spin Src Y Spin Src Z Paths for the x y and z axes Spin X Spin Y Spin Z Paths ...

Page 714: ...XYZ Overall path settings for items relating to image movement are made simultaneously Loc XYZ All Loc X Loc Y Loc Z Paths for the x y and z axes Rot Overall path settings for items relating to image rotation are made simultaneously Rot All Rot X Rot Y Rot Z Paths for the x y and z axes Spin Overall path settings for items relating to spin are made simultaneously Spin All Spin Src X Spin Src Y Spi...

Page 715: ...rall path settings for video modify items are made simultaneously Video Modify All Defocus Blur Path for defocus blur Multi Move Path for multi move Color Modify Path for color modify Mosaic Path for mosaic Mask Path for mask Sketch Path for sketch Metal Path for metal Dim Fade Path for dim fade a Glow Path for glow Freeze Path relating to freeze Non Linear Path relating to nonlinear effects Light...

Page 716: ...path from each keyframe to the next Path types for Hue There are four types as follows CW The hue changes in a clockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope CCW The hue changes in a counterclockwise direction as seen on a Vectorscope Short The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is shorter Long The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise ...

Page 717: ...tion STOP NEXT KF Run the effect and stop at the next keyframe EFFECT LOOP Repeat the effect in an endless loop Make these settings in the keyframe control block See Run mode setting page 717 Master Timelines You can save the regions selected for a keyframe effect and the register numbers saved in the regions in a master timeline register so that operation can be applied to two or more regions at ...

Page 718: ...s Creating and editing keyframes see page 737 Create the keyframes that make up the effect using operations to create insert modify or delete keyframes Time settings see page 752 Set the overall duration of the effect or the duration of each keyframe Path setting see page 755 Set the type of interpolation used between successive keyframes Executing effects see page 759 This provides a smooth effec...

Page 719: ...l block press the top menu selection button KEY FRAME 2 Select HF1 Time Line The Time Line menu appears Interpreting the Timeline Menu The following are the main parts of the menu display Key Frame Timeline menu 1 Keyframe status 2 Region name and register number 3 Delay numerical display 5 Display start time 7 Delay display on timeline 8 Pause point 6 Display end time 0 Effect duration 9 Total ti...

Page 720: ...art of the actual effect d Keyframe number total This shows the number of the keyframe at the cursor position and the total number of keyframes in the register e Display start time This shows the timecode value for the timeline display start point f Display end time This shows the timecode value for the timeline display end point g Delay display on timeline When a delay is set the interval is show...

Page 721: ...on or off On The regions for which the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block are lit are shown in the precedence order see next item set in this menu followed by the regions for which the buttons are off in the same order Off The regions appear according to the precedence order see next item and display on off setting see page 722 set in this menu Deciding the precedence ord...

Page 722: ...Active Region is off to select which regions are displayed in the Timeline menu use the following procedure 1 In the Timeline Assign menu use any of the following methods to select the region Press directly on the list on the left of the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 2 For no display press Display turning it off To display press once more turning...

Page 723: ...nd Registers page 703 The master timeline can also be recalled from the standard type Flexi Pad control block Recalling a register from the numeric keypad control block Numeric keypad control block 1 Press the EFF button turning it on This allocates the numeric keypad control block to keyframe operations and the RCALL button lights EFF M E 1 USER 1 DME 1 DME 5 SNAP SHOT M E 2 USER 2 DME 2 DME 6 SH...

Page 724: ...tion Button in the Numeric Keypad Control Block or Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block in Chapter 19 Volume 3 It is not possible to select MASTR and other regions simultaneously If selected simultaneously the master timeline takes precedence The first button pressed lights green as the reference region and any subsequently pressed buttons light amber Pressing one of the amber lit buttons while h...

Page 725: ... effect dissolve press the EFF DISS button Note It is not possible to apply temporary attributes to the master timeline 5 Press the ENTER button This recalls the specified register When the master timeline is recalled the region selection buttons light according to the saved region information To undo the recall of a register Immediately after recalling the register press the UNDO button to undo t...

Page 726: ...ng any of the following methods select the bank to be recalled To select bank 0 press the BANK 0 button To select bank 1 press the BANK 1 button To select any of banks 0 to 9 press the BANK SEL button the memory recall section display changes as shown in the following figure press one of 0 to 9 7 WIPE DME SNAP SHOT EFF MCRO SHOT BOX UNDO STORE STATS TRANS RATE BNAK 0 BANK 1 BANK SEL XPT HOLD A B U...

Page 727: ...Setup menu you can select either register names or register numbers to be displayed Lit orange register holding the master timeline Lit yellow last recalled register Off empty register 3 Press the button in the memory recall section which shows the desired register name The button you pressed lights yellow and the master timeline is recalled The numeric display shows the bank number followed by th...

Page 728: ...M E 2 M E 3 P P These select the corresponding M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST regions USER 1 to USER 8 These select the User regions DME 1 to DME 8 These select the DME channels P BUS This selects P Bus GPI This selects GPI MCRO This selects Macro DEV 1 to DEV 12 This selects device ALL This selects all valid regions MSTR This selects the master timeline see Creating and Saving a Master Timeline pa...

Page 729: ...ws the name of the reference region and the number of the last register recalled for this region 3 Enter the number of the register you want to recall using the numeric keypad To find an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button To search for an empty register common to all currently selectable regions press the button again To search for an empty register in the 100 rang...

Page 730: ...the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block to the effect operation mode 2 Press the MSTR RCLL button This switches the memory recall section to the master timeline recall mode 3 Press the BANK SEL button This switches the memory recall section to the bank selection mode ...

Page 731: ...the memory recall section show the register states as follows Lit yellow Last recalled register Lit orange Register holding data Off Empty register 5 Press the number of the desired register The button you pressed lights yellow and this recalls the master timeline The alphanumeric display shows the selected bank and register numbers ...

Page 732: ...n the numeric keypad control block or Multifunction Flexi Pad control block is linked to the menu If you carry out region selection by pressing a region selection button then all the regions assigned to that button are selected 1 In the Key Frame menu press HF7 Region Select The Key Frame Region Select menu appears On the left of the status area region selection buttons appear Depending on the reg...

Page 733: ... Module group appear at the lower left of the status area and if you press either Region Sel Btn Area or Mem Rcl Btn Area button you can select a region assigned to a region selection button in the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block or a button in the memory recall section Selection screen for regions assigned to region selection buttons ...

Page 734: ... of the status area to select the button you want to assign The regions currently assigned to the button you pressed appear on the right side of the status area 3 In the Region Select group press the button for the region you want to select turning it on 4 In the Ref Region Select group press the button indication you want to make the reference region The button you pressed lights green ...

Page 735: ...umber press the GO TO KF button then enter the keyframe number with the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block or Multifunction Flexi Pad control block and press the ENTER button to confirm To move the edit point to a specified timecode press the GO TO TC button then enter the timecode value with the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block or Multifunction Flexi Pad control ...

Page 736: ...rence from the current keyframe number or timecode value Press the numeric keypad button and enter the difference then press the TRIM button Each time you press the button it toggles between plus and minus Note You can also specify edit points in the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block For details of the operation see Keyframe Creation and Editing in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block pag...

Page 737: ...ew keyframe Use the keyframe control block for carrying out the operation 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on This enables effect editing in the keyframe control block 2 Create the image you want to be the first keyframe 3 Press the INS button This takes the current image as the first keyframe You can make a setting in the Setup menu so that when you recall an empty register the system stat...

Page 738: ...n and press the INS button This inserts the current image as the new keyframe Inserting a keyframe may change the total duration of the effect See Time Settings page 707 Modification Modifying keyframes Use the following procedure in the keyframe control block 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the desired edit point When the edit point is on a keyframe this is what yo...

Page 739: ...nge to be modified 3 Carry out the necessary modifications 4 Press the FROM TO button turning it on The display in the numeric keypad control block shows the current keyframe number followed by TO 5 Enter the number of the last keyframe to be modified from the numeric keypad control block and press the ENTER button to confirm 6 Press the MOD button Alternatively hold down the SHIFT button and pres...

Page 740: ...keypad in the numeric keypad control block carry out the following operations To set the first keyframe in the range to be modified press the CLR button then enter the keyframe number and press the ENTER button to confirm To set the last keyframe in the range to be modified enter the keyframe number from the numeric keypad and press the ENTER button to confirm 6 Press the MOD button Alternatively ...

Page 741: ...values are taken as relative values which modify all of the selected keyframes Background A Background B Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution Modify keyframe 2 Changing the position of background B in the horizontal direction Select keyframes 1 to 3 and modify simultaneously Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution Result The horizontal position of background B in keyframes 1...

Page 742: ...dit point is between two keyframes the previous keyframe is what you delete Background A Background B Modify keyframe 2 Changing the position of background B in the horizontal direction Select keyframes 1 to 3 and modify simultaneously Result Background B of keyframes 1 and 3 is moved in the horizontal direction by the same amount as in keyframe 2 Keyframe 1 Keyframe 2 Keyframe 3 Effect execution ...

Page 743: ...he EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Stop the effect at the edit point you want to move 3 To move a number of keyframes in a single operation press the FROM TO button turning it on to specify the keyframes For how to specify a range of keyframes see Modifying more than one keyframe simultaneously page 739 4 Press the DEL button This deletes the keyframe and saves it in the paste buffer 5 Move the e...

Page 744: ...the paste buffer 5 Move the edit point to the position where you want to insert the copied keyframe 6 Press the PASTE button This inserts the keyframe you have copied after the current keyframe In constant duration mode the copied keyframe overwrites the edit point To insert the copied keyframe before a keyframe Hold down the SHIFT button and press the PASTE button to insert the copied keyframe be...

Page 745: ...ple keyframe 2 is taken as the start point 3 Press the KF LOOP button in the keyframe control block turning it on The numeric keypad control block display shows the start point keyframe number as follows The example shown means from keyframe 2 to where the end keyframe is to follow 4 With the numeric keypad buttons of the numeric keypad control block enter the number of the last keyframe in the lo...

Page 746: ...ontrol block is lit amber press it turning it green The numeric keypad control block display shows the current loop range If for example the start point is keyframe 2 and the end point is keyframe 5 this appears as follows 2 To change the loop range press the CLEAR button in the numeric keypad control block To change the loop count only press the ENTER button then skip to step 6 When you press the...

Page 747: ...ining number is not shown If the REV button is lit the loop is played in the reverse order Canceling keyframe loop execution Press the REWIND button in the keyframe control block Changes to the loop range caused by keyframe insertion deletion When a keyframe is inserted or deleted within the loop range the loop range also changes The following are examples Example 1 If keyframe 3 is deleted the lo...

Page 748: ...yframe insert modify delete or paste operation immediately after execution press the UNDO button Duration Mode Setting There are two keyframe duration modes variable duration mode and constant duration mode in which the effect duration is fixed see page 707 To select variable duration mode turn the CONST DUR button off To select constant duration mode press the CONST DUR button turning it on 1 2 3...

Page 749: ...transition mode Frame I O H select frame in out transition mode in the horizontal direction Frame I O V select frame in out transition mode in the vertical direction For details of creating an effect for user programmable DME see Creating User Programmable DME Patterns in Chapter 6 Volume 1 Note Which DME channel is selected as the reference region lit green in the numeric keypad control block is ...

Page 750: ...d a pause setting to a keyframe see page 744 COPY button Copy a keyframe see page 744 PSTE button Paste a keyframe see page 743 ALL button Select all keyframes in an effect see page 738 STOR button Save the effect see page 765 Buttons in the memory recall section in effect editing mode first page Press the PAGE 1 2 button to switch to the next button display Buttons in the memory recall section in...

Page 751: ...35 NEXT button Move the edit point to the next keyframe see page 735 RUN button Run the effect see page 760 EFF DUR button Set the effect duration see page 753 KF DUR button Set the keyframe duration see page 752 DLY button Set a delay see page 754 KF LOOP button Set a keyframe loop see page 745 CNST DUR button Switch the duration mode see page 748 GOTO TC button Move the edit point to the specifi...

Page 752: ...the Keyframe Duration Keyframe control block Setting the keyframe duration You can set the value of the keyframe duration independently for each keyframe by the following method 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on STOP NEXT KF NORM REV NORM REV EFF LOOP EDIT ENBL KF DUR DELAY EFF DUR COPY PASTE DEL SHIFT INS PREV KF NEXT KF MOD UNDO CONST DUR AUTO INS TURN OVER KF LOOP GO TO TC PAUSE GO TO ...

Page 753: ... the entry This changes the keyframe duration to the new setting Note In addition to the above operation the keyframe duration may also be automatically changed as a result of changing the effect duration See the next section Setting the Effect Duration To set the effect duration use the following procedure 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Press the EFF DUR button turning it on The dis...

Page 754: ...1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on 2 Press the DELAY button turning it on The display in the numeric keypad control block shows DELAY followed by the delay time seconds frames 3 Using the numeric keypad in the numeric keypad control block enter the timecode value for the delay as a maximum of four digits You can also use the TRIM button to enter a difference value See To enter a difference...

Page 755: ...M PST banks Second and third rows path settings for User1 to User8 Fourth row path settings for DME local channel and global channel 3D transforms and effects Note To carry out path operations relating to DME requires the BKDS 9470 DME Board Set or MVE 8000A 9000 DME Processor Making switcher path settings This section describes settings for M E 1 Key1 as an example The area for the VF buttons sho...

Page 756: ...cuting the effect causes no change Step There is no interpolation between keyframes so that the effect parameters are updated each time a keyframe is passed Linear Linear interpolation between keyframes resulting in constant speed movement S Curve The rate of change accelerates and decelerates before and after a keyframe so that the rate of change is maximum midway between two keyframes Spline The...

Page 757: ...wise CCW Rotate counterclockwise Short The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is shorter Long The hue changes in whichever of the clockwise and counterclockwise directions is longer Changing the path type for Xpt 1 Press the Xpt path type indication for the item that you want to change A path selection window appears 2 Press the indication for the desired pat...

Page 758: ...Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects 758 Path Setting Xpt Hold on When replaying a keyframe do not change the inputs ...

Page 759: ...n effect from the device control block the standard type Flexi Pad control block or the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block see Chapter 2 Volume 1 Executing Effects in the Keyframe Control Block Keyframe control block STOP NEXT KF NORM REV NORM REV EFF LOOP EDIT ENBL KF DUR DELAY EFF DUR COPY PASTE DEL SHIFT INS PREV KF NEXT KF MOD UNDO CONST DUR AUTO INS TURN OVER KF LOOP GO TO TC PAUSE GO TO K...

Page 760: ...utton in the transition control block turning it on to execute a keyframe effect with the fader lever in the same control block You can also assign the KF button to a transition type selection button in the transition control block For the operation of assigning the KF button to the transition type selection buttons see Overall Control Panel Settings Config Menu in Chapter 19 Volume 3 Notes It is ...

Page 761: ...ast keyframe When the REV button is lit The effect is executed in the direction from the last keyframe to the first keyframe When the NORM REV button is lit Each time the effect is executed the direction reverses Executing an effect up to the next keyframe 1 Press the STOP NEXT KF button turning it on 2 Press the RUN button This executes the effect as far as the next keyframe When the REV button i...

Page 762: ...ed bank number and last recalled register number appear in the numeric display 2 Press the following buttons to execute the effect REWIND Press this button to move to the first keyframe of the currently recalled effect RUN Press this button to run the currently recalled effect Executing an Effect in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block 1 In the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block press the ...

Page 763: ...o switch the memory recall section to the execution mode setting mode and set the execution mode with the following buttons then execute the effect EFF LOOP button Execute the effect repeatedly STOP NEXT button Execute the effect and stop at the next keyframe NORM button Execute the effect from the first keyframe to the last keyframe NORM REV button Execute the effect as far as the first or last k...

Page 764: ...ORE button turning it on 4 With the numeric keypad enter the number of the register in which you want to save the effect To find an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button To search for an empty register common to all currently selectable regions press the button again To search for an empty register in the 100 range press 1 0 0 period in this order Similarly to search ...

Page 765: ...fect editing operations 4 Press the STOR button turning it on 5 With the numeric keypad enter the number of the register in which you want to save the effect To find an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button To search for an empty register common to all currently selectable regions press the button again To search for an empty register in the 100 range press 1 0 0 peri...

Page 766: ...ns 2 Recall the register number of the effect you want to save on the master timeline for each region See Recalling a register from the numeric keypad control block page 723 3 Of the region selection buttons press those buttons for the regions you want to save on the master timeline turning them on 4 Press the region selection button MASTR turning it on The display shows the number of the register...

Page 767: ...owing procedure Information in master timeline register 1 before change Information in master timeline register 1 after change 1 Recall the master timeline register you want to change See Recalling a Register page 723 This simultaneously recalls M E 1 register 5 and P P register 5 and the M E 1 and P P region selection buttons light 2 Press the region selection button MASTR turning it off 3 Turn o...

Page 768: ... block lit hold down the STORE button While it is held down the buttons for the saved regions light When the button is released the state before it was held down is restored Creating and Saving a Master Timeline Using the Buttons in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block Creating and saving a master timeline 1 Press the EFF button turning it on This assigns the memory recall section to keyframe...

Page 769: ...f effects Save the effects for each region first then carry out the master timeline save Changing a master timeline You can change information already saved in a master timeline As an example to change the M E 2 register from Effect 11 to Effect 15 use the following procedure 1 Recall the master timeline register you want to change See Recalling a register from the numeric keypad control block pag...

Page 770: ...ne With the Menu You can save a master timeline using the Effect Master Timeline Store menu Recalling the Store menu 1 Do either of the following In the menu control block press the top menu selection button EFF In the numeric keypad control block press the EFF button twice in rapid succession The Effect menu appears 2 Press VF1 Master Timeline and HF1 Store The Master Timeline Store menu appears ...

Page 771: ...ress the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 2 Press Edit The Edit menu appears and you can now save the master timeline in the specified register In this menu again you can turn the knob to select the master timeline register The status area shows the status of each region in this master timeline 3 Using any of the following methods select the region Multiple selections ar...

Page 772: ... Turn the knob to select the number of the effect register 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 as required to set all regions and register numbers to be saved on the master timeline 7 In the Store group press Store This saves the settings To return to the state before saving the master timeline content In the Store group press Undo Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Effect Reg Effect register number 1 t...

Page 773: ...F3 to VF5 Effect Attribute Settings Applying effect dissolve To apply the effect dissolve attribute to a keyframe effect use the following procedure 1 In the Effect menu press VF2 Effect 1 99 and HF1 Attribute The Attribute menu appears The status area shows the region names register numbers and status and attribute settings 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list and in the selec...

Page 774: ...he register is write protected a letter L appears Empty status When the register is empty a letter E appears Effect Register Editing You can carry out the following editing on effect registers and master timeline registers Lock Write protect the contents of the register Copy Copy the contents of one register to another register Merge Merge the data of two registers It is not possible to merge mast...

Page 775: ...ons is also possible To select all regions press ALL 3 Press OK The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list 4 Using any of the following methods select the register Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs To select all registers press ALL 5 Press Lock turning it on To unlock the register Select the regi...

Page 776: ... The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list 4 Using any of the following methods select the desired registers Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs To select all registers press ALL 5 To copy without transferring the name in the Copy group press W o Name turning it on 6 In the Copy group press Copy T...

Page 777: ...to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs 5 Press Merge This carries out the merge Deleting data from effect registers 1 In the Effect menu press VF2 Effect 1 99 and HF6 Delete The Delete menu appears 2 Press the region display in the upper part of the list to display a selection window then select the region in the selection window Selecting multiple regions is also possible To select all...

Page 778: ... the list 4 Using any of the following methods select the register you want to name Press directly on the list in status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob The selected register appears in reverse video 5 Press Rename A keyboard window appears For details of keyboard window operation see Menu Operations in Chapter 2 Volume 1 6 Enter the name of not more than...

Page 779: ...r the register name for the M E 1 region takes precedence If there is no data for the M E 1 region then the register name appears in the sequence M E 2 M E 3 P P User1 to User8 DME ch1 to DME ch8 Device1 to Device12 P Bus GPI Macro Indication colors Each register has a color coded border indicating its status Selected register pale blue border Register containing data shown amber within the border...

Page 780: ...ister indication in the status area Turn the knob 2 In the Copy group press From __ 3 Select the copy destination register 4 In the Copy group press To __ This executes the copy Deleting the contents of a register This applies to all regions In the Effect Status menu use the following procedure 1 Using any of the following methods select the register you want to delete Press directly on the corres...

Page 781: ...re 1 Using any of the following methods select the register you want to rename Press directly on the corresponding register indication in the status area Turn the knob 2 Press Rename A keyboard window appears 3 Enter a name of up to eight characters and press Enter This changes the name Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Register Register selection 1 to 99 ...

Page 782: ...Chapter 13 Keyframe Effects 782 Register Operations in the Menus ...

Page 783: ...g Snapshots 795 Snapshot Operations in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block 799 Saving and Recalling Snapshots 799 Snapshot Operations in the Menus 806 Selecting a Region or Reference Region in a Menu 806 Setting Snapshot Attributes 806 Snapshot Status Display 809 Setting Key Snapshot Attributes 810 Creating and Saving a Master Snapshot 811 Snapshot Register Editing 812 Displaying a List of S...

Page 784: ...or DME The term snapshot alone usually refers to this type of snapshot This only applies to regions assigned to region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block and Multifunction Flexi Pad control block For details about a region see Regions page 701 Master snapshot This applies to the selected regions and the register numbers saved in the regions A master snapshot can be saved and rec...

Page 785: ...le When the snapshot is recalled the key settings remain unchanged This can be set independently for each keyer A Setup menu allows you to select whether or not the key on off state should also remain unchanged For details of the setting operation see Settings Relating to Keys Wipes Frame Memory and Color Correction Key Wipe FM CCR Menu in the Chapter 20 Volume 3 Effect dissolve The transition fro...

Page 786: ...ot in the Snapshot menu For more details see Snapshot Operations in the Menus page 806 Temporary attributes When recalling a snapshot you can temporarily apply attributes distinct from the attributes set for each register These are called temporary attributes You can set temporary attributes when recalling a snapshot Bus override If you recall a snapshot while holding down an A or B bus button the...

Page 787: ...rview Chapter 14 Snapshots This function is effective when cross point hold is off and you want to temporarily maintain the cross point setting When cross point hold is on the above operation is not necessary ...

Page 788: ...numeric keypad control block press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This allocates the numeric keypad control block to snapshot operations and the RCALL button lights EFF M E 1 USER 1 DME 1 DME 5 SNAP SHOT M E 2 USER 2 DME 2 DME 6 SHOT BOX M E 3 USER 3 DME 3 DME 7 MCRO P P USER 4 DME 4 DME 8 TRANS RATE RTR DEV 1 DEV 2 UNDO TC STORE STATS MASTR ALL P BUS GP1 STORE RCALL 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0 EFF TRI...

Page 789: ...T turns the button green to indicate its corresponding region as the new reference region For details of the precedence order for becoming the reference region see Reference region page 702 The display shows the name of the reference region and the number of the register previously recalled for that region 4 Press the STORE button turning it on 5 Enter the desired register number from the numeric ...

Page 790: ...eric keypad control block press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This allocates the numeric keypad control block to snapshot operations and the RCALL button lights 2 Press the region selection button corresponding to the region you want to recall turning it on Multiple selections are also possible M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P These select the corresponding M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 and PGM PST regions USER 1 to...

Page 791: ...ter previously recalled for that region 3 Enter the desired register number from the numeric keypad See step 5 page 789 in Saving a snapshot from the numeric keypad control block The entered register number appears in the display 4 To apply temporary attributes press the following buttons turning them on a When Xpt Hold mode is selected in setup b When Key Disable mode is selected in setup For the...

Page 792: ...n temporary attributes in step 4 the corresponding buttons go off When a master snapshot is recalled the region selection buttons light according to the saved region information To cancel a snapshot recall operation After saving a snapshot to cancel the recall press the UNDO button Note It is not possible to cancel recalling a master snapshot Creating and saving a master snapshot with the numeric ...

Page 793: ... registers they are considered in groups These groups are called banks and there are ten banks numbered from 0 to 9 The correspondence between banks and registers is shown in the following table 7 WIPE DME SNAP SHOT EFF MCRO SHOT BOX UNDO STORE STATS TRANS RATE BNAK 0 BANK 1 BANK SEL XPT HOLD A B U1 U2 1 2 3 4 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0 AUTO TRAN EFF DISS WIPE DME SNAP SHOT UNDO 1 2 3 4 5 6 XPT HOLD A B U1...

Page 794: ... be handled are numbers 1 to 8 Bank operations are therefore not possible It is also not possible to apply attributes or to cancel a snapshot save or recall operation once carried out To use registers 9 to 99 or to cancel a snapshot save operation use the numeric keypad control block Bank number Register numbers Bank 0 1 to 10 Bank 1 11 to 20 Bank 2 21 to 30 Bank 3 31 to 40 Bank 4 41 to 50 Bank 5 ...

Page 795: ...he following methods to select the bank for saving the snapshot On a simple type Flexi Pad control block there are no banks and this operation is not necessary To select bank 0 Press the BANK 0 button To select bank 1 Press the BANK 1 button To select any bank from 0 to 9 Press the BANK SEL button changing the memory recall section display as in the following figure select a number from 0 to 9 The...

Page 796: ...ot in the Flexi Pad control block standard type or simple type Note When an M E bank is not assigned to any region selection button in the numeric keypad control block in a setup setting it is not possible to recall a snapshot with the Flexi Pad control block of that M E bank See Assigning a Region to a Region Selection Button in the Numeric Keypad Control Block in Chapter 19 Volume 3 As an exampl...

Page 797: ...ired register name The button you pressed lights yellow and this recalls the snapshot The numeric display shows the selected register number after the bank number Deleting a snapshot in the Flexi Pad control block standard type or simple type As an example to delete a snapshot on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 bank Flexi Pad control block press the SNAPSHOT button This a...

Page 798: ...g a snapshot in the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block 3 Hold down the STORE STATS button then hold down the button in the memory recall section displaying the number of the corresponding register The button you pressed goes off and this deletes the snapshot The STORE STATS button lights amber Note On a simple type Flexi Pad control block it is not possible to delete a snapshot ...

Page 799: ...exi Pad control block of the CCP 6224 or CCP 6324 Control Panel as follows Saving and Recalling Snapshots Saving a snapshot in the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block As an example to save a snapshot on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the M E 1 bank make the settings for the state you want to save as a snapshot EFF button Alphanumeric display Region selection buttons Memory recal...

Page 800: ...ns in the memory recall section See Assigning a Region to a Region Selection Button in the Numeric Keypad Control Block or Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block in Chapter 19 Volume 3 The first pressed button lights green as the reference region and any subsequently pressed buttons light amber Pressing one of the amber lit buttons while holding down SNAPSHOT turns the button green to indicate its ...

Page 801: ...ntered appears in the alphanumeric display To find an empty register press the button without entering a number and the number of an empty register appears in the alphanumeric display Confirm the displayed number by pressing the ENTR button This saves the data in the specified register To cancel a snapshot save operation After saving a snapshot to cancel the save hold down the STORE STATS button a...

Page 802: ...mporary attribute Set this to Off to add an attribute EFF DISS button Add the effect dissolve attribute DUR xxx button Set the effect dissolve duration The current setting is shown by xxx When you press this button the memory recall section switches to numeric keypad input mode and you can enter the setting value AUTO TRNS button Add the auto transition attribute XHLD xxx button Add the bus cross ...

Page 803: ...er region MASTR This selects a master snapshot Note The regions that can be selected simultaneously are those assigned to the region selection buttons in the memory recall section See Assigning a Region to a Region Selection Button in the Numeric Keypad Control Block or Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block in Chpater 19 Volume 3 It is not possible to select MASTR and other regions simultaneously ...

Page 804: ...ge 785 Note Adding a temporary attribute does not affect the attribute settings saved in registers To add a temporary attribute with the cross point control block buttons press the following buttons turning them on a When setup setting is Xpt Hold mode b When setup setting is Key Disable mode Note This setting is maintained until the next time the XPT HOLD button is pressed 5 Press the button in t...

Page 805: ...an example to delete a snapshot on the M E 1 bank use the following procedure 1 In the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block press the SNAPSHOT button press region selection button to select M E1 only This assigns the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block to snapshot operations The numeric display shows the last selected bank number and the last recalled register number on the corresponding bank 2...

Page 806: ...plying attributes and so on using the same menu See page 813 Selecting a Region or Reference Region in a Menu During snapshot operations you can select a region in the menu This is convenient for selecting some of the regions assigned to the numeric keypad control block or changing the reference region For details of the operations see Selecting by menus page 732 Setting Snapshot Attributes Applyi...

Page 807: ... details see Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings in Chapter 20 Volume 3 1 Press XPT Hold The Snapshot Attribute Xpt Hold menu appears The status area shows a list of the currently selected regions and bus names 2 Using any of the following methods select the register Press directly on the list in the status area To select one or more buses press Plural and then select buses Press the arrow key...

Page 808: ...set the duration for a dissolve set as a temporary attribute effect in the numeric keypad or Flexi Pad control block turn the knob To apply the auto transition attribute Press Auto Transition turning it on To apply the GPI output attribute 1 Press GPI Output turning it on 2 Turn the knob to set the port number To apply the clip event attribute Note The following operating procedure can be used onl...

Page 809: ... it on For details of attributes and available attributes see Snapshot Attributes page 785 Snapshot Status Display The Snapshot Attribute menu displays the following information For details of how to access the Snapshot Attribute menu see page 806 Region name The selected region name appears in the upper part of the list Register number Register name Write protected status When the register is wri...

Page 810: ...us and DME back key bus Aux Cross point hold is set for one of the AUX buses Mon Cross point hold is set for one of the monitor buses Fm1 Fm2 Cross point hold is set for one of the frame memory 1 and 2 buses Ccr1 Ccr2 Cross point hold is set for one of the CCR 1 and 2 buses RTR Cross point hold is set for the Router region Displayed character codes Attributes set Duration value The effect dissolve...

Page 811: ...ollowing modes for save and recall operations XPT Only the key material selection data is saved or recalled Modifier Only the key modifier settings are saved or recalled Transition Only the independent key transition settings are saved or recalled Creating and Saving a Master Snapshot To save a master snapshot in the Snapshot menu after recalling the Snapshot Master Snapshot Store menu refer to th...

Page 812: ...er snapshot wipe snapshot DME wipe snapshot and key snapshot registers Lock Write protect the contents of the register Copy Copy the contents of one register to another register Move Move the contents of one register to another register Swap Swap the contents of two registers Delete Delete the contents of a register Name Attach a name to a register For details of snapshot register operations see E...

Page 813: ...E 1 region then the register name appears in the sequence M E 2 P P User1 to User8 DME ch1 to DME ch8 RTR Operations in the Misc Snapshot Menu Recalling a snapshot 1 In the Misc menu press Snapshot The Snapshot menu appears 2 As required change the bank see page 814 3 Press the button for the number or name you want to recall This recalls the snapshot and the button you pressed lights green Saving...

Page 814: ... to the snapshot represented by a lit green memory recall button use the following procedure 1 To apply the cross point hold attribute in the Attribute Xpt Hold group select the appropriate bus Note A setting in the Setup menu determines whether key disable is applied to cross point hold or not For details see Setting the Operation Mode of the Key Bus XPT HOLD Button in Chpater 20 Volume 3 2 Selec...

Page 815: ...snapshot and the button you pressed goes off Renaming a snapshot register 1 In the Misc Snapshot menu press Rename The button lights amber 2 As required change the bank 3 Press the button for the number you want to rename A keyboard window appears 4 Enter the register name and press Enter The new name appears on the memory recall button ...

Page 816: ...Chapter 14 Snapshots 816 Snapshot Operations in the Menus ...

Page 817: ...x Register in the Numeric Keypad Control Block 823 Creating a Shotbox Register in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block 825 Creating a Shotbox Register Using the Menus 827 Shotbox Execution 831 Shotbox Execution From the Numeric Keypad Control Block 831 Shotbox Execution in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block or the Flexi Pad Control Block 832 Shotbox Execution in the Utility Shotbox Con...

Page 818: ...he user preference buttons in the menu control block see page 818 For details of the menu control block utility shotbox control block and cross point control block see Menu Control Block Utility Shotbox Control Block and Cross Point Control Block in Chapter 2 Volume 1 For details of the settings for assigning functions to buttons see Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu in Chapter 19 Volu...

Page 819: ...e Utility Shotbox Control Block page 834 1 Press one of the bank selection buttons BANK1 to BANK4 to select a bank The bank selection button you pressed lights amber For the selected bank the memory recall buttons show the button numbers and corresponding button states If a button has been given a name in the setup menu this name appears Not lighted buttons with nothing saved Lit orange buttons sa...

Page 820: ...tons in the utility shot box control block Note To use this function it is first necessary to assign the utility shot box mode switching function to the control panel PRE MCRO button For details of the assignment operation see Assigning the Utility Shot Box Mode Switching Function in Chapter 19 Volume 3 Cross point control block in the PGM PST block You can assign any action to the cross point but...

Page 821: ...on is executing a shot box register follow the procedure Executing a Shot Box Function With the Key 2 Row Cross Point Buttons page 835 1 Press the PRE MCRO button turning it on 2 Press one of the bank switching buttons see previous figure to select the bank These buttons correspond to banks 1 to 5 in sequence from the left 3 Press the cross point button to which the desired action is assigned This...

Page 822: ... set for each register When this is set to On an effect recalled by a shotbox operation is automatically run When register 1 is executed this recalls M E 1 snapshot 1 User2 effect 5 and DME ch3 effect 1 For register 1 auto run is On and therefore the User2 and DME ch3 effects are run as soon as they have been recalled When register 3 is executed M E 1 effect 1 P P effect 90 and User1 effect 1 are ...

Page 823: ...data and the effect setting data and save in the register The procedure described here makes the snapshot settings first followed by the effect settings Creating a shotbox register 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This assigns the numeric keypad control block to snapshot operations 2 Specify the register number of the snapshot you want to save in a shot...

Page 824: ... in a shotbox register and the STORE button goes off At the same time the RCALL button lights 8 In the numeric keypad control block press the EFF button turning it on 9 Specify the register number of the keyframe effect you want to save in a shotbox register and then recall it for each region For details of the procedure for recalling a register see Recalling a Register page 723 10Referring to ste...

Page 825: ...tton is lit the mode selection buttons TRANS RATE button and so on in the numeric keypad control block do not operate To change the mode press the RCALL button or SHOTBOX button so that the STORE button goes off Creating a Shotbox Register in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block 1 In the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block press the SNAPSHOT button turning it on This changes the Multifuncti...

Page 826: ...ber of the selected register appears in the alphanumeric display An E after the number indicates an empty register 8 Press ENTER This saves the region you turned on in step 6 and the register number you recalled for that region as a snapshot setting in a shotbox register and the STORE button goes off At the same time the RCALL button lights 9 Press the EFF button turning it on 10Specify the regist...

Page 827: ...k the region saved in the register press and hold the following buttons To check the snapshot region SNAPSHOT button To check the keyframe effect region EFF button The memory recall section buttons change as shown in the following illustration and the region for the saved data lights To recall an assigned effect and simultaneously execute it Press the AUTO RUN button lighting it green then save th...

Page 828: ...register name 2 If necessary switch the region display by pressing one of the following buttons in the status area M E P P Shows the allocations for M E 1 M E1 M E 2 M E2 M E 3 M E3 and P P P P User Shows the allocations for User1 USR1 to User8 USR8 DME Shows the allocations for DME ch1 DME1 ch2 DME2 ch3 DME3 ch4 DME4 ch5 DME5 ch6 DME6 ch7 DME7 and ch8 DME8 DEV1 8 Shows the allocations for Device1...

Page 829: ...a confirmation message appears asking whether or not to cancel the operation Press OK to return to the previous menu display without carrying out the registration If the operation is carried out the region selected in step 5 is registered on the master timeline and the parameters are now valid 7 Depending on the selection in step 6 set the parameters as follows When a snapshot is selected When an ...

Page 830: ...Chapter 15 Utility Shotbox 830 Shotbox Register Creation To execute the settings to check them Press Recall to execute the shotbox ...

Page 831: ... point control block see page 835 Utility shotbox control block see page 834 Shotbox Execution From the Numeric Keypad Control Block Numeric keypad control block EFF M E 1 USER 1 DME 1 DME 5 SNAP SHOT M E 2 USER 2 DME 2 DME 6 SHOT BOX M E 3 USER 3 DME 3 DME 7 MCRO P P USER 4 DME 4 DME 8 TRANS RATE RTR DEV 1 DEV 2 UNDO TC STORE STATS MASTR ALL P BUS GP1 STORE RCALL 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0 EFF TRIM CLR ...

Page 832: ...x register on recall the effect is immediately executed If you recall an empty register then shotbox execution has no effect When auto run is not set for the recalled register Simply recalling the register does not run the effect To do this in the keyframe control block press the RUN button Shotbox Execution in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block or the Flexi Pad Control Block Note In the si...

Page 833: ...in the memory recall section show the names and states of the registers corresponding to the selected bank Off register in which nothing is saved Lit orange register holding shotbox settings Lit yellow last executed register 3 Press the button in the memory recall section corresponding to the register you want to run The selected shotbox register is executed The pressed button lights yellow 7 8 9 ...

Page 834: ...er does not run the effect To do this press the RUN button Shotbox Execution in the Utility Shotbox Control Block Utility shotbox control block In the utility shotbox control block as the default setting the memory recall buttons have registers 1 to 96 allocated to banks 1 to 4 Bank Register allocation to memory recall buttons 1 1 to 24 2 25 to 48 3 49 to 72 4 73 to 96 1 BANK 1 2 3 4 7 BANK 2 BANK...

Page 835: ...ister has auto run set on recall the effect is immediately executed When auto run is not set for the recalled register Simply recalling the register does not run the effect To do this press the RUN button in the keyframe control block Executing a Shot Box Function With the Key 2 Row Cross Point Buttons You can use the key 2 row of each of the M E 1 to M E 3 and PGM PST banks in the same way as the...

Page 836: ...tbox 836 Shotbox Execution 2 Press one of the bank switching buttons see the figure on page 820 to select the bank 3 Press the cross point button to which the desired shot box is assigned This executes the shot box function ...

Page 837: ...one register to another Move Move data from one register to another Swap Swap the contents of two registers Delete Delete the contents of a register Name Attach a name to a register The procedures for shotbox register editing are similar to the procedures described in Effect Register Editing page 774 Unlike in effect register editing however it is not necessary to specify a region in shotbox regis...

Page 838: ...Chapter 15 Utility Shotbox 838 Shotbox Register Editing ...

Page 839: ...k 867 Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro 868 Creating and Editing a Macro 869 Saving a Macro 872 Macro Operations in the Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block 873 Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro 873 Creating and Editing a Macro 875 Macro Editing Using Menus 877 Macro Register Editing 877 Online Editing of Macro Events 877 Offline Editing of Macro Events 883 Macro Att...

Page 840: ...Macro Timeline 910 Creating and Editing a Macro Timeline 912 ...

Page 841: ...termed a macro register For each control panel there are 99 macro registers numbered 1 to 99 Events The individual control panel operations constituting a macro are termed events One macro can contain a maximum of 99 events The following table shows the operations for each control block of the control panel that can be saved as events in a macro Control block Event Auxiliary bus control block Cros...

Page 842: ... up b simple type Transition execution section take Tansition type selection Pattern limit on off compact type Transition execution section auto transition and cut Independent key transition execution section auto transition a Next transition setting Transition type selection Pattern limit on off VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips playback b VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memo...

Page 843: ...napshots Master timeline Keyframe control block Effect rewind Effect execution Effect fast forward Selection of effect execution direction Device control block trackball joystick search dial c VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips start point setting VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips playback VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips stop VTR disk recorder Exten...

Page 844: ...ing the sequence of operations on the control panel that you want to save as events in the macro To add an event to an existing macro recall the register holding the macro and create the event you want to add Note While editing a macro it is not possible to execute another macro Creating a macro To include all information associated with an operation when registering a macro event When registering...

Page 845: ...lume 3 Events requiring adjustment when creating a macro The following events require time for execution to complete and therefore when executed within a macro sequence a pause event must be inserted to adjust the timing Rewinding effects involving external device control VTR disk recorder Extended VTR cue up For example create a macro to cue up a VTR and then play back as follows Auto insert mode...

Page 846: ...a macro Undoing an editing operation You can undo the last event insertion modification deletion or paste operation Macro merging During macro editing you can recall and copy another register to merge it with the macro being edited For example while editing macro register 2 you can recall and copy register 1 to merge it as shown in the following figure 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Recall macr...

Page 847: ...which the macro is paused the pause length to any value in the range 1 to 999 frames When the set time has elapsed the macro is automatically executed Pause zero event By including a pause event with the time set to zero you can make macro execution pause at the pause event Step execution requires a Setup menu setting By selecting step execution mode in the Setup menu you can make macro execution ...

Page 848: ...tions carried out in the numeric keypad control block and the keyframe control block Note For a macro take operation see Macro Execution page 847 the numeric keypad control block and keyframe control block are not used Use the Take button in the Flexi Pad control block For an overview of macros see Macros page 841 For macro operations in the numeric keypad control block use the following buttons S...

Page 849: ...See the following figure EFF M E 1 USER 1 DME 1 DME 5 SNAP SHOT M E 2 USER 2 DME 2 DME 6 SHOT BOX M E 3 USER 3 DME 3 DME 7 MCRO P P USER 4 DME 4 DME 8 TRANS RATE RTR DEV 1 DEV 2 UNDO TC STORE STATS MASTR ALL P BUS GP1 STORE RCALL 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 0 EFF TRIM CLR AUTO DISS TRANS ENBL GPI ENTER MCRO button UNDO button STORE STATS button Display STORE button RCALL button Numeric keypad ...

Page 850: ...assigns the numeric keypad control block to macro operations and the RCALL button lights 2 Enter the number of the register to be recalled with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register instead of entering a number press the period button The display shows the corresponding register number A letter E after the number indicates that the corresponding register is empty STOP NEXT KF ...

Page 851: ...xecution if you switch the control panel to macro editing mode the macro being executed stops During macro editing it is not possible to execute a macro While executing a macro using the Flexi Pad control block or the button with a macro attachment set it is not possible to recall and execute a different macro from the numeric keypad control block Creating and Editing a Macro Use the numeric keypa...

Page 852: ...press the AUTO INS button in the keyframe control block to toggle the auto insert mode on or off 3 Create the events carry out the control panel operations to be registered as events in the macro You can include pause events see page 857 For details of events that can be registered see Events page 841 When auto insert mode see page 851 is on execution of a control panel operation automatically reg...

Page 853: ...ss a button for which a macro attachment is set the macro in the register assigned to the button is recalled and the following occurs When auto insert mode is on it is merged with the macro being edited However the macro assigned to the button is not executed When auto insert mode is off it is copied to the paste buffer Pressing the PASTE button in the keyframe control block merges it with the mac...

Page 854: ... block enter the target number and confirm with the ENTER button Inserting an event 1 Specify the edit point See page 853 2 If required press the AUTO INS button in the keyframe control block to toggle the auto insert mode on or off 3 Create the event When auto insert mode see page 851 is on the event is automatically added to the macro When auto insert mode is off proceed to step 4 4 When auto in...

Page 855: ...D button in the keyframe control block This modifies the specified range of events simultaneously Modifying all events at the same time 1 Carry out steps 1 to 3 of the procedure in Modifying a single event page 854 2 Press the ALL button in the keyframe control block turning it on 3 Press the MOD button This modifies all events in the specified range simultaneously Deleting an event 1 Specify the ...

Page 856: ...ontrol block To paste before the edit point hold down the SHIFT button in the keyframe control block and press the PASTE button This pastes the events from the paste buffer Copying events 1 Specify the edit point for the start of the range to be copied 2 To copy multiple events simultaneously press the FROM TO button or ALL button in the keyframe control block then specify the range in the numeric...

Page 857: ...de is off press the INS button in the keyframe control block to insert the pause event Merging macro register data 1 Specify the edit point See page 853 2 Press the RCALL button in the numeric keypad control block lighting it amber 3 Enter the number of the macro register you want to copy using the numeric keypad buttons The display shows the register number 4 Press the ENTER button The RCALL butt...

Page 858: ...lowing procedure to save the register after creating or editing modifying a macro 1 In the numeric keypad control block press the MCRO button turning it on This assigns the numeric keypad control block to macro operations 2 Press the STORE button turning it on 3 Enter the number of the register in which you want to save the macro with the numeric keypad buttons To search for an empty register inst...

Page 859: ...el Operation Macro menu you can set the macro execution mode to Pause Only or Full Editing see Setting the Macro Execution Mode in Chapter 19 Volume 3 The display of the standard type Flexi Pad control block changes as follows depending on the selected mode of macro execution When entering macro editing mode with Pause Only selected WIPE DME SNAP SHOT EFF MCRO SHOT BOX UNDO STORE STATS TRANS RATE ...

Page 860: ...here are 10 banks numbered from 0 to 9 For details of the correspondence between banks and registers see Banks and Registers page 793 Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro Carrying out a macro operation in the normal mode Use the following procedure to recall a macro register 1 In the Flexi Pad control block press the MCRO button turning it on WIPE DME SNAP SHOT EFF MCRO SHOT BOX UNDO S...

Page 861: ...ach button in the memory recall section shows the corresponding register name and register status for the selected bank Note that in the Setup menu you can select whether to display register names or register numbers Lit orange Register holding macro data Lit yellow Last recalled register Off Empty register 3 Press the button in the memory recall section showing the name of the register to be reca...

Page 862: ...he end of execution of that macro you cannot recall and execute a separate macro from the Flexi Pad control block for a different bank Executing a macro in normal execution mode with pause events set When execution of a macro is paused the Take button is assigned to the memory recall section To restart the macro execution press the Take button You can switch the normal execution mode and step exec...

Page 863: ...s the MCRO button turning it on This assigns the Flexi Pad control block to macro operations 2 Select the bank of the register in which you want to save the macro For details of the method of operation see step 2 in the previous item Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro page 860 3 Hold down the MCRO button in the Flexi Pad control block and press the button in the memory recall section...

Page 864: ...s follows 6 Press the STORE XX button in the memory recall section where XX is the register number The STORE STATS button lights amber This saves the created macro in the register and macro editing ends The Flexi Pad control block returns to the state before macro editing began The MCRO button lights amber Notes During macro editing you can press a mode selection button in the Flexi Pad control bl...

Page 865: ...so not possible To cancel the saving of a macro To cancel the saving of a macro immediately after performing it hold down the STORE STATS button and press the UNDO button Inserting a pause event 1 Press the PAUS button in the memory recall section The buttons in the memory recall section change as follows 2 Enter the length of pause you want to set 0 to 999 frames 3 Press the PAUS ENTR button This...

Page 866: ...etails of the method of operation see step 2 page 861 of Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro 3 Hold down the STORE STATS button and then press the button in the memory recall section showing the corresponding register number The button you pressed in the memory recall section goes off and this deletes the macro The STORE STATS button lights amber ...

Page 867: ...is necessary in the Setup menu to switch the UNDO button to the MCRO button For more details see Setting the Assignment of Macro Operation Buttons in Chapter 19 Volume 3 Note In a simple type Flexi Pad control block only registers 1 to 6 can be used for operations There are no bank operations For registers 7 to 99 use the numeric keypad control block XPT HOLD A B U1 U2 1 2 3 4 1 DME SNAP SHOT 2 3 ...

Page 868: ...ro is executed During the macro execution the button pressed remains yellow but flashes and when the macro execution completes it changes to permanently lit The numeric display shows the selected register number Notes Only one macro can be executed at a time During macro execution if you recall the same register again execution of the macro stops Individual events registered in a macro are execute...

Page 869: ...ess the button in the memory recall section showing the register to be recalled 3 Press the Take button This executes one event within the macro then stops The number of events executed as shown in the memory recall section status display is incremented by one 4 Repeat step 3 executing the macro event by event When all events in the macro have been executed the Take button goes off Creating and Ed...

Page 870: ...ired events in the macro The numeric display shows the last registered event position and the total number of events 6 Press the STOR 1 button in the memory recall section This saves the created macro in the register and ends the macro editing mode the MCRO button lights amber Notes During macro editing if you press any of the mode selection buttons in the Flexi Pad control block other than MCRO b...

Page 871: ...ess the NEXT button To move the edit point to the event immediately preceding the current macro event press the PREV button Inserting an event To add an event to an already created macro use the following procedure 1 Specify the edit point See above 2 Carry out the event to be added on the control panel For details of events that can be registered see Events page 841 3 In the memory recall section...

Page 872: ...on lighting it green 3 Press the DEL button This deletes all events within the register Saving a Macro In the memory recall section press the STOR X X register number button to save the edited macro in a register To return to the state before editing without saving the macro editing results Press the EXIT button to recall the same register again This returns to the state before editing without sav...

Page 873: ...Multifunction Flexi Pad control block Use the following buttons Recalling a Macro Register and Executing a Macro 1 Press the MCRO mode selection button turning it on This switches the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block to macro operation mode 2 Enter the register number with the numeric keypad buttons and press the ENTR button to recall the register MCRO button Numeric keypad buttons DRCT MODE ...

Page 874: ...ank button any of 0 to 9 This selects the bank and the buttons in the memory recall section show the macro register state as follows Lit yellow Last recalled register Lit orange Register holding macro data Off Empty register 5 Press the button for the number of the register to be recalled The button you pressed lights yellow and the macro held in the corresponding register is recalled and executed...

Page 875: ...vents are automatically executed in sequence However if there is a pause event set at some point execution pauses at that point Then pressing the TAKE button in the memory recall section resumes execution Step execution mode The macro events are executed one at a time with pauses in between Execute the events in sequence by repeatedly pressing the TAKE button You can select normal execution mode o...

Page 876: ... page 856 PSTE button Paste a macro event see page 857 ALL button Select all macro events see page 855 STOR button Save the macro see page 858 INS button Insert a macro event see page 854 MOD button Modify a macro event see page 854 DEL button Delete a macro event see page 855 FROM TO button Switch to the mode for entering a value range with the numeric keypad see page 854 SHFT button Move a macro...

Page 877: ...ntents of a register Name Attach a name to a register The operations for macro register editing are the same as those for effect register editing see page 774 except the region selection operation which is not necessary for macro register editing Online Editing of Macro Events Using the On Line Edit menu you carry out online editing of macro events Menu Function Operations Register menu macro regi...

Page 878: ...age 869 2 In any of the following menus select the same register as the register recalled in step 1 and press On Line Edit in the button area Macro Register Lock menu Macro Register Delete menu Macro Register Rename menu File Shotbox Macro Macro File Edit menu The On Line Edit menu appears and you can now carry out online editing of the events held in the recalled register Meanwhile the control bl...

Page 879: ...er Shows the current event number When the FROM TO button in the keyframe control block is pressed to select a range of events this appears as a range From X To Y 1 Register number 2 Register name 3 Event number 5 Macro register listing 4 Remaining Memory 6 ALL button 7 Macro creation event list 8 Insert Before button 9 Insert After button 0 Delete button qa Modify button qs Prev button qd Next bu...

Page 880: ...ows the current event in the list in reverse video You can turn knob 1 to scroll the list but this does not change the cursor position Depending on the switcher status the cursor color changes as follows Yellow in macro editing mode Gray when the editing mode is exited by a control panel operation Blue during macro execution f ALL button Selects all events in the macro register listing g Macro cre...

Page 881: ...er To insert an event 1 On the control panel if auto insert mode is on switch it off 2 On the control panel create a macro event The created event appears in the macro creation event list For more details of the display see Macro File Editing Rules page 949 3 In the macro register listing press Prev or Next to select the position where you want to insert the created event 4 Carry out either of the...

Page 882: ...tes the selected event Note If not in macro editing mode 1 Delete is disabled and it is not possible to delete the selected event 1 While a macro is being executed on the control panel when macro saving has been executed or when the EXIT button in the Flexi Pad control block or Multifunction Flexi Pad control block has been pressed 3 Operate the control panel to save the editing result To modify a...

Page 883: ...u you carry out offline editing of macro events In the Off Line Edit menu you can carry out editing in the menu only unrelated to operation of the control panel To display the Off Line Edit menu In any of the following menus select the register or device holding the macro you want to edit and press Off Line Edit in the button area Macro Register Lock menu Macro Register Delete menu Macro Register ...

Page 884: ...d c Macro listing Lists the macro events that are saved in the register or file The cursor moves to the selected event Each macro event consists of the following components which you can check in the list 1 Register or file number 2 Register or file name 3 Macro listing 4 Editing button group 5 Macro editing candidate list 6 Insert Before button 7 Append button 8 Delete button 9 Set button 0 Store...

Page 885: ...ng candidates for the selection from the editing button group f Insert Before button Inserts immediately before the event selected in the macro listing g Append button Adds an empty row at the end of the macro listing h Delete button Deletes the event selected in the macro listing i Set button Reflects the item selected in the macro editing candidate list in the macro listing and editing buttons j...

Page 886: ...sting as an event component Additionally in the leftmost blank position of the editing button group to the right of Contents a button appears corresponding to the item in the macro editing candidate list For example if Event is selected an EVNT button appears 5 In the editing button group press the button that has just appeared The item corresponding to the button appears in the macro editing cand...

Page 887: ...s 1 to 7 To close the Off Line Edit menu without saving the editing results Press Exit to return to the menu that was on the screen immediately before the offline editing 8 Press Store The numeric keypad window appears 9 Enter the register number as required and press Enter The current macro is stored in the register The menu screen switches to the menu that was on the screen immediately before th...

Page 888: ...t menu 3 Press Store This saves the results of the macro register or macro file editing and returns to the File Edit menu To create a new macro 1 From the list in any of the following menus select an empty register or file and press Off Line Edit in the button area Macro Register Lock menu Macro Register Delete menu Macro Register Rename menu File Shotbox Macro Macro File Edit menu The Off Line Ed...

Page 889: ...only is executed The selection of pre or post macro mode is carried out in the cross point control block of the PGM PST bank or the M E banks For the macro only mode assign the selection function to a utility shotbox control block button or user preference button and make the selection by pressing the button Alternatively without pressing the button you can make the selection simply by simultaneou...

Page 890: ...s point button1st row b Cross point button 2nd row b Keyframe control block RUN REWIND and FF buttons NORM REV and NORM REV buttons Device control block trackball joystick The buttons to which the same functions as those of VTR disk recorder Extended VTR frame memory clips play cue stop and start tc buttons Device control block search dial PLAY CUE STOP and START TC buttons Downstream key control ...

Page 891: ...ve buttons are the same The keys being the same includes cases such as Key1 2 assigned to PGM PST being the same as DSK1 2 Key1 2 assigned to M E 1 being the same as M E 1 Key1 2 and so on i Only when key row is operated in the utility shotbox mode j When the auxiliary control mode is on Notes After setting a macro attachment to a cross point button in the auxiliary bus control block if in the Set...

Page 892: ...l of the macro attachments in a single operation Displaying the macro attachment list You can display the macro attachment settings in the form of a list in the menu display to check them Setting and Canceling a Macro Attachment Setting a macro attachment to a button This section describes the example of setting a macro attachment for the background A row cross points See Setting a macro attachmen...

Page 893: ...ter 19 Volume 3 To make a macro attachment setting in macro only mode Note To carry out this operation it is first necessary to assign the Macro Only Set function to the user preference buttons in the menu control block or the utility shotbox control operation Carry out this assignment in the Eng Setup Panel Prefs Utility menu For details see Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu in Chapte...

Page 894: ...e it is held down buttons for which macro attachments are set flash as follows While the PRE MCRO button is held down Buttons set in pre macro mode flash amber Buttons set in macro only mode flash green While the POST MCRO button is held down Buttons set in post macro mode flash amber Buttons set in macro only mode flash green Setting a macro attachment to a fader lever You can set a macro attachm...

Page 895: ... section The indicator lights at the position where the macro attachment is set Transition rate indication in the transition execution section This shows the fader lever position where the macro attachment is set as a percentage value Fader lever start position as 0 end position 100 Removing macro attachment settings To cancel a macro attachment to a button Hold down the PRE MCRO button or POST MC...

Page 896: ...89 For details of the macro attachment list display see About the Macro Attachment List Display in the Appendix page 962 Moving quickly within the macro attachment list from one block to another When you are viewing the macro attachment settings for a block in the macro attachment list you can move quickly from the current block to another block to check the settings for that block by pressing the...

Page 897: ...n is executed Post macro mode The button function is executed first and then the macro is executed Macro only mode The button function is not executed and the macro only is executed During macro execution the button you pressed flashes Notes It is not possible to execute more than one macro at a time Therefore even if you simultaneously press multiple buttons for which macro attachments are set on...

Page 898: ... the end position completing the travel it is not possible to execute the macro again When the preset color mix stroke mode is Normal see Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu in Chapter 20 Volume 3 the first lever operation executes the macro but the second lever operation does not During macro execution it is not possible to execute another macro Individual events stored in a macr...

Page 899: ... out in a menu For menu operations which are not recorded in menu macros see Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro page 970 Menu macro creation and editing Carry out menu macro creation and editing in the menu Executing menu macros You execute a menu macro after recalling a menu macro register You can recall and execute simultaneously You can also recall and execute a menu macro from a macr...

Page 900: ...ze these adjustment of the execution timing is required Events saved in a menu macro are executed according to the settings in setup and therefore if you change the setup settings it may not be possible to replay an event When two menu macros are recalled successively the later coming macro is ignored as far as the first macro is being executed Recalling a Menu Macro Register 1 In the Macro menu s...

Page 901: ... the menu macro register list To execute the menu macro at the same time as recalling the register press Recall Run x To recall the register only press Recall x Register number and name L E indication L indicates the register is locked E indicates an empty register Selected event number total number of events Menu macro configuration list Currently recalled register Number of register selected on ...

Page 902: ... menu macro register from a macro register Menu macro recall and execution operations can be saved as events in a control panel macro and then recalled If with the control panel in macro editing mode you execute a menu macro then this operation is recorded as an event For details of recording operations use the following references depending on the control panel or menu used Using the numeric keyp...

Page 903: ...u macro register list For details of the method of operation see Recalling a Menu Macro Register page 900 2 Press Menu Macro Edit The menu macro register is recalled and the system is now in menu macro editing mode The Menu Macro Edit menu appears 3 If required press Auto Insert to switch the auto insert mode on or off Menu macro register number Event number Menu macro register name Remaining Memo...

Page 904: ... the required events in the menu macro 7 Press the Store button The numeric keypad window appears 8 Enter the menu macro register number as required and press Enter The menu macro is saved with the specified number The menu returns to the state in step 1 To set a pause duration During menu macro editing use the following procedure 1 Enter the pause duration with the knob 2 Press Pause Set When aut...

Page 905: ...uto insert mode on or off When auto insert mode see page 851 is on a new menu is automatically inserted after the event selected in step 3 When auto insert mode is off skip to step 5 5 Carry out the editing using any of the following methods To delete the selected event press the Delete button To overwrite the selected event carry out the new menu operation then press the Modify button To insert a...

Page 906: ...to the event you want to display 2 Turn the knob About the menu macro editing mode display If while in menu macro editing mode you switch to another menu the display is as shown in the following figure Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 2 H Scroll Scroll the characters in the Data field 1 and upwards ...

Page 907: ... register number Menu macro register name Current event number total number of events Remaining memory The Previous page button shows one of the following When Auto Insert is on Menu Macro Auto Insert appears When Auto Insert is off Menu Macro Insert After appears but operates as Insert After Menu shortcut button to Menu Macro Edit menu ...

Page 908: ...following editing operations on menu macro registers Lock Write protect the contents of the menu macro register Copy Copy the contents of one menu macro register to another menu macro register Delete Delete the contents of a menu macro register Name Attach a name to a menu macro register The Previous page button shows one of the following When Auto Insert is on Menu Macro Auto Insert appears When ...

Page 909: ...hapter 16 Macros The operations for menu macro register editing are the same as those for effect register editing see page 774 except the region selection operation which is not necessary for menu macro register editing ...

Page 910: ... The following lists the key frame functions that can be used on the macro timeline RECALL 1 to 99 STORE 1 to 99 RECALL UNDO STORE UNDO search for empty register AUTO SAVE RECALL MODE RECALL RECALL REWIND EDIT ENABLE EDIT UNDO CONST DUR EFF DUR KF DUR DELAY PAUSE INSERT BEFORE INSERT AFTER MODIFY DELETE COPY PASTE BEFORE PASTE AFTER FROM TO ALL PREV KF NEXT KF GOTO TC GOTO KF RUN REWIND FF STOP NE...

Page 911: ...er of the timeline after the pause is ignored and the macro timeline ends at that point Register editing functions You can use the following editing functions on a register in which a macro timeline is stored Copy Move Swap Merge Lock Name Delete File related functions You can save and recall a created macro timeline as effect data in the File menu Timeline operations are carried out on a macro ti...

Page 912: ... the INS button in the keyframe control block 1 Press the EDIT ENBL button turning it on This enables timeline editing in the keyframe control block 2 In the Macro menu select VF4 Timeline and HF1 Timeline The Macro Timeline menu appears 3 Select Recall 1 that appears on the right As required turn the knob to select the number of the macro register 4 Press the Set button Recall 1 appears in the Ac...

Page 913: ...een use the same setting method as in the screen for setting an action on the macro timeline Alternatively you can select the reverse arrangement whereby when the REWIND button is pressed this executes the action set for the first keyframe and when the RUN button is pressed the first keyframe action is not executed In this case the Rewind Action setting is still valid For details of the setting se...

Page 914: ...914 Macro Timeline Chapter 16 Macros ...

Page 915: ...eting Files 929 File Batch Operations 932 Displaying the Batch Operation Menu 932 Batch Saving Files 932 Batch Loading Files 933 Batch Copying Files 934 Importing and Exporting Files 935 Displaying the Import Export Menu 935 Importing Frame Memory Data 935 Exporting Frame Memory Data 936 Directory Operations 937 Displaying the Directory Menu 937 Creating a New Directory 937 Renaming a Directory 93...

Page 916: ...or system startup Key memory setting data Video process memory setting data Keyframe effect setting data Snapshot setting data Wipe snapshot setting data DME wipe snapshot setting data Key snapshot setting data Shotbox setting data Macro setting data Macro attachment data Menu macro setting data Frame memory image data File operations You can carry out the following file operations When operating ...

Page 917: ...times be overwritten by the frame memory input image To avoid this when loading a file ensure that Freeze Enable is turned off Importing or exporting files to or from frame memory Import Import a file in a different format from hard disk or memory card into frame memory after changing its format Export Export a file in a register to hard disk or memory card after changing its format You can import...

Page 918: ...aced with the upper left of the screen as the origin When an image is smaller than the screen the remainder of the screen is filled with black When it is larger parts which extend beyond the screen are discarded No pixel ratio conversion is performed when images are imported for the SDTV format When the signal format is 480i 59 94 if you create an image with a size of 720 540 on a computer and the...

Page 919: ...nt Unit IDs page 939 Saving data recalled by autoload At power on you can automatically recall data previously stored on the hard disk Autoload function The following data can be loaded by the autoload function Keyframe effect setting data Snapshot setting data Wipe snapshot setting data DME wipe snapshot setting data Key snapshot setting data Shotbox setting data Macro setting data Macro attachme...

Page 920: ...to the example of carrying out operations on snapshot files but the procedure is similar in the other menus Viewing Detailed File Information As an example to view detailed snapshot file information carry out the following procedure 1 In the File menu select VF3 Snapshot and HF1 Snapshot The Snapshot menu appears The status area shows the device status and a list of files present on the device But...

Page 921: ...al Files Chapter 17 Files 2 Press File Edit The file details appear reference region file name creation date regions including data in table form File Edit buttons Device selection area Detail display area Region selection area ...

Page 922: ...ual Simul mode you can select the switcher to be used for the operation in a way similar to the region selection For setup and initial status you can similarly separate the files to be operated on by device To make a region selection 1 Press the region selection area at the top right of the screen see page 921 The region selection window appears 2 Press the region names you do not want to select t...

Page 923: ...y card or 200 on an internal hard disk 3 As required press the b or B button to switch directory pages 4 Press the name of the directory you want to use This selects the specified directory on the memory card to be manipulated Saving Files As an example to save snapshot register data to hard disk or memory card use the following procedure 1 In the File menu select VF3 Snapshot and HF1 Snapshot 2 I...

Page 924: ...t in the device selection in the list on the left A pull down menu appears 2 Press the required folder name 3 Carry out the same operations as in steps 1 and 2 on the list on the right 4 Select the type of data to be displayed To display still image files press Still To display clip files press Clip Loading Files As an example to load a snapshot file from hard disk or memory card to a register use...

Page 925: ...us area 5 Press T Load This loads the contents of the selected file from the specified location Setup data is first loaded Loading frame memory files Between steps 3 and 4 of the procedure above Loading Files do as follows 1 To select the frame memory folder press Default in the device selection in the list on the left A pull down menu appears 2 Press the required folder name 3 Carry out the same ...

Page 926: ... ALL below the list To select multiple files turn the knobs to select in the following ranges To select a single file press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor or press directly on the list in the status area 5 Press t Copy This copies the selected file or files to the specified destination If there is already data in the specified location a confirmation message appears Select Yes t...

Page 927: ... appears Here too you can select a device or specify a directory See page 922 3 Using any of the following methods select the file you want to rename Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 4 Press Rename The keyboard window appears See Menu Operations in Chapter 2 Volume 1 5 Enter a name of not more than eight characters ...

Page 928: ...p in step 3 you cannot select multiple files Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs 5 Press Rename The keyboard window appears 6 Depending on the selections of steps 3 and 4 enter a name as follows and press Enter When you selected a single file with Still Enter a name of not more than eight characters When you selected ...

Page 929: ...rs Here too you can select a device or specify a directory See page 922 3 Using any of the following methods select the file you want to delete To select all files within the list press All below the list To select multiple files turn the knobs to select in the following ranges To select a single file press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor or press directly on the list in the stat...

Page 930: ...ct HDD or Memory Card and then specify the directory 3 Press New A keyboard window appears See the section Menu Operations in Chapter 2 Volume 1 4 Enter a name of up to eight characters and press Enter The name entered appears in the status area as a frame memory folder Notes The following names cannot be used Default Flash1 Flash2 CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8...

Page 931: ... and press Enter The name entered appears in the status area as a frame memory folder To delete a frame memory folder 1 With the same operations as in step 1 of the procedure To rename a frame memory folder select the folder 2 Press Delete A confirmation message appears select Yes to carry out the deletion Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 List L Folder selection 1 and upwards ...

Page 932: ...separate backup copies of important files on a memory card Format a memory card before using it for the first time For details on formatting a memory card see Using a Memory Card in Chapter 18 Volume 3 1 In the device selection area of the All menu select the destination for saving the files HDD or Memory Card and directory See page 922 2 If there are registers you do not want to save in the Categ...

Page 933: ...ta to which operations apply see Files that can be manipulated page 916 Note The frame memory is not selected when you press All Select To apply the setting to frame memory press Frame Memory turning it on When frame memory is selected it is not possible to apply settings to the Category group data 3 Press T Load A confirmation message appears Select Yes to carry out the batch load Setup data is f...

Page 934: ...re files you do not want to copy remove them from the selection in the Category group To select all files press All Select For details of the data to which the operation applies see Files that can be manipulated page 916 Note The frame memory is not selected when you press All Select To apply the setting to frame memory press Frame Memory turning it on When frame memory is selected it is not possi...

Page 935: ...External File and HF2 Import Export The list on the left shows the frame memory registers and the list on the right shows the content of the external recording media Importing Frame Memory Data As an example to import data in a bitmap format from a memory card to a frame memory register use the following procedure About the points you should take note of when importing data see About import image ...

Page 936: ...ort from the list on the left Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 4 Press t Export This adds the image data from the frame memory in a bitmap format on the memory card Executing export creates a file in the MVS_EXP directory immediately under root directory If the directory does not exist it is automatically created If...

Page 937: ...te a maximum of 120 directories on a memory card or 200 on an internal hard disk 1 In the device selection pull down menu select HDD or Memory Card See page 922 2 Press New The keyboard window appears See Menu Operations in Chapter 2 Volume 1 3 Enter a name of not more than eight characters and press Enter A new directory with the name you have entered appears in the status area Note The following...

Page 938: ...e than eight characters and press Enter The new name appears in the status area Deleting a Directory 1 In the device selection pull down menu select HDD or Memory Card See page 922 2 Using any of the following methods select the directory Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 3 Press Delete A confirmation message appears...

Page 939: ...llowing procedure 1 In the Unit ID Copy menu press the category selection section at the top right of the screen 2 Press the categories you do not want to select turning them off 3 Press OK 4 In the operating device selection section on the left list select the storage location of the source files and in the operating device selection section on the right list specify the destination storage locat...

Page 940: ...s tCopy A confirmation message appears Select Yes to carry out the copy to the specified destination of the selected file categories Select No to cancel the copy Note If there is already data present in the copy destination note that this will overwrite all of the data ...

Page 941: ...following procedure 1 In the File menu select VF3 Snapshot and HF1 Snapshot The Snapshot menu appears 2 In the device selection area on the left select Register 3 In the device selection area on the right select HDD Be sure to select HDD as the saving destination 4 Select the PWON_LD directory The PWON_LD directory is automatically created when Power On File Load is set to On in the System Start U...

Page 942: ... video cursor or directly press on the list in the status area 6 Press tSave The data from the selected registers is saved in the specified destination If the specified destination already contains data a confirmation message appears Select Yes to overwrite the existing data Select No to cancel the entire saving operation ...

Page 943: ...9 Syntax of Event and Continue Statements 950 File Name 951 Saving and Recalling a File 951 Errors 952 Correspondence Between Events and Symbols 952 Symbols and Parameters 954 Example of File Contents 961 About the Macro Attachment List Display 962 M E and PGM PST Banks 962 Auxiliary Bus Control Block 966 Other Blocks 968 Menu Operations Not Recorded in a Menu Macro 970 ...

Page 944: ...Appendix Volume 2 944 SpotLighting SpotLighting Texture Patterns Material provided by Digital Archive Japan INC 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ...

Page 945: ...945 SpotLighting Appendix Volume 2 Shape Patterns 1 2 ...

Page 946: ... page 555 Color Mix 4117 No Yes Yes page 559 Defocus Blur 4121 Cannot be turned on when Glow is on Yes Yes page 560 Mask 4127 Yes a Yes Yes page 575 Adjustment of entire image brightness in Lighting Spotlighting parameter Total Ambient 4151 4156 No Yes Yes page 607 page 627 Setting the bar mode of the highlight area 4151 No Yes Yes page 610 Adjustment of color of the diffuse light area parameter B...

Page 947: ... 638 Flex shadow axis settings 4164 No Yes Yes page 517 Outputting graphics to the monitor 4164 Yes only when SDI interface is used Yes Yes page 517 Dim and Fade 4173 No Yes Yes page 573 Glow 4174 Cannot be turned on when Defocus Blur is on Cannot be turned on when Key Border is on Cannot be turned on when Key Border is on page 574 Combiner depth settings three dimensional crossing function parame...

Page 948: ...t is not possible to make settings for DME 1 to 8 Video Key Setting the AUX Bus Output and Reentry Input in Chapter 18 Volume 3 TBC window center position 7341 1 Yes only when SDI interface is used c Yes only when SDI interface is used No Setting the TBC Window Center Position in Chapter 21 Volume 3 Adjustment of monitor output video clip level 7343 Yes only when SDI interface is used Yes only whe...

Page 949: ...eated on the switcher this is a register name automatically set by the switcher When creating a new file it is recommended to set this to be the same as the file name see page 951 The name is limited to eight characters The following characters may not be used space comma dot Comment Begins with The content of the line following the up to the next newline has no effect on macro execution and can b...

Page 950: ...er Continue symbol parameter parameter symbol ASCII character string showing the type of event See Correspondence Between Events and Symbols page 952 parameter Shows details of an event Consists of parameter names and arguments and these must appear in pairs The number and type of parameters depends on the event See Symbols and Parameters page 954 If the same parameter appears twice or more the la...

Page 951: ...et by the switcher The name is limited to eight characters The following characters may not be used space comma dot rrrr macro register number 0001 0099 Saving and Recalling a File For a newly created file if you create a directory on the memory card see figure below and move the file to the prescribed location you can then recall it in the File All External File menu Note When amending a file sav...

Page 952: ...oss point selection in the auxiliary bus control block in router control mode RouterXpt Yes Cross point selection in the cross point control block MEXpt Yes Auto transition and take in the transition execution section MEAutoTransition Yes Cut in the transition execution section MECut No Transition type selection TransitionType No Next transition setting NextTransition No Pattern limit on off Patte...

Page 953: ...imelineRun Yes Rewind keyframe TimelineRewind Yes Fast forward effect TimelineFF Yes Effect execution direction selection normal TimelineDirectionNormal Yes Effect execution direction selection reverse TimelineDirectionReverse Yes Effect execution direction selection normal reverse on TimelineNormalReverseOn Yes Effect execution direction selection normal reverse off TimelineNormalReverseOff Yes P...

Page 954: ...ignal type selected on the applicable bus video signal or key signal AuxXpt AuxBus EditPreview AUX1 to AUX48 Monitor1 to Monitor8 FrameMemory1 FrameMemory2 DME1Video to DME8Video DME1Key to DME8Key DME1Video2nd to DME8Video2nd a DME1Key2nd to DME8Key2nd b DMEUtility1 DMEUtility2 CCR1 CCR2 Applicable AUX bus a DMEnVideo2nd Bus for selecting back video signal of DMEn channel n 1 to 8 b DMEnKey2nd Bu...

Page 955: ...icable bank KeyAutoTransition ME ME1 to ME3 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank Key Key1 to Key4 Key of the applicable independent key transition control block Time Current a 0 to 999 Transition rate number of frames a Mode in which the current value set on the independent key transition control block is used Direction ToOn a ToOff b Any c Transition execution mode a Key is inserted b Key is ...

Page 956: ...a hh mm ss ff Start point timecode hh hours 00 to 23 As for Frame Memory 1 Clip to Frame Memory 8 Clip hh is fixed to 01 mm minutes 00 to 59 ss seconds 00 to 59 ff frames 00 to 29 a Mode in which the currently set timecode is used Stop Device 1 to 12 FrameMemory1Clip to FrameMemory8Clip Applicable device FF Device 1 to 12 FrameMemory1Clip to FrameMemory8Clip Applicable device Rewind Device 1 to 12...

Page 957: ...er 1 to 10 Applicable register number TimelineRecall Region ME1 to ME3 PP User1 to User8 DME1 to DME8 PBus Device1 to Device12 GPI Applicable region Register 1 to 399 Applicable register number TimelineRun Region ME1 to ME3 PP User1 to User8 DME1 to DME8 PBus Device1 to Device12 GPI Current a Applicable region a Mode in which operation takes place in the region currently specified in the numeric k...

Page 958: ...ank Status ToOn a ToOff b Any c Pattern limit status a Pattern limit applies b Pattern limit does not apply c The pattern limit status always changes TransitionType ME ME1 to ME3 PP Control blocks on the applicable bank TransitionType Mix NAM SuperMix PresetColorMix Wipe DMEWipe FM1 2Clip FM3 4Clip FM5 6Clip FM7 8Clip Transition type KeyTransitionType ME ME1 to ME3 PP Control blocks on the applica...

Page 959: ...Mode in which operation takes place in the region currently specified in the numeric keypad control block TimelineNormalReverseOn Region ME1 to ME3 PP User1 to User8 DME1 to DME8 PBus Device1 to Device12 GPI Current a Applicable region a Mode in which operation takes place in the region currently specified in the numeric keypad control block TimelineNormalReverseOff Region ME1 to ME3 PP User1 to U...

Page 960: ...tilityButto n 1 to 32 Applicable button UtilityStatus On Off Current a Status of function assigned to button a Operates according to currently assigned function ClipRecall Device FrameMemory1Clip to FrameMemory8Clip Applicable clip ClipType Pair Single File type of clip pair single Clip Clip Name Name of clip up to four characters Device Record Device 1 to 12 Applicable device Symbol Parameter nam...

Page 961: ...ader 2 Sample Comment 3 Event Snapshot Region ME1 Register 1 Attribute Off Time Current Simultaneously recallsnapshots from register number 1 in the M E 1 and DME1 regions 4 Continue Snapshot Region DME1 Register 1 Attribute Off Time Current 5 Event MEXpt ME ME2 MEBus A Xpt 121 VideoKey Video Select button number 121 on the M E 2 A bus ...

Page 962: ...ng tables For example if Block and Button 1 to Button 3 are combined as Block P P XPT Button 1 UTIL1 Bus Button 2 V Button 3 XPT2 The Button column in the macro attachment list in the Macro Attachment menu screen shows UTIL1 Bus V XPT2 which means utility 1 bus video signal cross point number 2 M E and PGM PST Banks The following table shows only the macro attachment assignable buttons in the PGM ...

Page 963: ...B Bus Main Sub DSK1 Bus Main Sub DSK4 Bus Sub DSK1 Src Bus Sub DSK4 Src Bus Main Sub DSK1 Src Bus Main Sub DSK4 Src Bus nothing Shift XPT 1 XPT 128 M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P UTIL1 Bus UTIL2 Bus EXT DME Bus DMEUtility1 DMEUtility2 Sub UTIL1 Bus Sub UTIL2 Bus Sub EXT DME Bus Main Sub UTIL1 Bus Main Sub UTIL2 Bus Main Sub EXT DME Bus V K V Shift K Shift Dual A Bus Dual B Bus Sub Dual A Bus Sub Dual B Bus...

Page 964: ... blank DSK1 DSK4 Sub Sub DSK1 Sub DSK4 Main Sub Main Sub DSK1 Main Sub DSK4 MIX d NAM d SUPER MIX d PST COLOR MIX d WIPE d DME d TAKE b AUTO TRANS a CUT a DSK_ON a ALL a KEY PRIOR a BKGD a DSK1 a DSK4 a NORM PLAY a NORM REV STOP a REV CUEUP a PTN LIMIT PLAY c LIMIT SET STOP c KF CUEUP c PTN LIMIT Fader P P Key Trans DSK1 DSK4 Sub DSK1 Sub DSK4 Main Sub DSK1 Main Sub DSK4 MIX WIPE DME CUT TAKE DSK_...

Page 965: ...ck b For the simple type transition control block c For the standard type transition control block d These buttons can be assigned with their functions in the setup menu The assignable functions include four clip transition functions FM1 2 FM3 4 FM5 6 FM7 8 besides the above functions MIX NAM SUPER MIX PST COLOR MIX WIPE DME ...

Page 966: ...2nd Row Shift XPT 1 XPT 128 M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P DME1V DME8V DME1K DME8K nothing Shift 2nd Row 2nd Row Shift DMEUtility1 DMEUtility2 V K V Shift K Shift V 2nd Row K 2nd Row V 2nd Row Shift K 2nd Row Shift DME1V2nd DME8V2nd DME1K2nd DME8K2nd nothing Shift 2nd Row 2nd Row Shift CCR1 CCR2 V K V Shift K Shift V 2nd Row K 2nd Row V 2nd Row Shift K 2nd Row Shift P P UTIL1 P P UTIL2 M E 1 UTIL1 M E 1 UT...

Page 967: ...ift 2nd Row 2nd Row Shift XPT 1 XPT 128 M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P DSK1 Src DSK4 Src M E 1 KEY1 Src M E 1 KEY2 Src M E 1 KEY3 Src M E 1 KEY4 Src M E 2 KEY1 Src M E 2 KEY2 Src M E 2 KEY3 Src M E 2 KEY4 Src M E 3 KEY1 Src M E 3 KEY2 Src M E 3 KEY3 Src M E 3 KEY4 Src V K V Shift K Shift V 2nd Row K 2nd Row V 2nd Row Shift K 2nd Row Shift P P EXT DME M E 1 EXT DME M E 2 EXT DME M E 3 EXT DME Block Select B...

Page 968: ...K1 DSK2 DSK3 DSK4 M E 1 KEY1 M E 1 KEY2 M E 1 KEY3 M E 1 KEY4 M E 2 KEY1 M E 2 KEY2 M E 2 KEY3 M E 2 KEY4 M E 3 KEY1 M E 3 KEY2 M E 3 KEY3 M E 3 KEY4 Sub DSK1 Sub DSK2 Sub DSK3 Sub DSK4 M E 1 Sub KEY1 M E 1 Sub KEY2 M E 1 Sub KEY3 M E 1 Sub KEY4 M E 2 Sub KEY1 M E 2 Sub KEY2 M E 2 Sub KEY3 M E 2 Sub KEY4 M E 3 Sub KEY1 M E 3 Sub KEY2 M E 3 Sub KEY3 M E 3 Sub KEY4 AUTO TRANS KEY_ON EFF RUN REWIND N...

Page 969: ... CLR WORK BUFR CUEUP Y PLAY TRGT STOP AXIS LOC START TC nothing Device Control nothing CUE UP PLAY STOP START TC Utility Box 1 Utility Box 2 Menu Utility 1 Utility 96 nothing DSK FTB Key1 Key2 AUTO TRANS KEY_ON FTB FTB blank FTB DSK Fader 1 DSK Fader 4 P P M E1 M E2 M E3 KEY1 KEY4 MIX WIPE DME CUT TAKE KEY_ON Block Select Block Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 ...

Page 970: ...d Operations not recorded in menu macros in individual menus Menu number Menu including operations not recorded 0011 to 0023 All menus under Home 2141 FrameMemory File Delete Thumbnail 2142 FrameMemory File Delete List 2143 FrameMemory File Rename Thumbnail 2144 FrameMemory File Rename List 2145 FrameMemory File Backup Restore 2544 FrameMemory File Move 2545 FrameMemory File Delete 2546 FrameMemor...

Page 971: ...for use by the purchasers of the equip ment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur pose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation ...

Page 972: ...DVS 9000 9000SF System SY 3 704 906 11 1 2002 Sony Corporation ...

Page 973: ...DVS 9000 9000SF System With CCP 8000 Series Center Control Panel User s Guide Production Switcher System Volume 3 English 2nd Edition Software Version 8 00 and Later ...

Page 974: ...F MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON TORT CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL THE SOFTWARE OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF Sony Corporation r...

Page 975: ...art Up Menu 984 Saving and Recalling Setup Data 985 Selecting the State at Start up 986 Saving User Defined Settings 987 Setting Automatic Loading of Register Data at Power On Autoload Function 987 Reset and Initialization Initialize Menu 989 Installation and Device Setup Install Unit Config Menu 990 Installing Software 990 Making Settings Required to Use the Software 992 Adding User Texture Patte...

Page 976: ...panel but is also included in the whole system For an overview of setup see Setup in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Setting the unit ID When there are two switchers and connected DME units on the same network it is necessary to set the unit ID on each device as follows For more details of how to make the unit ID settings refer to the installation manual for the particular device Switcher ID 1st switcher 1 2nd...

Page 977: ...ystem and HF1 Network Config The status area shows the device ID and Control LAN and Data LAN IP addresses for each device excluding the DCU Making the Network Settings 1 In the System Network Config menu press Auto Config This automatically checks all devices excluding the DCU connected to the Data LAN 2 Once switch to another menu then display the Network Config menu again Now the status area of...

Page 978: ... menu select one of the following Single Proc mode The control panel controls a single switcher Dual Simul mode The control panel controls two switchers simultaneously Notes Single Simul mode is disabled for a DVS 9000 system When operating an MVS 8000 system and a DVS 9000 system in Dual Simul mode simultaneous operation may not be possible because of differences between the systems in some funct...

Page 979: ...ies out tally control for the whole system Note When there are multiple control panels make sure that one of them has Tally Master set to On When you change the master panel be sure to copy and save the setup tally TLY and router RTR data in the File menu and make the same settings for other panels To select the lighting mode of the switcher bus selection buttons on the remote panel When switching...

Page 980: ...ME settings for SWR1 the first switcher for the first DME select DME1 in the 1st DME group For the second DME select DME2 in the 2nd DME group When a second DME is not connected turn all buttons in the 2nd DME group off When making DME settings for SWR2 the second switcher for the first DME select DME3 in the 1st DME group For the second DME select DME4 in the 2nd DME group When a second DME is no...

Page 981: ...l the settings and return to the original state press Clear without pressing Execute Setting the Signal Format Specify the signal format to be handled by the devices The combinations of signal formats that can be selected are as follows 1 In the System Format menu select the device for operations Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor ...

Page 982: ...Chapter 18 System Setup System 982 Setting the Signal Format Format Menu 3 Press the button for the desired signal format ...

Page 983: ...lected Independ in step 2 select from the following Switcher Aspect Make the setting for the switcher DME Aspect Make the setting for the DME A menu appears according to the selection 4 Carry out either of the following depending on the selection you made in step 3 When you selected Switcher Aspect In each of the M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 P P and USER groups select either 16 9 or 4 3 When you selected DME...

Page 984: ...sed after powering on from the following User Start up using the user data previously saved with Setup Define Factory Start up with the factory default settings Initial status mode Select the state of each device after powering on excluding the settings to which setup applies User Start up using the user data previously saved with Initial Status Define For the control panel this applies to the key...

Page 985: ... in RAM and recalled when the power is turned back on Note The Resume mode cannot be used for DMEs and DCUs In Custom mode see page 984 the user defined settings user setup data saved in non volatile memory or factory default setup data held in ROM in Hard disk memory card User setup data Load Save File menu Load File menu Save Current setup data If in Resume mode settings data is saved Store In C...

Page 986: ...ect the device to which the settings are to apply 2 In the Start Up Mode group select one of the following modes Resume When this is on Resume mode is enabled Custom When this is on Custom mode is enabled For information about Resume mode and Custom mode see System Setup in Chapter 1 Volume 1 Note The Resume mode is only valid when a switcher or control panel is selected for the setting 3 When Cus...

Page 987: ...Setup Define and Initial Status Define page 1192 Saving the Initial Status settings 1 After selecting the devices to which the settings apply to in the System Start Up menu press Init Status Define A confirmation message appears 2 Press Yes This saves the initial status settings other than the setup settings for the selected devices in non volatile memory within the respective devices For details ...

Page 988: ...e After Powering On Start Up Menu When the autoload function is enabled a directory PWON_LD appears in the corresponding File menu About saving data which can be loaded by the autoload function see Saving Files Recalled by Autoload in Chapter 17 Volume 2 ...

Page 989: ...select VF1 System and HF5 Initialize The status area shows the current start up mode settings Resetting the device and initializing memory 1 In the status area of the System Initialize menu select the device to which the settings are to apply 2 In the Initialize group select one of the following modes Reset Reset the device All Clear Initialize memory 3 Press Execute A confirmation message appears...

Page 990: ...oftware Detail Information Gives details of the software and firmware installed in each device Unit Config Carries out switcher processor settings Switches the color corrector function between secondary color correction and spot color adjustment License Makes the license valid or invalid Displaying installation details In the System Install Unit Config menu press Detail Information This accesses t...

Page 991: ...directly on the list in the status area Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob The display of the lower list changes according to the selected device To display all related software Press Display All Software turning it on Not just the automatically detected software but the names of all related software for the selected device appear 4 In the lower list select the sof...

Page 992: ...a key you may be required to submit the unique device ID of the switcher you are using You can check the unique device ID in the Install Unit Config menu of the switcher using the following procedure a This can be used only with a CCP 8000 series control panel equipped with the MKS 8010A To display the unique device ID 1 In the System Install Unit Config menu use either of the following methods to...

Page 993: ...of the following methods to select the device for which you want to register the license Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor 2 Press License The License menu appears 3 Press directly on the name of the software you want to license the Condition box is blank List of software option model names and numbers Device name Unique device ID...

Page 994: ...ize group and then press Execute Power off and on again After restarting the licensed software is now available for use In case it becomes necessary to cancel the license registration you can use the following procedure To cancel the license registration 1 In the System Install Unit Config menu use either of the following methods to select the device for which you want to cancel the license regist...

Page 995: ...no longer available Adding User Texture Patterns You can add user created texture patterns to the repertory of texture patterns with which the spotlighting function enables the light falls on the image surface Note This function is not supported on the MVE 8000A For details of spotlighting and texture patterns see Spotlighting Settings in Chapter 11 Volume 2 The procedure for adding a texture patt...

Page 996: ...ure files that can be handled may be reduced depending on the way in which they are stored in memory see Texture Package menu page 996 For a texture file with an image size outside the specification the minimum enclosing image size is applied see table above and the region below and to the right is filled with black Example a 300 200 pixel texture file is treated as 512 256 pixels Texture Package ...

Page 997: ...ory space is available b Texture number list This shows the texture numbers 101 to 164 registered in the texture package The list Capacity shows the file size in units of 128 128 pixels a total maximum of 64 units of texture files can be registered 5 Grid display of memory capacity 6 Select button 7 Delete button 8 Make Package button 1 The rest of the capacity 2 Texture number list 3 Directory se...

Page 998: ...button Pressing this button assigns the texture file selected in the texture file list to the number selected in the texture number list g Delete button Pressing this button deletes the texture file assigned to the number in the texture number list h Make Package button Pressing this button creates the texture package Creating a texture package To use a user provided texture pattern with the spotl...

Page 999: ...w keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob a The range of the setting values depends on the number of saved files on a memory card 7 In the Texture Pattern group press Select This assigns the texture file selected in step 6 to the number selected in step 5 and updates the texture number list The grid display of memory capacity shows the location where the texture files are stored in m...

Page 1000: ...on zsp file name generated automatically Notes If you remove the memory card on which the texture file is stored it is not possible to create the texture package If a texture package is already present on the memory card it is overwritten by a new texture package If you carry out steps 9 and 10 without having assigned even one texture file it is not possible to create a texture package If there is...

Page 1001: ...ed list of software that can be installed on the particular device Also software selected as a candidate for installation in the upper list is marked in the lower list with an asterisk 4 Using any of the following methods select in the upper list a DME for which the spotlighting license is valid Press directly on the list in the status area Use the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Tur...

Page 1002: ...be sure to finally press Execute to confirm the setting To cancel the setting during the process press Clear 1 In the System Install Unit Config menu status area select SWR1 or SWR2 where the color correction function is installed 2 Press Unit Config The Unit Config menu appears The status area shows the device name and the currently selected color correction function name 3 In the CCR Config grou...

Page 1003: ...s can be locked Changing the password To display the Maintenance menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF1 System and HF7 Maintenance In the status area the current date and time and details of the memory card appear Setting the Date and Time For system date and time settings use the following procedure 1 In the System Maintenance menu turn the knobs to set the following parameters Parameter g...

Page 1004: ...efresh Formatting a memory card Note Format a memory card before using it for the first time 1 Insert the memory card in the memory card slot 2 In the System Maintenance menu using either of the following methods select the USB device Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor 3 In the USB Storage Device group press Format A confirmation m...

Page 1005: ...king the primary setting automatic In the USB Storage Device group press Auto Detect Reloading a USB Driver To reload a USB driver in the System Maintenance menu press Reload USB Driver Note If even after this operation the memory card is not recognized remove the memory card and reinsert it then try again Initializing the Hard Disk If a file system corruption error has occurred on the hard disk y...

Page 1006: ...e Setup Operation Lock menu appears 2 In the VF Group group select the group including the desired menu The status area shows a list of menu numbers and menu names in the selected group Subsequent lock operations apply within the group selected here 3 Using any of the following methods select the menu or the set of menus as candidates for the locking operation Press directly on the list in the sta...

Page 1007: ... lock candidates 6 Press Lock A keyboard window appears 7 Enter the password with a maximum of 16 characters and press Enter If the password is correct the menus selected in the list of candidates are all locked The padlock icon changes to the locked state Releasing the lock When a lock is already applied use the following procedure 1 In the System Maintenance Setup Operation Lock menu press Lock ...

Page 1008: ...d press Enter 5 Enter the new password once more for confirmation This sets the new password Selecting an opened setup menu for locking With the menu you want to lock open press Lock Item Select button at the lower left The Lock Item Select button turns red and a padlock icon appears This selection is reflected in the lock candidate list in the Setup Operation Lock menu VF button Lock Item Select ...

Page 1009: ...ocked menus selection of lock candidates is not possible In this case the indication of the Lock Item Select button changes as follows If you want to select lock candidates first remove the lock in the Setup Operation Lock menu When the displayed menu is locked When a menu other than the displayed menu is locked ...

Page 1010: ...Chapter 18 System Setup System 1010 System Maintenance Maintenance Menu ...

Page 1011: ...exi Pad Control Block 1022 Setting the Assignment of Transition Type Selection Buttons 1025 Setting VTR Operation Button Assignment 1026 Setting the Assignment of Macro Operation Buttons 1028 Assigning the Dual Background Bus Mode Switching Function 1028 Assigning the Utility Shotbox Mode Switching Function 1029 Assigning the Function to Disable Cross Point Button Operations to a Button 1029 Assig...

Page 1012: ...Using the Auxiliary Bus Control Block for Router Control 1054 Setting Button Assignments Prefs Utility Menu 1058 Assigning Functions to User Preference Buttons 1058 Assigning a Function to a Memory Recall Button in the Utility Shotbox Control Block 1063 Assigning a Function to the Key 2 Row Cross Point Buttons 1068 Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu 1070 Making Control Panel G...

Page 1013: ...nsitivity 1084 Specifying Main Split Fader 1085 Setting the Macro Execution Mode 1085 Screen Saver and Other Settings Maintenance Menu 1087 Screen Saver Settings 1087 Adjusting the Brightness 1087 Adjusting the Alarms 1088 Calibrating the Touch Panel 1088 Setting the Menu to be Shown When the Menus Are Started 1089 Setting the Mouse Wheel Scrolling Direction for Parameter Setting 1089 Selecting th...

Page 1014: ... E Xpt Swap When a setting has been made for Dual M E Assign swap the shift and non shift button rows DSK Fader Assign Carry out fader function assignment and key delegation for the key delegation buttons in each of the maximum of four downstream key control blocks External Bus Link Make link settings relating internal switcher buses to routing switcher destinations Key Trans Link Select whether o...

Page 1015: ...or Disabling Operation 1 In the Panel Config menu select the Bank you want to set using any of the following methods Press directly on the status area display Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob The Bank selection here indicates the physical position on the control panel numbering from the top as the 1st Row 2nd Row 3rd Row and 4th Row 2 Select the bank that you w...

Page 1016: ...o M E 1 and you want no shift button operation for the bank select 1 1st Row for Bank 2 Press Dual M E Assign This assigns the furthest M E bank from you to the unshifted shifted cross points and the M E bank in front of it to the shifted unshifted cross points For fader lever operations only the M E bank closer to you is enabled The shift non shift assignment is set by Dual M E Xpt Swap For more ...

Page 1017: ...t the downstream key control block for which you want to make the setting and select the key delegation Here press on the intersection of the 1st Module column and Key1 Assign row 3 In the M E Select group select the bank of the key you want to assign Here select M E 1 as an example 4 In the Key Link Select group select the key you want to assign Here select Key4 as an example 5 To disable the fad...

Page 1018: ...ing Link a switcher cross point button and matrix source Link bus setting Link a switcher bus address and router destination Selecting a matrix number 1 In the Panel Config menu press Link Program Button The Link Program Button menu appears 2 In the Link group press External Bus Link The External Bus Link menu appears The status area shows the current link status 3 Turn the knobs to select the mat...

Page 1019: ...ist in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs 3 To confirm a source address selected in step 2 press Source Set to confirm a destination address press Destination Set and to confirm a level press Level Set This confirms the selection which is reflected in the status area Setting a link table For the link selected in the External Bus Link menu make th...

Page 1020: ... status area Making link bus settings For the link number selected in the External Bus Link menu use the following procedure 1 In the Panel Config Link Program Button External Bus Link menu press Link Bus Adjust The Link Bus Adjust menu appears The status area lists the current link status and the switcher buses and router destinations that can be selected In this menu too you can use knob 1 to se...

Page 1021: ...ectly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob The selected keyer appears in reverse video 4 In the Key Select group select the keyer to be linked to the transition of the master Note Linking does not apply to a transition carried out with the downstream key control block Linking the Next Transition Selection Buttons To the transition lin...

Page 1022: ...eference Trackball Joystick Assigning a Region to the Region Selection Buttons in the Numeric Keypad Control Block or Multifunction Flexi Pad Control Block You can set a maximum of four regions to each of the region selection buttons in the numeric keypad control block or Multifunction Flexi Pad control block In the Multifunction Flexi Pad control block pressing the region selection button MORE di...

Page 1023: ...he Multifunction Flexi Pad control block or the numeric keypad buttons in the memory recall section press either of the following buttons in the Flexi Pad Area Sel group of the button area Region Sel Btn Area button When assigning a region to the region selection buttons Mem Rcl Btn Area button When assigning a region to the numeric keypad buttons in the memory recall section 2 Press the indicatio...

Page 1024: ...ns in the numeric keypad control block to the factory default state To delete a region assignment In step 3 of the procedure make the selection to which the operation applies then press Clear This clears the assignment of the selected region Setting the region selection buttons selected when the ALL button is pressed 1 In the Panel Config 10 Key Region Assign menu press All Select in the button ar...

Page 1025: ...control block 1 In the Panel Config menu press Link Program Button The Link Program Button menu appears 2 Press Transition Module The Transition Module menu appears 3 Select the bank of the transition control block you want to set in the Bank Select group The current assignment of the transition type selection buttons appears at the upper left 4 Press the transition type selection button for which...

Page 1026: ...rs 2 Press Transition Module The Transition Module menu appears 3 Select the bank of the transition control block you want to set in the Bank Select group In the center on the left NORM NORM REV and REV appear with their current assignments Note This only appears when the transition control block is a standard type or compact type On the lower left PTN LIMIT LIMIT SET and KF appear with their curr...

Page 1027: ...ear in reverse video 8 Select the button functions for the assignment from the list on the right Press directly on the list Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob The following are the button functions Ptn Limit KF Use the respective buttons as a PTN LIMIT button LIMIT SET button and KF button Play Stop Cue Use the respective buttons as a PLAY button STOP button and ...

Page 1028: ...Assign group UNDO use as an UNDO button MACRO use as a MCRO button Assigning the Dual Background Bus Mode Switching Function The dual background bus mode is a mode in which the background A row shifted signal can be selected with the key 1 row and the background B row shifted signal can be selected with the key 2 row To switch this mode on and off it is necessary to assign this function to the cro...

Page 1029: ...a Function to the Key 2 Row Cross Point Buttons page 1068 1 In the Panel Config menu press Link Program Button The Link Program Button menu appears 2 Press Xpt Module The Xpt Module menu appears 3 Select the setting target M E 1 to M E 3 or P P in the status area 4 Select Utility Shotbox in the PRE MCRO POST MCRO group This assigns the utility shot box mode to the PRE MCRO button and disables the ...

Page 1030: ...button And the function for switching the source name displays to the names of the sources or buses for the AUX buses is assigned to the POST MCRO button 1 In the Panel Config menu press Link Program Button The Link Program Button menu appears 2 Press Xpt Module The Xpt Module menu appears 3 Select the bank in the status area 4 Select Aux Ctrl Aux Disply in the PRE MCRO POST MCRO group This assign...

Page 1031: ...his assigns the selected key to the key delegation button To return the key delegation button assignment to the factory default state In the DSK FTB Module menu press Default This returns the key delegation assignment to the factory default state Assigning Keys to the Independent Key Transition Control Block Simple Type It is possible to select the keys that can be used in an independent key trans...

Page 1032: ...y3 4 M E 2 Key1 2 M E 2 Key3 4 M E 3 Key1 2 M E 3 Key3 4 DSK1 2 DSK3 4 Key1 2 1 Key3 4 1 N A no assignment 1 In this case depending on the switcher extension interface port operations always apply to the following Ext Port 1 M E 1 Ext Port 2 M E 2 Ext Port 3 M E 3 For the MKS 8010B operations also apply to an M E bank assigned to the interface port in the Extension Panel menu see page 1040 To assi...

Page 1033: ...This applies to the preview selection buttons in the fade to black control block and the downstream key fade to black control block For details of these control blocks see Chapter 2 Volume 1 1 In the Panel Config menu press Link Program Button The Link Program Button menu appears 2 Press Fade To Black Module The Fade To Black Module menu appears On the left of the status area preview selection but...

Page 1034: ...ck search dial For details of the device control block search dial see Chapter 2 Volume 1 1 In the Panel Config menu press Link Program Button The Link Program Button menu appears 2 Press Device Control Module The Device Control Module menu appears The left of the status area shows the device selection buttons SBOX buttons and DELAY button of the device control block search dial The list on the ri...

Page 1035: ...tick For details of the device control block trackball device control block joystick see Chapter 2 Volume 1 1 In the Panel Config menu press Link Program Button The Link Program Button menu appears 2 Press Joystick Trackball Module The Joystick Trackball Module menu appears The left of the status area shows the region selection buttons of the device control block The list on the right shows the de...

Page 1036: ... control block 1 1 Only when the Key1 2 or Key 3 4 are assigned by the Compact Key Module Assign menu Note In the auxiliary bus control block and other control blocks which are excluded from M E and PGM PST banks the operations on the utility 2 bus and keys 1 to 4 are not inhibited 1 In the Panel Config menu press M E Operation Inhibit M E Operation Inhibit menu appears 2 In the list in the status...

Page 1037: ...f menus and actions to be assigned 3 Using any of the following methods scroll the display Press the arrow keys Turn the knob 4 In the button indications on the left press the button for the assignment 5 Using any of the following methods select the menu or action to be assigned Press directly on the right list Press the arrow keys on the right list to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob...

Page 1038: ...fig menu press Link Program Button The Link Program Button menu appears 2 Press Multi Function Module The Multi Function Module menu appears 3 Press one of the following three buttons displayed in the button area Mode Sel Assign button To assign a function to the mode selection buttons Eff Edit Assign button To assign a function to a button in the memory recall section for effect editing when the ...

Page 1039: ... Wipe snapshot WIPE DME wipe snapshot DME WIPE Transition rate TRANS RATE Key adjust KEY ADJ Key snapshot KEY SS Function Button indication Undo UNDO Pause setting PAUS Copy COPY Paste PSTE Select all ALL Insert INS Modify MOD Delete DEL Keyframe loop count setting KF LOOP Effect duration setting EFF DUR Keyframe duration setting KF DUR Delay setting DLY Constant duration mode on or off CNST DUR G...

Page 1040: ... To cancel an assignment Select the button then press Clear To return all button assignments to the factory default state press Default Assigning Operations to the Switcher Extension Interface Ports You can assign M E banks to the interface ports of the MKS 8010B System Control Unit Go to first keyframe REWIND Switch to shifted functions SHFT Go to previous keyframe PREV Go to next keyframe NEXT E...

Page 1041: ...he Panel Config menu must be deselected see page 1015 1 In the Panel Config menu press Link Program Button The Link Program Button menu appears 2 Press Extension Panel The Extension Panel menu appears 3 In the boxes for Port 1 and Port 2 select the corresponding M E bank to assign Note It is not possible to assign the same M E bank to both of ports 1 and 2 ...

Page 1042: ...utton and the operation mode when it is used as a shift button For the SHIFT button in the cross point control block and for each table select the mode in which this is a shift button dedicated to the source name displays or the mode in which it is a shift button for all buses Disable cross point buttons to work Mixer Xpt Assign Assign audio mixer cross points to cross point buttons in the main ta...

Page 1043: ...r details of audio mixer cross point assignment operations see Setting the audio mixer cross points page 1051 2 Using any of the following methods select the button number Press an auxiliary bus control block cross point button The auxiliary bus control block is in selection mode only when the menu for cross point button selection is showing Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor ...

Page 1044: ...ssign Main V K Pair Assign menu select the button corresponding to the signal you want to delete and press Delete in the Xpt Assign group Signal deletion is executed in accordance with the selection in the Assign group and the signal assigned to the button number next to the selected button number and following signals move up one line Note When a button number in the range 121 to 128 is selected ...

Page 1045: ...ing Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 4 Using any of the following methods select the pair number Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 5 Using the buttons in the Button Assign group assign the selected pair number to the button number currently selected in table 1 Set Delete the signa...

Page 1046: ...any other button number is deleted moving up of signals ends when the signal assigned to number 120 has moved to number 119 and the signals assigned to numbers 121 to 128 are maintained in their original lines Returning the table to its default state 1 In the Panel Xpt Assign Main V K Pair Assign menu or Panel Xpt Assign Table Button Assign menu press Default Recall A confirmation message appears ...

Page 1047: ...ft button for all buses Notes It is not possible to make this setting separately for each of the M E and PGM PST banks Shift All Bus is only valid when the cross point button shift operation see previous item is set to Lock or Off Setting the source signal name 1 In the Panel Xpt Assign menu or Panel Xpt Assign Table Button Assign menu press Src Name LCD Color The Src Name LCD Color menu appears 2...

Page 1048: ...ting target 2 In the LCD Color group select the color Orange Green Yellow Copying Cross Point Assign Tables The contents of a cross point assign table can be copied to another cross point assign table and vice versa Note The contents of a sub table cannot be copied to the main table 1 In the Panel Xpt Assign menu press Table Copy The Table Copy menu appears The status area shows a list of copy sou...

Page 1049: ... Remote Panel 1 In the Panel Xpt Assign menu using any of the following methods select the switcher bank or bus Press directly on the list on the left of the status area Press the arrow keys on the list on the left to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs 2 Using any of the following methods select the table Press directly on the list on the right of the status area Press the arrow keys o...

Page 1050: ...ort menu appears 2 Turn the knob to set the station ID a If set to 255 the information is sent to all stations with display of All 3 Press Src Name Export This exports the source names to the station selected in step 2 4 Press Dest Name Export This exports the destination names to the station selected in step 2 Note Since destination names cannot be selected freely fixed names are used Knob Parame...

Page 1051: ...ectly on the list on the left of the status area Press the arrow keys in the list on the left to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 2 Press Audio Follow Enable appears in the Audio Follow column Setting the audio mixer cross points To assign an audio mixer cross point to a switcher cross point pair video key carry out the following procedure 1 In the Panel Xpt Assign menu press Mixer Xp...

Page 1052: ... to any bus Shift Mode Specify whether the rightmost button of the AUX delegation buttons is used as a shift button and when it is used as a shift button the operation mode RTR Mode Setting Carry out the following settings for using the auxiliary bus control block for router control Assigning destinations Setting the shift operation in the destination selection button rows Source table settings Se...

Page 1053: ...nfirm the selection To set the AUX delegation button shift operation To set the operation mode of the rightmost button in the row of AUX delegation buttons select one of the following in the Shift Mode group of the Panel Aux Assign menu Hold Acts as a shift button and the shifted version of the AUX delegation buttons is enabled while the button is held down Lock Acts as a shift button and pressing...

Page 1054: ...ion to a destination selection button In the Panel Aux Assign RTR Mode Setting menu use the following procedure 1 Using any of the following methods select a destination selection button and the destination to be assigned to the button Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs For a button whose operation you want to disabl...

Page 1055: ...and unshifted states of the destination selection buttons Off Acts as a destination selection button that is button number 16 on a 16 button system button number 24 on a 24 button system and button number 32 on a 32 button system Setting the source table 1 In the Panel Aux Assign RTR Mode Setting menu press Source Table Assign The Source Table Assign menu appears 2 In the Source Table Select group...

Page 1056: ... button number 32 on a 32 button system To expand the shift function To set the KEY button as a shift operation expansion button in the Source Table Assign menu select the source table then in the Expand Xpt Shift Assign group press Key Button In order not to expand the shift operation press No Assign in the Expand Xpt Shift Assign group Assigning levels to a level selection button To assign level...

Page 1057: ...st on the left of the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 2 Press SS Enable turning it on or off On When a snapshot applying to the router is recalled the recall also applies to the selected destination selection button Off When a snapshot applying to the router is recalled the recall does not apply to the selected destination selection button Note Whe...

Page 1058: ... block To display the Prefs Utility menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF2 Panel and HF4 Prefs Utility The status area shows the settings of the user preference buttons Assigning Functions to User Preference Buttons 1 In the Panel Prefs Utility menu using any of the following methods select the button to be assigned Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scrol...

Page 1059: ...ou want to assign 4 Press Action Set This assigns the selected action which is reflected in the status area To cancel an assignment After selecting the relevant button press Clear Using the PREFS 9 to PREFS 16 settings There are sixteen user preference buttons that can be set PREFS 1 to PREFS 16 but there are only eight user preference buttons present in the menu control block By default these but...

Page 1060: ...ME1 K PVW ST M E 1 key preview output safe title on off On Off ME2 PGM1 ST ME2 PGM4 ST M E 2 PGM1 output safe title on off M E 2 PGM4 output safe title on off On Off ME2 PVW ST M E 2 preview output safe title on off On Off ME2 Clean ST M E 2 clean output safe title on off On Off ME2 K PVW ST M E 2 key preview output safe title on off On Off ME3 PGM1 ST ME3 PGM4 ST M E 3 PGM1 output safe title on o...

Page 1061: ...isable DME2 GPI Enabled Disabled Panel GPI Enbl Enable disable panel GPI Enabled Disabled SWR GPI1 Test Fire SWR GPI8 Test Fire Output test trigger from switcher GPI1 Output test trigger from switcher GPI8 Output lights only at the instant the button is pressed When the output is assigned Panel GPI1 Test Fire Panel GPI8 Test Fire Output test trigger from panel GPI1 Output test trigger from panel G...

Page 1062: ...ch you want to assign the shortcut Macro AT with Rate When registering an auto transition macro event on off setting of mode to save transition rate On Off Macro AT with A B Bus When registering an auto transition macro event for the transition control block on off setting of mode to save A B Bus cross point settings On Off Macro TL with Region When registering a timeline macro event on off settin...

Page 1063: ...u appears The status area shows the settings in the utility shotbox control block 2 Using any of the following methods select the button to be assigned Press directly on the list Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs 3 In the Action group select the function you want to assign Menu Shortcut Assign a frequently used menu to be recalled menu shortcut Utility Command ...

Page 1064: ...ntrol block the assigned button lights orange If a shotbox register was assigned the register name appears To cancel an assignment After selecting the relevant button press Clear List of utility commands and memory recall button status The following table shows the utility commands that can be assigned to memory recall buttons Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 3 Command Utility command sele...

Page 1065: ...Off ME3 PVW ST M E 3 preview output safe title on off On Off ME3 Clean ST M E 3 clean output safe title on off On Off ME3 K PVW ST ME 3 key preview output safe title on off On Off PP PGM1 ST PP PGM4 ST PP PGM1 output safe title on off PP PGM4 output safe title on off On Off PP PVW ST P P preview output safe title on off On Off PP Clean ST P P clean output safe title on off On Off PP K PVW ST P P k...

Page 1066: ... Fire Output test trigger from panel GPI1 Output test trigger from panel GPI8 Output lights only at the instant the button is pressed When the output is assigned DCU GPI1 Test Fire DCU GPI50 Test Fire Output test trigger from port assigned to DCU GPI1 Output test trigger from port assigned to DCU GPI50 Output lights only at the instant the button is pressed When the output is assigned Macro Attach...

Page 1067: ...n rapid succession 3 In the utility shotbox control block select the bank and press the button to which you want to assign the shortcut The menu screen goes back to the Prefs Utility Utility Module Assign menu and the selection is reflected in the status area The buttons in the utility shotbox control block flash 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to assign all desired menu shortcuts to the button...

Page 1068: ...n using any of the following methods Press directly on the list Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs 2 Press Name A keyboard window appears 3 Enter a name of not more than eight characters and press Enter The name you have set is reflected in the status area and on the memory recall button in the utility shotbox control block Assigning a Function to the Key 2 Row ...

Page 1069: ...wing differences The bank setting of knob 1 is from 1 to 5 The adjustment range of knob 2 is from 1 to the number of cross point buttons The character string for a button name is a maximum of four characters For details of executing a utility shot box function with the key 2 row see Executing Utilities With the Cross Point Buttons in the Key 2 Row Volume 2 and Executing a Shot Box Function With th...

Page 1070: ...ces disk recorder VTR Extended VTR connected to a DCU and accessible from the control panel to the DEV1 to DEV12 buttons which become operative when you press the DEV button on the device control block For a disk recorder or Extended VTR you can also make settings relating to sharing of file lists Further you can make settings for devices disk recorder VTR Extended VTR operable from an editing key...

Page 1071: ... select the action to be set Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs a As for the setting values see Selectable actions for various trigger types page 1071 b When knob 2 selection is Aux O ride Src c When knob 2 selection is Key Snapshot d When knob 2 selection is Snapshot or Shotbox e When knob 2 selection is Effect f Wh...

Page 1072: ...lling Edge Aux O ride Src When the trigger type is Level When Target is M E 1 M E 2 M E 3 or P P No Action When Target is Common Setup Format Overall system settings frame field rate number of lines Aspect overall system settings Simul Level Enable No Action Notes Level Enable is a function that determines whether GPI inputs are enabled Enable or disabled Disable for the Aspect and Format actions ...

Page 1073: ...To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is low press L Set This confirms the setting which appears in the status area Making Control Panel GPI Output Settings 1 In the Panel Device Interface menu press GPI Output The GPI Output menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the settings Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse ...

Page 1074: ...roup select the action block M E 1 to M E 3 and P P Set an action for the M E or PGM PST bank Common Set an action for error status 6 Using any of the following methods select the action to be set Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs a Action list when the trigger type is other than Status When Source is M E 1 M E 2 or...

Page 1075: ...tus Setting the Control Mode for P Bus Devices In the P Bus Control group of the Panel Device Interface menu select the mode Trigger When a predetermined button is pressed the action command assigned to that button is output to control an external device Timeline The external device is controlled as a keyframe effect controlled by the center control panel Setting the SCU Editor Panel Port When an ...

Page 1076: ...e knob a The range of the setting value depends on the DCU port settings The DCU number slot number and serial port number appear 3 Select the device selection button to be assigned from the Assign group Notes It is not possible to assign more than one device selection button to the same port The later assigned device selection button takes priority and the previous selection is invalidated If P B...

Page 1077: ...is assigned 1 In the Panel Device Interface Serial Port Assign menu select the target disk recorder Extended VTR Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob a The range of the setting value depends on the DCU port settings 2 Turn the knob to select the device selection button DEV1 to DEV12 for sharing the file list 3 Press Sam...

Page 1078: ... keyframe when an empty register is recalled Effect Auto Save Default KF Duration Setting whether or not to replay the first keyframe after rewinding a GPI P Bus disk recorder VTR Extended VTR Macro effect Source Dest Name For the Source Dest source destination names used by the system select one of the following Source name set by cross point assignment or fixed bus name Description name set on r...

Page 1079: ...nd the mode in which to edit macros using the standard type Flexi Pad control block Setting the On Air Tally To set the high tally state reflected on the control panel use the following procedure 1 In the Panel Operation menu press Button Tally The Button Tally menu appears 2 In the Tally Type group select either of the following R1 to R8 Reflect any of tally groups 1 to 8 as the tally state Indep...

Page 1080: ...e editing turn Edit Enable Auto Off on Automatic first keyframe insertion When an empty register is recalled to automatically insert a first keyframe of the state at that point turn 1st KF Auto Insert on Automatic effect saving To automatically save an effected when it is recalled after being edited turn Effect Auto Save on Keyframe duration default value Press Default KF Duration then enter the d...

Page 1081: ...the Name Display Mode group select the method of display in the source name displays Auto Optimize display according to number of characters A name of up to two characters appears as two characters in one line A name of up to four characters appears as four characters in one line Otherwise up to the first eight characters are shown in two lines 2 Character The first two characters appear 4 Charact...

Page 1082: ... Auto Deleg turning it on Button indications in the memory recall section When the Flexi Pad control block mode is WIPE or DME for the button indications in the memory recall section select Pattern or Register Name in the Wipe DME Display group When the mode is Snapshot Effect or MCRO select Register No or Register Name in the Snapshot Effect Display group For details see the following Wipe Snapsh...

Page 1083: ...T buttons To interchange the AUTO TRANS and CUT buttons in the transition control block press the Auto Trans Cut Swap button turning it on Transition preview operation mode For the operation mode of the TRANS PVW button select Lock or Hold in the Trans Pvw group The setting as to whether to use the One time mode in which the transition preview terminates when the transition completes or to use but...

Page 1084: ... To set the operation mode of the UTIL button in the cross point control block press either of the following in the Util Button group Hold Acts as a utility button while held down changing the assignment of the cross point button rows Lock For the key rows each time the button is pressed the cross point button assignment toggles between the utility assignment and the normal assignment The backgrou...

Page 1085: ...ch dial rotation angle to attain the same playback speed In the SHTL VAR Dial Range group select Narrow or Wide Specifying Main Split Fader In the Main Split Fader group of the Panel Operation menu select Left or Right Setting the Macro Execution Mode 1 Press Macro in the Panel Operation menu The Macro menu appears 2 In the Macro Execution Mode group select the macro execution mode Normal normal e...

Page 1086: ...ther or not to enable cross point button operations in the Attachment Setting Mode group With Button Function enable cross point button operations W o Button Function disable cross point button operations STOR PAUS EXIT STOR AUTO INS PAUS ALL INS MOD DEL NEXT PREV When the setting is Pause Only When the setting is Full Editing ...

Page 1087: ...e displayed at menu startup Scrl Down Clockwise Scrl Up Clockwise Set the mouse wheel scrolling direction for parameter setting Mouse Slider Control Select the mouse button used for adjusting the bar positions of the knob parameters To display the Maintenance menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF2 Panel and HF7 Maintenance The status area shows a list of the items with their settings Screen...

Page 1088: ...justing the Alarms In the Panel Maintenance menu make the following settings To give audible feedback from menu touch screen operations Press Touch Beep turning it on Calibrating the Touch Panel 1 In the Panel Maintenance menu press Touch Panel Calibration The following message appears To Perform Calibration please touch the center of each plus sign 2 Press Yes 3 Press the center of the plus sign ...

Page 1089: ...984 Setting the Mouse Wheel Scrolling Direction for Parameter Setting In the Mouse Wheel Direction group of the Panel Maintenance menu press one of the following buttons Scrl Down Clockwise Turning the mouse wheel in the direction to scroll down is the same as turning the parameter setting knob clockwise Scrl Up Clockwise Turning the mouse wheel in the direction to scroll up is the same as turning...

Page 1090: ...l Panel Setup Panel 1090 Screen Saver and Other Settings Maintenance Menu Note When Left Button selected even pressing one of the knob parameter buttons in the menu control block does not display a numeric keypad window ...

Page 1091: ...enu 1101 Assigning Output Signals 1101 Setting the Reference Output 1102 Setting the Output Signal 1103 Settings Relating to Video Switching Transition Menu 1106 Selecting the Bank to Make the Settings 1106 Settings Relating to Keys Wipes Frame Memory and Color Correction Key Wipe FM CCR Menu 1109 Switching Video Process Memory On or Off 1109 Settings for the Show Key Function 1110 Settings for Ke...

Page 1092: ...ettings 1121 Making Switcher Processor GPI Input Settings 1122 Making Switcher Processor GPI Output Settings 1125 Enabling or Disabling AUX Bus Control 1126 Setting the Interface Between the DME and the Switcher 1127 Setting the AUX Bus Output and Reentry Input 1128 Selecting the Mode for Turning Off Keys Upon Receiving the Editor Command 1129 ...

Page 1093: ...he key preview output you can select either video mode background and key or key mode key only and select the background and key K PVW Config Multi program mode Increase the number of M E or PGM PST programs and assign any of the following to the maximum of six outputs Out1 to 6 M E Output Assign Program outputs 1 to 4 preview output key preview outputs 1 and 2 clean output Further you can select ...

Page 1094: ...witching Timing menu appears 2 Select any of the following Any Not specified Field 1 Field 1 odd fields Field 2 Field 2 even fields Setting the Operation Mode In the M E Config group of the Switcher Config menu select the operation mode for each M E or PGM PST bank from the following Standard mode Multi Program mode DSK mode PGM PST only For details of the modes see the explanation of the M E Conf...

Page 1095: ...ocedure 1 In the Switcher Config menu press PGM Config The PGM Config menu appears The status area shows the background and key configuration assigned to the output of each bank 2 Using either of the following methods select the output for which you want to make the setting Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob The selec...

Page 1096: ...ea to make the selection Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob The selected key preview appears in reverse video 3 In the Mode group select Video mode or Key mode If you select Key mode skip to step 6 4 In the Bkgd group select the background In standard mode or Multi Program mode select Clean or Utility2 then skip to step 6 In DSK mode select any of Bkgd1 to Bkgd4 ...

Page 1097: ...et Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 3 In the User Region Assign group select the user region you want to assign If you do not want to assign a user region select No Assign 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required to make the settings for other regions 5 To confirm the setting press Execute To cancel the setting and return...

Page 1098: ...gnments of DME Channels to Use on the Individual M E Banks The Switcher Config DME Config menu allows you to select the DME channels to use on the M E and PGM PST banks for processed keys or DME wipes 1 In the Switcher Config menu press DME Config The DME Config menu appears 2 Using either of the following methods select the M E or PGM PST bank for which you want to set a DME channel assignment Pr...

Page 1099: ... Process Switch video processing on or off for each input signal and adjust the brightness hue and so forth Matte Illeg Color Limit Switch the illegal limiter on or off for the signal generated by the switcher internal matte generator Making Phase Adjustment and Through Mode Settings 1 In the Switcher Input menu select the input signal to which the settings apply Press directly on the list in the ...

Page 1100: ...b 3 Press Video Process turning it on 4 Adjust the following parameters To set the parameter settings to their defaults press Unity Enabling the Illegal Color Limiter To enable the illegal color limiter for the signals generated by the switcher internal matte generator press Matte Illeg Col Limit in the Switcher Input menu turning it on Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Src No Input signa...

Page 1101: ... setting is the number of scan lines from the reference blanking position of field 1 for the particular format which should be masked Through Enable or disable through mode Through mode can be enabled for AUX1 to 48 outputs M E and PGM PST program outputs and clean output Safe Title Enable or disable safe title and carry out settings for box 1 and 2 and cross Ref Output Phase Set the reference out...

Page 1102: ...t in the status area to make the selection Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs For output ports not to be assigned press Inhibit The selected signal appears in reverse video 4 Press Set to confirm the assignment Setting the Reference Output To adjust the reference output phase with respect to the reference input adjust the following parameters in the Switcher Out...

Page 1103: ...tus area shows the output ports and assigned signals and the white clip dark clip and chrominance clip values 2 Adjust the following parameters To set the values to the default values press Default Making vertical blanking interval adjustment and through mode settings 1 In the Switcher Output menu press V Blank Through The V Blank Through menu appears The status area shows the output ports and the...

Page 1104: ...ports and the assigned signals with the box 1 box 2 and cross states 2 To enable the safe title on off setting made in the Misc menu press Safe Title turning it on 3 Carry out either of the following operations To display a box Press Box1 or Box2 turning it on In this case carry out the following steps 4 and 5 To display a cross Press Cross turning it on 4 When you selected Box1 or Box2 in step 3 ...

Page 1105: ...Note This setting is disabled for the DVS 9000 system 1 In the Switcher Output menu press 4 3 Crop The 4 3 Crop menu appears The status area shows the output ports and respective 4 3 Crop mode settings 2 Press 4 3 Crop turning it on This enables the crop setting and this is reflected in the status area Note When the screen aspect ratio of 16 9 is selected for all M E banks in the System Format Act...

Page 1106: ...e bus toggle is off the split fader settings are enabled For each of the M E and PGM PST banks select enable or disable Fade To Black Enable or disable fade to black for each final program output Preset Color Mix Set the stroke mode for a preset color mix the key status for a transition including a key and the mode in which the transition type after a transition ends returns to the previous settin...

Page 1107: ... Selecting the background transition flip flop mode In the Transition menu press Bus Toggle to switch between on and off On Flip flop mode Off Bus fixed mode For more details see Fader Lever Operation in Bus Fixed Mode in Chapter 3 Volume 1 Setting the split fader to be enabled or disabled In the Transition menu press Split Fader to switch between Enable and Disable This setting is only valid when...

Page 1108: ...e Non Drop Key group select the key setting for a transition including a key To carry out the transition with the key state maintained press Key1 to Key4 turning them on See Transition Types in Chapter 1 Volume 1 4 If each time a transition ends the transition type is to return to the previous setting press One Time Enable Settings relating to fader lever operations To select the way in which the ...

Page 1109: ...nable or disable show key for edit preview M E and P P Pvw K Pvw Key Auto Drop For each switcher bank M E 1 to M E 3 PGM PST specify a key to be turned off automatically when you press a cross point button for the bus to be output as the background Mask Border Process Set the processing order of masks and borders for each M E or PGM PST bank Key Priority Set the key priority operation mode for eac...

Page 1110: ...Auto Drop Function The key auto drop function automatically switches off a particular key when you press a cross point button in a bus that outputs the background on the particular switcher bank PGM PST or M E 1 to M E 3 When the background output bus is in flip flop mode this is always the A bus In bus fixed mode it is either the A bus or the B bus depending on the fader lever position For detail...

Page 1111: ...knob The selected bank appears in reverse video Selecting the key memory mode In the Key Memory group of the Switcher Key Wipe FM CCR menu select one from Full full mode Simple simple mode Off For more details see Key Memory in Chapter 4 Volume 1 Selecting the processing order of masks and borders In the Mask Border Process group of the Switcher Key Wipe FM CCR menu select one of the following Mas...

Page 1112: ...snapshot or keyframe effect does not reflect the cross point selection information To change the cross point hold attribute of a snapshot If you select Key Disable above this also applies key disable to the cross point hold attribute If you select Key Disable With Status the key disable function is applied including the key on off status Setting the operation mode when the pattern limit is release...

Page 1113: ...an be selected for input to the color corrector Press CCR Internal Signal Enable in the Switcher Key Wipe FM CCR menu turning it on You can select signals generated internally to the switcher as material for input to the color corrector Note When you select an M E reentry signal as material for input to the color corrector 1H delay occurs to the output signal of M E ...

Page 1114: ...ANS buttons in the cross point control block and GPI output ports M E Link Make settings to link together two M E banks Key Trans Link Make settings to link key transitions Setting a Cross Point Button Link To link together two buses internal to the switcher use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher Link menu press Internal Bus Link The Internal Bus Link menu appears The status area shows the ...

Page 1115: ...N 1 to MON 8 as Key are available Note With one of M E 1 to M E 3 Trans PGM and P P Trans PGM selected for Master Bus the link setting become effective as soon as you start moving the fader lever 6 In the Bus Select group select Linked Bus link destination bus 7 Referring to step 5 select the bus to be the link destination and press Bus Set 8 Turn the knob to select the link table and press Link T...

Page 1116: ...sses are reassigned and this is reflected in the status area To change the link number and link table number In this menu too you can change the link number and link table number To do this turn the knobs as follows to make the setting then press Link Table Set Linking Cross Point Buttons and GPI Output Ports To link cross point buttons or the CUT and AUTO TRANS buttons in the cross point control ...

Page 1117: ...l the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs a These include main pair numbers 1 to 128 and Cut and Auto Trans on each bank 5 In the Video Button group press Select The selected video or button name is reflected in the status area To clear a video button name link Make the selection to which the setting applies then in the Video Button group press Clear 6 To select for each bus whether the GPI link s...

Page 1118: ...ing Two M E Banks You can link any two M E banks for some operations by using the Switcher Link M E Link menu The operations for which you can link two M E banks are as follows Transition execution auto transition cut and fader lever operation Next transition selection Transition type selection Note Clip transition execution is excluded from the above transition execution operations 1 In the Switc...

Page 1119: ...roup select Linked M E link destination 6 In the same way as in step 4 select the M E or PGM PST bank you want to be the link destination then press M E Set To link the banks not only for transition execution but also for the other operations Press Transition Only turning it off To release the link setting Use the same operation as in step 2 to select the link number for which you want to release ...

Page 1120: ...ource then press Key Set Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob a The keys and their numbers selectable as link source link destination are as follows M E 1 Key1 1 M E 1 Key2 2 M E 1 Key3 3 M E 1 Key4 4 M E 2 Key1 5 M E 2 Key2 6 M E 2 Key3 7 M E 2 Key4 8 M E 3 Key1 9 M E 3 Key2 10 M E 3 Key3 11 M E 3 Key4 12 DSK1 13 DSK2 ...

Page 1121: ...larities and make the action settings Aux Control Set whether operations on the AUX buses from the four 9 pin ports are inhibited DME Type Setting When the DME is an MVE 9000 or MVE 8000A carry out interface settings and for an SDI interface set the AUX bus outputs and reentry inputs Making 9 Pin Port Device Interface Settings The description in this section takes the REMOTE1 port as an example Fo...

Page 1122: ...ace menu press GPI Input The GPI Input menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the settings Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs 3 In the Trigger Type group select the trigger type Rising Edge Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse Falling Edge Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an in...

Page 1123: ... Key2 Auto Trans Key3 Cut Key3 Auto Trans Key4 Cut Key4 Auto Trans SS Recall Key1 SS Recall Key2 SS Recall Key3 SS Recall Key4 SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind KF Reverse Run No Action When Target is P P Cut Auto Trans DSK1 Cut DSK1 Auto Trans DSK2 Cut DSK2 Auto Trans DSK3 Cut DSK3 Auto Trans DSK4 Cut DSK4 Auto Trans FTB Cut FTB Auto Trans SS Recall DSK1 SS Recall...

Page 1124: ... off before the action is completed This may corrupt the setup settings It is therefore recommended to use Level Enable to avoid such a situation Carrying out level settings To set the low level and high level first set the trigger type to Level then use the following procedure 1 In the Switcher Device Interface menu select the action to be set and press H L Set The H L Set menu appears 2 Using an...

Page 1125: ... state for the specified pulse width Any Edge Each time the trigger occurs the relay contacts are alternately closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low Status Depending on the status the relay contacts are closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low No Operation The trigger has no effect on the output 4 Turn the knobs to select the pulse width and timing t...

Page 1126: ...call DSK2 SS Recall DSK3 SS Recall DSK4 SS Recall Effect Recall Effect Recall Run KF Run KF Stop KF Rewind No Action When Source is Common No Action Action list when the trigger type is Status When Source is M E 1 M E 2 or M E 3 Key1 On Key2 On Key3 On Key4 On No Action When Source is P P DSK1 On DSK2 On DSK3 On DSK4 On No Action When Source is Common Error Make Error Break No Action b When knob 2...

Page 1127: ... of the port selected in step 2 Disable disable control of the port selected in step 2 Manual make whether control of the port selected in step 2 is possible or not depend on the setting in the Misc menu 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 as required to make the settings for other ports Setting the Interface Between the DME and the Switcher To set the interface between the DME and the switcher when the DME is ...

Page 1128: ...lect the material for the second channel not on the DME external video bus but on the AUX bus Setting the AUX Bus Output and Reentry Input Select the signal input to the DME AUX bus output and the signal returned as the switcher primary input reentry input as follows Note Before the following operations carry out the procedure described in the previous item Setting the Interface Between the DME an...

Page 1129: ...status area Press directly on the list on the right of the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob When Aux Bus is selected When Re Entry is selected 6 Press Set In the list on the right of the status area the selected content is reflected in the specified DME channel Repeat steps 3 to 6 as required Selecting the Mode for Turning Off Keys Upon Receiving th...

Page 1130: ...top command is received all keys for the selected regions are turned off Specified When an All Stop command is received among all the keys for the selected regions only the keys specified by the editor are turned off Note When an All Stop command is received in the process of a transition the keys selected for the next transition are also turned off ...

Page 1131: ... Signals 1133 Making DME System Phase Adjustment 1133 Setting the TBC Window Center Position 1133 Settings Relating to Signal Outputs Output Menu 1135 Adjusting the Monitor Output 1135 Setting the Monitor Output 1136 Interfacing With External Devices Device Interface Menu 1137 Making DME GPI Input Settings 1138 Making DME GPI Output Settings 1140 ...

Page 1132: ...te generator on or off System Phase Adjust the operation timing of the whole system with respect to the reference signal TBC Center Set the TBC window center position In the following description the settings for DME1 are given by way of example but the settings for DME2 are carried out in a similar way Setting the Initial Crop 1 In the DME1 Aspect group of the DME Input menu select the screen asp...

Page 1133: ...ference phase use the following procedure 1 In the DME Input menu press System Phase 2 Set the following parameters Setting the TBC Window Center Position When the MVE 8000A MVE 9000 is connected through SDI interface the DME Input TBC Center menu allows you to set the TBC window center position Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Top Position of top side 9 00 to 9 00 2 Left Position of lef...

Page 1134: ...aced MVE 9000 is used 2 Using any of the following methods select the input number for which you want to set the TBC center position Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 3 In the Video Key group when an SDI interfaced MVE 8000A 9000 is used or the External Video group when an SDI interfaced MVE 9000 is used press the de...

Page 1135: ...tor output connectors Clip Adjust Adjust the clip levels of DME1 and DME2 outputs Adjusting the Monitor Output When the MVE 8000A MVE 9000 is connected through SDI interface you can adjust both DME1 and DME2 output video clip levels Use the following procedure DME 1 is taken by way of example 1 In the DME1 Ch1 Ch4 group of the DME Output menu press Clip Adjust turning it on 2 Set the following par...

Page 1136: ...MVE 9000 is used 1 In the DME Output menu press Monitor Output The Monitor Output menu appears 2 In the Select group select the DME to which the setting applies DME1 Select DME1 DME2 Select DME2 3 In the list on the left of the status area press directly on the monitor output for which you want to make setting 4 In the list on the right of the status area press directly on the signal you want to o...

Page 1137: ...ngs GPI Output Set the GPI output ports and trigger polarities and make the action settings In the following description the settings for DME1 are given by way of example but the settings for DME2 are carried out in a similar way Setting the editor protocol In the DME1 Editor Protocol group of the DME Device Interface menu press the following buttons to make the setting DME Control by DME protocol...

Page 1138: ...nput pulse Any Edge Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the input signal Level Carry out the specified operation when the input is low or high No Operation Apply no trigger on an input pulse 4 In the Target group select what this applies to channels 1 to 4 or Proc 5 Using any of the following methods select the action to be set Press directly on the list in the status area Press the a...

Page 1139: ...led Disable for the Aspect and Format actions that can be used when the trigger type is Level When Level Enable is used if the input is Disable then it is not possible to switch Aspect or Format by GPI input If a GPI to switch Aspect or Format occurs when powering the system off the action triggered by the GPI may start immediately before the power goes off and the power may go off before the acti...

Page 1140: ...polarity Status Depending on the status the relay contacts are closed or opened or the output is switched between high and low No Operation The trigger has no effect on the relay state or output level 3 Using any of the following methods select the action you want to set Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob a Error Make...

Page 1141: ...gn Menu 1145 Making DCU GPI Input Settings 1145 Parallel Output Settings Output Config Menu 1149 Assigning a GPI Output Port 1149 Releasing the Assignment of a GPI Output Port 1150 GPI Output Setting GPI Output Assign Menu 1151 Making DCU GPI Output Settings 1151 Serial Port Settings Serial Port Assign Menu 1154 Making Serial Port Settings 1154 Making Detailed Settings on the External Device Conne...

Page 1142: ...parallel output ports inserted in an option slot GPI Output Assign Make GPI output settings Serial Port Assign Set the protocol to match the devices connected to a 9 pin serial port You can also select the control panel used to control each device Note For setup relating to DCU it is necessary to make the same settings on multiple control panels maximum three units that are sharing the DCU After c...

Page 1143: ...are unused after making the above assignments To display the Input Config menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF5 DCU and HF1 Input Config The status area shows input port information Assigning a GPI Input Port 1 In the DCU Input Config menu select what the setting applies to DCU1 or DCU2 from the DCU Select group 2 In the Parallel Input Assign group press GPI Input 3 Using any of the follow...

Page 1144: ...the DCU Input Config menu select what the setting applies to DCU1 or DCU2 from the DCU Select group 2 In the Parallel Input Assign group if GPI Input is on press it to turn it off 3 Turn the knobs to adjust the following parameters 4 In the Parallel Input Assign group press No Assign Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 From No First port number 1 to To No 2 To No Last port number From No to...

Page 1145: ...rectly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 2 In the Trigger Type group select the trigger polarity Rising Edge Apply the trigger on a rising edge of an input pulse Falling Edge Apply the trigger on a falling edge of an input pulse Any Edge Apply the trigger on a change in the polarity of the input signal Level Carry out the specified...

Page 1146: ...s for various trigger types When the trigger type is other than Level M E 1 Cut M E 2 Cut M E 3 Cut P P Cut M E 1 Auto Trans M E 2 Auto Trans M E 3 Auto Trans P P Auto Trans M E 1 Key1 Auto Trans M E 1 Key1 Cut M E 1 Key2 Auto Trans M E 1 Key2 Cut M E 1 Key3 Auto Trans M E 1 Key3 Cut M E 1 Key4 Auto Trans M E 1 Key4 Cut M E 2 Key1 Auto Trans M E 2 Key1 Cut M E 2 Key2 Auto Trans M E 2 Key2 Cut M E ...

Page 1147: ...When the trigger type is Level Simul Custom Format frame field rate number of lines System Format SWR Format DME Ch1 Ch4 Format DME Ch5 Ch8 Format Aspect System Aspect SWR Aspect M E 1 Aspect M E 2 Aspect M E 3 Aspect P P Aspect DME Ch1 Ch4 Aspect DME Ch1 Aspect DME Ch2 Aspect DME Ch3 Aspect DME Ch4 Aspect DME Ch5 Aspect DME Ch6 Aspect DME Ch7 Aspect DME Ch8 Aspect Level Enable No Action Notes Lev...

Page 1148: ...rocedure 1 In the DCU GPI Input Assign menu select the action to be set and press H L Set The H L Set menu appears 2 Using any of the following methods select the settings Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 3 To apply the selection made in step 2 when the input is the GPI high level press H Set To apply the selection ...

Page 1149: ...n the DCU Output Config menu select what the setting applies to DCU1 or DCU2 from the DCU Select group 2 In the Parallel Output Assign group press GPI Output 3 Using any of the following methods select the output port and GPI output number Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs a When the MKS 2700 is connected select 2 b...

Page 1150: ...e DCU Select group 2 In the Parallel Output Assign group if GPI Output is on press it to turn it off 3 Turn the knobs to select the slot and port to which the setting applies 4 In the Parallel Output Assign group press No Assign Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 From Slot First port slot 2 to 6 2 From Port First port number 1 to 54 3 To Slot Last port slot 2 to 6 4 To Port Last port numbe...

Page 1151: ...r Turn the knob 2 In the Trigger Type group select the trigger polarity Rising Edge The trigger causes the relay contacts to be open circuit or drives the output high and holds this state for the specified pulse width Falling Edge The trigger causes the relay contacts to be shorted or drives the output low and holds this state for the specified pulse width Any Edge Each time the trigger occurs the...

Page 1152: ...ant to set Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs a Action list when the trigger type is other than Status When Source Device is SCU M E1 Key1 SS Recall M E1 Key2 SS Recall M E1 Key3 SS Recall M E1 Key4 SS Recall M E2 Key1 SS Recall M E2 Key2 SS Recall M E2 Key3 SS Recall M E2 Key4 SS Recall M E3 Key1 SS Recall M E3 Key2...

Page 1153: ...3 On M E1 Key4 On M E2 Key1 On M E2 Key2 On M E2 Key3 On M E2 Key4 On M E3 Key1 On M E3 Key2 On M E3 Key3 On M E3 Key4 On P P DSK1 On P P DSK2 On P P DSK3 On P P DSK4 On Error Make Error Break Device Recording No Action When Source Device is DCU Error Make Error Break No Action b When knob 2 selection is Key Snapshot c When knob 2 selection is GPI 6 To confirm the selection press Action Set This c...

Page 1154: ...t on the left of the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob a The setting value range depends on the DCU port setting When the MKS 2700 is connected select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port 3 Using any of the following methods select the protocol for the connected device Press directly on the list on the right of the status area ...

Page 1155: ...er To return the set name to the default name Press Clear in the Name group 7 From the SCU Select group select the control panel SCU1 SCU2 or SCU3 assigned to operations on the external device connected to the serial port Deleting the serial port assignment 1 In the DCU Serial Port Assign menu select the target for the setting DCU1 or DCU2 from the DCU Select group 2 Using any of the following met...

Page 1156: ...DCU port setting When the MKS 2700 is connected select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port 3 Press Port Setting The DCU Serial Port Assign P Bus Setting menu appears At the top of the status area the relevant serial port slot number protocol serial port name and SCU number appear In the lower part of the status area the device name and response speed settings appear 4 Using...

Page 1157: ...R 1 In the DCU Select group of the DCU Serial Port Assign menu select the target for the setting DCU1 or DCU2 2 Using any of the following methods select the serial port connected to the VTR for which you want to make the settings Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob a The range of setting values depends on the DCU port...

Page 1158: ...olation data is returned from a VTR use that interpolation data VITC Use VITC CTL Control CTL pulses or timer counter pulses are used Use this only for a tape on which no timecode is recorded The displayed tape position is based on the reference signal specified here 5 Using any of the following methods specify the VTR constants Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to...

Page 1159: ... the knob a The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting When the MKS 2700 is connected select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port 3 Press Port Setting The DCU Serial Port Assign DDR SD9P Setting menu appears At the top of the status area the relevant serial port slot number protocol serial port name SCU number and disk recorder type appear In the lower part ...

Page 1160: ...group of the DCU Serial Port Assign menu select the target for the setting DCU1 or DCU2 2 Using any of the following methods select the serial port connected to the disk recorder for which you want to make settings Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob a The range of setting values depends on the DCU port setting When th...

Page 1161: ...documentation for the connected device 7 Using any of the following methods specify the item to which the video port number or response speed setting applies Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob a 1 Video Port Number of the video port associated with the serial port to which the setting applies For a player the output p...

Page 1162: ...ng values depends on the DCU port setting When the MKS 2700 is connected select 2 for the slot and a value in the range 1 to 6 for the port 3 Press Port Setting The DCU Serial Port Assign Extended VTR Setting menu appears At the top of the status area the relevant serial port slot number protocol serial port name and SCU number appear In the lower part of the status area the response speed setting...

Page 1163: ...m the cued up state to begin playback 4 Stop Delay delay time from issuing the stop command until actually stopping 5 Turn the knob to set the response speed of the Extended VTR 6 Press Set This confirms the setting 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 as required to make the settings for other items Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Item No Item selection 1 to 4 a Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting valu...

Page 1164: ...Chapter 22 DCU Setup DCU 1164 Serial Port Settings Serial Port Assign Menu ...

Page 1165: ...tion Settings Tally Enable Menu 1174 Making New Tally Generation Settings 1174 Modifying Tally Generation 1175 Deleting Tally Generation Settings 1175 Tally Copy Settings Tally Copy Menu 1177 Making New Tally Copy Settings 1177 Modifying Tally Copy Settings 1178 Deleting Tally Copy Settings 1178 Parallel Tally Settings Parallel Tally Menu 1179 Making or Modifying Parallel Tally Settings 1179 Delet...

Page 1166: ...trix size and positioning level source address settings and so on External Box To obtain the signal selection status of external devices with a parallel input assign a matrix as an external selector in the S Bus space Make the matrix size assignment level source address and other settings Alias Name Gp Set the group number for an S Bus description name to be displayed in the source name displays f...

Page 1167: ...maximum value is 897 Making an External Box Setting 1 In the Router Tally Router menu press External Box Assign The External Box Assign menu appears The status area shows the external box size address and other settings 2 In the Device group select what the setting applies to External Box 1 to 4 3 In the Matrix Size group select the number of inputs No Assign Do not use 8 1 Select an external box ...

Page 1168: ...Turn the knobs to make adjustments At this point make the settings of Destination and Level the same as in step 3 This automatically couples External Box1 and External Box2 forming an external box with 40 8 32 inputs Setting the group number of an S Bus description name 1 In the Alias Name Gp group of the Router Tally Router menu press Gp No 2 Turn the knob to set the following parameter a When se...

Page 1169: ...enu Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally Router Tally 3 In the Alias Name Gp group press Set This confirms the setting which is reflected in the status area Note Transmit the description name selected here from the router ...

Page 1170: ...e Router Tally Group Tally menu To display the Group Tally menu In the Engineering Setup menu select VF6 Router Tally and HF2 Group Tally The following functions are available here Tally Group Select the group tally Gp1 to 4 or Gp5 to 8 which can be used For the parallel tally all groups can be used regardless of this setting S Bus Tally Enable Specify S Bus tally enabled or disabled Setting the t...

Page 1171: ...ings 1 In the Router Tally Wiring menu press New The New menu appears 2 With a knob or menu operation set the destination When switcher inputs and outputs are connected to the router in a group you can specify the start and end destination addresses Destination From Specify the start destination address for the wiring configuration Destination To When the wiring configuration is multiple specify t...

Page 1172: ...le to specify multiple destinations in a single operation and a single Destination Address must be specified 3 Press Execute This updates the wiring settings Deleting Wiring Settings 1 In the Router Tally Wiring menu using either of the following methods select the wiring whose settings you want to delete Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse vide...

Page 1173: ...1173 Wiring Settings Wiring Menu Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally Router Tally Destination level order ascending tDestination address order ascending tSource level order ascending ...

Page 1174: ...e Tally Type Specify the tally type Destination Specify the address and level Tally Enable Specify the timing at which a tally is enabled Enable Always enabled Disable Always disabled Tally Input Follow the tally input status Making New Tally Generation Settings 1 In the Router Tally Tally Enable menu press New The New menu appears 2 Turn the knobs to set the following parameters a 1 R1 2 G1 3 R2 ...

Page 1175: ... port number 6 Press Execute This sets the settings made in steps 2 to 5 as the settings for tally generation Modifying Tally Generation 1 In the Router Tally Tally Enable menu press Modify The Modify menu appears 2 With reference to steps 2 to 5 in the preceding section Making new tally generation settings change the parameters as required 3 Press Execute This modifies the tally generation settin...

Page 1176: ...Chapter 23 Setup Relating to Router Interface and Tally Router Tally 1176 Tally Generation Settings Tally Enable Menu This deletes the selected tally generation entry ...

Page 1177: ...ows the tally copy status Making New Tally Copy Settings 1 In the Router Tally Tally Copy menu select New The New menu appears 2 Turn the knob to select the copy from source When setting more than one tally copy you can specify the copy from source start and end addresses 3 Specify the copy to source address 4 Press Execute This makes the tally copy setting according to the specifications in steps...

Page 1178: ...ally Copy Settings 1 In the Router Tally Tally Copy menu using any of the following methods select the tally copy whose settings you want to delete Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knob 2 Press Delete This deletes the selected tally copy entry Knob Parameter Adjustment Setting values 1 Copy From Copy from source 1 to 102...

Page 1179: ...s the parallel tally settings Making or Modifying Parallel Tally Settings 1 In the Device group of the Router Tally Parallel Tally menu select DCU1 or DCU2 2 Using any of the following methods select the slot number and port number Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs a When the MKS 2700 is connected select 2 for the s...

Page 1180: ...te This makes the parallel tally settings in accordance with the settings in steps 1 to 6 Deleting Parallel Tally Settings 1 In the Router Tally Parallel Tally menu using any of the following methods select the parallel tally whose settings you want to delete Press directly on the list in the status area Press the arrow keys to scroll the reverse video cursor Turn the knobs 2 Press Clear This dele...

Page 1181: ...ally Port group of the Router Tally Serial Tally menu select the port to which the setting applies 2 In the Tally Group group select the tally group 3 In the Tally Type group press the tally types to select You can select up to four Note The selectable tally types depend on the settings in step 2 Making the Serial Tally Source Address Settings To set the serial tally source address for each port u...

Page 1182: ...ally Source Assign menu select the serial tally port and bit number see steps 2 and 3 in the previous item then press Clear This clears the source address setting for the selected bit To clear all source address settings In the Router Tally Serial Tally Source Assign menu select the serial tally port then press All Clear A confirmation message appears If you select Yes this clears all source addre...

Page 1183: ...Chapter 24 Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel Procedure for Simple Connection 1184 Setting Status of the MKS 8080 8082 in Simple Connection 1186 ...

Page 1184: ... MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel use the following procedure For settings on the MKS 8080 8082 see the section Making the Setting With Buttons Setup Function in the Operation Manual for the MKS 8080 8082 1 Carry out initialization of the MKS 8080 8082 settings This can be done on the MKS 8080 8082 separately 2 Set the MKS 8080 8082 station number in the range 2 to 17 This can be done on the MKS...

Page 1185: ...1185 Procedure for Simple Connection Chapter 24 Simple Connection of the MKS 8080 8082 AUX Bus Remote Panel Select the setting from SWR1 and SWR2 and set each of Source Destination and Level to 1 ...

Page 1186: ...01 and following H SET PHANTOM TABLE for Router mode This is unset since the unit does not operate in router mode N SET PANEL TABLE for Router mode The source is set to IN001 and following and destination is set to OUT001 and following However since the unit does not operate in router mode these settings are not used R SET ROUTE Since when using the simple connection the switcher and router cannot...

Page 1187: ...Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS Checking the Communications Status 1188 Communications Status Display 1188 ...

Page 1188: ...nd HF1 LAN Status The following communications status screen appears Devices constituting the system only appear if they are connected You can check connection information in the Engineering Setup System System Config menu See System Settings System Config Menu page 978 Even if a DCU is connected if there is a communications error it does not appear The LAN communications status is shown as follow...

Page 1189: ... Status Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS When not connected Red and blue flashing Peripheral LAN PERIPH LAN When connected Amber When not connected Not shown If the connection between the menu panel and another panel is broken it does not appear ...

Page 1190: ...Chapter 25 DIAGNOSIS 1190 Checking the Communications Status ...

Page 1191: ...ine 1192 Data Saved by Setup Define 1192 Data Saved by Initial Status Define 1197 Error Messages 1201 Error Messages Displayed in the Error Status Error Log Menu 1201 Error Messages Appearing in a Message Box 1206 Error Messages Shown in the Error Information Menu 1216 ...

Page 1192: ...ineering Setup Panel Config Link Program Button External Bus Link All data relating to External Bus Link menu 7321 7 Engineering Setup Panel Config 10 Key Region Assign All data relating to 10 Key Region Assign menu 7321 8 Engineering Setup Panel Config Link Program Button All data relating to Link Program Button menu 7321 11 Engineering Setup Panel Config MP2 Main Sub Assign All data relating to ...

Page 1193: ...a relating to GPI Input menu 7325 3 Engineering Setup Panel Device Interface GPI Output All data relating to GPI Output menu 7325 4 Engineering Setup Panel Device Interface DCU Serial Port Assign All data relating to DCU Serial Port Assign menu 7326 Engineering Setup Panel Operation All data relating to Operation menu 7326 2 Engineering Setup Panel Operation Effect Mode All data relating to Effect...

Page 1194: ...Setup Switcher Config User1 8 Config All data relating to User1 8 Config menu 7331 5 Engineering Setup Switcher Config Logical M E Assign All data relating to Logical M E Assign menu 7331 6 Engineering Setup Switcher Config DME Config All data relating to DME Config menu 7331 Engineering Setup Switcher Config Setting data for knob 3 Phase 7331 Engineering Setup Switcher Config Setting data for Swi...

Page 1195: ...tion Curve Setting data for Fader Curve group 7335 Engineering Setup Switcher Key Wipe FM All data relating to Key Wipe FM CCR menu 7335 1 Engineering Setup Switcher Key Wipe FM CCR Show Key All data relating to Show Key menu 7335 2 Engineering Setup Switcher Key Wipe FM CCR Key Auto Drop All data relating to Key Auto Drop menu 7336 1 Engineering Setup Switcher Link Internal Bus Link All data rela...

Page 1196: ...a relating to Input menu 7341 1 Engineering Setup DME Input TBC Center All data relating to TBC Center menu b 7343 Engineering Setup DME Output Video clip level adjustment values for DME1 and DME2 outputs b 7343 1 Engineering Setup DME Output Monitor Output All data relating to Monitor Output menu a 7344 Engineering Setup DME Device Interface All data relating to Device Interface menu 7344 1 Engin...

Page 1197: ...ctions SUB MENU SITE Utility Shotbox Control Block BANK1 to BANK4 memory recall button Downstream Key Control Block DSK1 to DSK4 K SS key source name display key snapshot buttons Device Control Block RSZR ASP LOC Cross Point Control Block KEY3 KEY4 SHIFT UTIL MCRO ATTCH ENBL DUAL BKGD BUS UTIL SBOX Keyframe Control Block EDIT ENBL Auxiliary Bus Control Block Cross point buttons SHIFT DEST 2ND KEY ...

Page 1198: ...Mode group Included in Switcher Same as data saved in Snapshots a For each M E setting data relating to the following cross points transitions Key1 to Key4 including settings in the independent key transition control block wipes DME wipes video processing Color backgrounds 1 2 Frame memory AUX bus including video processing settings Monitor bus 3213 Misc Enable Side Flags All data relating to Side...

Page 1199: ...t Ch5 Ch8 Brick All data relating to Brick menu 4213 4223 Global Effect Ch1 Ch4 Shadow Global Effect Ch5 Ch8 Shadow All data relating to Shadow menu 4113 DME Edge Key Border All data relating to Key Border menu b 4114 DME Edge Art Edge All data relating to Art Edge menu b 4115 DME Edge Drop Flex Shadow All data relating to Drop Flex Shadow menu b 4116 DME Edge Wipe Crop All data relating to Wipe C...

Page 1200: ...ig settings are saved in a snapshot when Recall M E Config is set to ON but are not saved by Initial Status Define b For MVE 9000 only Included in DME 4174 DME Enhanced Video Modify Glow All data relating to Glow menu b 3211 Misc Enable Port Enable DME1 and DME2 group data Type Menu number Menu path Saved data ...

Page 1201: ...tatus menu or Error Log menu When an error is current effective the Error Status menu appears see page 1202 When an error has already been cleared the Error Log menu appears see page 1204 You can select whether or not to indicate the occurrence of an error by the word ERROR shown on the menu title button by setting Error Popup in the Error Status menu or Error Log menu For details see Error Status...

Page 1202: ...enu appears 2 Press VF1 Error Info The error information menu appears 3 Press either of the following buttons HF1 Error Status display the Error Status menu HF2 Error Log display the Error Log menu Error Status menu The Error Status menu lists currently occurring error information listed with the most recent information at the top When an error has been cleared the error disappears from the list ...

Page 1203: ... b Date Time This shows the date and time the error occurred c Device This shows the device on which the error occurred d Status This shows the details of the error e Refresh Status button This refreshes the list display 1 No 2 Date Time 3 Device 4 Status 5 Refresh Status button 6 Error Popup button ...

Page 1204: ...f if a device error occurs do not display ERROR on the menu title button Error Log menu The Error Log menu lists changes in the error status from the time that the menu display in the menu operating section is started up listed with the most recent information at the top A maximum of 1024 error status changes appear and when the number exceeds 1024 the oldest items disappear from the list 1 No 2 D...

Page 1205: ...on This deletes the selected error log item from the list f Plural button When this is on you can select more than one error log To cancel the selection press once again to return to the normal display g All button When this is on all error log items are selected To cancel the selection press once again to return to the normal display h Error Popup button This selects whether or not to display ERR...

Page 1206: ...316 7 Engineering Setup System Install Unit Config License License Management In the above menu since the entered information was incorrect the Activate License procedure failed Check the license key and enter again Activate License License key was successfully entered The license will be activated after rebooting your system 7316 7 Engineering Setup System Install Unit Config License License Mana...

Page 1207: ... Create Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Append Key Frame using a register UserX region with which a keyframe creating or editing operation is proceeding Try again after the keyframe operation has finished Append Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Register is full UserX 2515 Frame Memory Still Create Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Append Ke...

Page 1208: ...ion with which a keyframe creating or editing operation is proceeding Try again after the keyframe operation has finished Create Key Frame cannot be executed There is no free Key Frame UserX 2515 Frame Memory Still Create Key Frame In the above menu an attempt was made to execute Create Key Frame for a UserX region with insufficient usable keyframes Create Key Frame cannot be executed Key Frame Re...

Page 1209: ...he same directory and ID were selected for source and target Select a different directory and ID File Frame Memory Some requests are skipped Following operation is not permitted Loading that will cause duplicate register name 7151 File Frame Memory 7162 File All External File Import Export In the above menu an attempt was made to load a file of a name already existing in the register File Open Sta...

Page 1210: ...ain System will be restarted then please execute HDD format again 7317 Engineering Setup System Maintenance In the above menu the hard disk formatting procedure failed If the hard disk is functioning correctly or in some cases when there is damage to the disk it may not be possible to format the disk correctly in a single attempt In such cases it is necessary to restart the system and then carry o...

Page 1211: ...m Install Unit Config Install In the above menu some program files were not installed for example because the hardware is not present Check the skipped files against the hardware configuration to confirm that the installation was completed correctly Not Found The software package does not exist on the removable disk 7316 10 Engineering Setup System Install Unit Config Install In the above menu the...

Page 1212: ...ed during recovery data installation a Target MENU Error code INSTALL_UNCOMPRESS_ER ROR Program file XXXXX During software installation an attempt to uncompress a file failed Target MENU Error code Error message received from the Switcher DME Panel Processor Program file XXXXX During software installation an error occurred on the Switcher DME Panel Processor The displayed message is the same as sh...

Page 1213: ... file is found 7316 10 Engineering Setup System Install Unit Config Install In the above menu when installing a program file included in the installation settings file could not be read in correctly Download another set of installation files and try the installation once more Internal Error Data HDD The user data partition of hard disk drive is damaged and all data is lost The hard disk drive need...

Page 1214: ...canceled 7316 9 Engineering Setup System Install Unit Config Texture Package In the above menu an error occurred when loading a texture file Delete texture files with an illegal size or illegal file name then try again Target File XXXXX Failed to load target bmp file Illegal Size This operation is canceled Make Package Texture file XXXXX Not Found This texture file does not exist on the removable ...

Page 1215: ...orrectly copied to the memory card and restart the system to retry a Restore Data Failure Copying recovery data hasn t finished Restoring recovery data using Menu 9999 failed Check that the recovery data has been correctly copied to the memory card and restart the system to retry a Set Time Date Error Wrong Format 7317 Engineering Setup System Maintenance In the above menu an incorrect date and ti...

Page 1216: ...ation for Dual Simul Operation Page 7312 No Panel Assign Information Page 7312 No Switcher Assign Information Page 7312 No System Operation Mode Information Page 7312 No DME Channel Information Icon Title Message Description Error message Error description measures Error Packet Format Load save the data again Still then the message is displayed contact a Sony service representative Error No Reques...

Page 1217: ...Result Error FTP Put Command Error FTP Delete Error FTP Delete Command Error FTP Delete Result Error Control Table No Space Error Control Table Same Name Error No Queue Error Resize BMP Error Make Vector Error Uncompress Error Compress Error Server Not Respond No reactions are returned from the processor Check your Data LAN connections and the power source of the processor Error No Space There is ...

Page 1218: ...e settings 537 Blind settings 593 Blink function 236 Blur settings 563 Border 204 parameters 242 processing order 1111 settings 533 Brick settings 653 Brightness adjustment 1087 Broken glass settings 592 BS button 129 Bus fixed mode fader operation 179 wipe direction 181 Bus selection 142 Button assignment settings 1058 numbers 146 147 operation mode 1082 Button assignments 1058 C Calibration 1088...

Page 1219: ...ment 1003 Diagnosis 1187 Diagnostic menu 488 Digital multi effects 38 495 Dim and fade settings 573 Direct store 665 Direction 275 294 326 Directory operations 937 creating a directory 937 deleting a directory 938 renaming a directory 938 Disk recorder control 672 Cueup Play 680 file operations 695 information check 679 recording to 678 settings 1159 1160 timeline 688 timeline editing 691 Display ...

Page 1220: ...function 941 batch operations 932 copying 926 939 deleting 929 directory operations 937 displaying menus 920 import export 935 individual files 916 loading 924 933 renaming 927 saving 923 932 selecting a device 922 selecting regions 922 viewing detailed information 920 Files 42 916 autoload function 919 backups 395 deleting 394 operations 916 renaming 395 restoring 396 Film effect 579 Fine mode 51...

Page 1221: ...trol block 189 setting in the numeric keypad control block 190 Initialization hard disk 1005 Input string 129 value 127 Installation 990 Interpolation settings 642 Invert settings 640 Item display 127 129 J Joystick 71 Joystick sensitivity 1084 K Kaleidoscope settings 597 Key 34 1 2 row 53 auto drop 1110 border settings 539 bus selection buttons 55 control block 64 default 208 delegation assign 10...

Page 1222: ...auto insert mode 851 creating 844 creation editing 851 creation saving 863 editing 844 845 events 841 execution 847 850 860 execution by attachment 897 execution mode 1085 file editing rules 949 menu 478 menu macro 899 offline editing 883 online editing 877 overview 841 register recalling 850 860 registers 841 saving 858 timeline 41 Macro attachment list 896 Macro operations in Flexi Pad control b...

Page 1223: ...lock effect 762 keyframe 749 macro operations 873 master timeline 768 shotbox 832 snapshot 799 Multifunction flexipad control block assigning functions 1038 MVE 8000A 495 MVE 9000 495 N NAM 58 101 151 368 Nega settings 568 Negative NAM 269 Network settings 977 Next transition 151 selecting 151 selection buttons 58 100 Non additive mix 58 101 151 Nonlinear effects settings 580 Non Sync state 178 No...

Page 1224: ...ace tally setup 1165 RTR button 82 Run mode setting 761 S Safe title settings 1104 Screen saver 1087 SCU editor panel port 1075 Search dial 72 676 Second 2ND button 82 Selected bus display 82 source name displays 82 SEMI LINK 272 Separate sides settings 637 Sepia settings 566 Serial port settings 1154 tally setting 1181 Setup 43 for control panel 1014 for DCU 1142 for the whole switcher system 976...

Page 1225: ...mporary attributes 706 786 Three dimensional coordinate space 496 parameter display 507 parameters 497 transformations 496 Three dimensional parameters display 513 entering 515 values 515 Three dimensional transformation 495 Through mode settings 1103 Time settings 752 strobe effect 579 Time offset execution 184 Timecode input mode 168 Timeline menu 719 721 main parts 719 recalling 719 Top menu li...

Page 1226: ...imeline editing 691 W Wave settings 580 Wind settings 619 Window adjustment 214 218 WIPE 58 60 101 Wipe 35 152 copy 403 enhanced 266 modify clear 291 mosaic 266 pattern list 447 random diamond dust 266 rotary 266 settings 1109 standard 266 swap 403 Wipe Crop settings 555 Wipe direction 275 294 selection buttons 59 92 102 Wipe modifiers 274 Wipe pattern aspect ratio 284 296 edge modification 276 ke...

Page 1227: ...for use by the purchasers of the equip ment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any pur pose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation ...

Page 1228: ...DVS 9000 9000SF System SY 3 704 906 11 1 2002 Sony Corporation ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for DVS-9000

Reviews:

Related manuals for DVS-9000

Brands by name

Popular brands

Sony DVS-9000, User Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for DVS-9000

Reviews:

Related manuals for DVS-9000

Brands by name

Popular brands